To update the repeater list,

click here!

ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS INTRODUCTION

1 ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT

2 USING A MICROSD CARD

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

4 BATTERY CHARGING

VHF/UHF TRANSCEIVER 5 BASIC OPERATION

ID-51A 6 BC RADIO OPERATION

ID-51E 7 D-STAR INTRODUCTION

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

13 SCAN OPERATION

14 PRIORITY WATCH

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

Instructions for advanced operations and additional
details are described in this manual.
See the Basic instruction manual to begin D-STAR,
16 MENU SCREEN
especially for new users.
17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

18 OPTIONS

19 SPECIFICATIONS

TROUBLESHOOTING

INDEX
Previous view
Previous view

INTRODUCTION
15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

� Duplex (PDF
About these Advanced Instructions operation
format)
The Duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency
up or
These Advanced Instructions describe the details of down from the receive
the ID-51A/E frequency
features. This by
PDFan formatted
offset manual provides
amount.
you with convenient functions, as follows.
D Setting the frequency offset
q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
Move to the previously read page. w Push [MENU]Shows . a term description
Push D-pad( �) to select the root item is
(“DUP/
Click Previous view at the left topeon an When the mouse cursor moved over a term which
TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
each page, to move back to the previ- is highlighted in yellow, the description of the term is
D-pad
ously read page. (Ent)
displayed.
(� )

Previous view r Push D-pad(�) to select the “Offset Freq,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
t Rotate [DIAL] to set the frequency offset to be-
15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX
tween 0.000.00 OPERATIONS
and 59.99500 MHz, and then push
Previous view D-pad(Ent). (Setting example: 1.000.00 MHz)
The tuning step in the VFO mode is used when
setting the frequency offset. Th
15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS
� Duplex operationbelow.
[V/MHz] toggles the tuning digit, as shown off

TS*
The Duplex operation 1shifts
MHz the 10 MHz frequency
transmit
up or down *from the receive
Previous view frequency by an offset Ro
The frequency changes according to the preset tuning pu
amount.
� Duplex operation
Shows the location of keys steps. (p.
y Push [MENU]
5-6) 15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

to exit the [MENU] screen.

When the cursor is moved over a termDwith a red
The Duplex operation shifts the transmit Setting
frequencythe frequency offset
underline, a red
up or down fromcircle appears
the receive around
frequency theoffset
byPush
q an ap-
[V/MHz]
� Duplex operation [DIAL]
to select the VFO mode.
The Duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency
propriate
amount.key(s) on the figure of the transceiver.
w Push [MENU] . up or down from the receive frequency by an offset
amount.
e Push D-pad(�) to select the root item (“DUP/
D Setting the frequency offset
D Setting the frequency offset TONE...”), and then push q PushD-pad(Ent).
[V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
w Push [MENU] .
q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.D-pad e Push D-pad(�) to select the root item (“DUP/
TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
w Push [MENU] . (Ent) D-pad
(Ent)

e Push D-pad(�) to select the root item (�(“DUP/ ) (� )

TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent). r Push D-pad(�) to select the “Offset Freq,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
r Push D-pad(�) to select the[DIAL]
t Rotate “Offset
to set theFreq,” andto then
frequency offset be-
D-pad push D-pad(Ent).
tween 0.000.00 and 59.99500 MHz, and then push

Example: When the cursor is moved over

D-pad(Ent). (Setting example: 1.000.00 MHz)
(Ent) The tuning step in the VFO mode is used when
t Rotate [DIAL] to set the frequency
setting the frequency offset. offset to be- The current frequency
(� ) [V/MHz] in the description, a
tween 0.000.00 and 59.99500
below.
[V/MHz] toggles the tuning digit, as shown
MHz, and then push
offset
Pu
TS* 1 MHz 10 MHz
red�)circle
r Push D-pad( appears
to select around
the “Offset the
and ap-
Freq,”D-pad(Ent).
then (Setting
To reset to the default example:
*The frequency value. 1.000.00
changes according to the preset MHz)
tuning
Rotate [DIAL], then
push D-pad(Ent).

propriate key(s).
push D-pad(Ent). The tuning step in the VFOto exit
y Push [MENU]
mode
steps. (p. 5-6)
is used when
the [MENU] screen.
settingPush [QUICK]offset.in step t as [DIAL]
the frequency described above, then The current f
t Rotate [DIAL] to set the frequency offset to push be- D-pad(Ent) to reset to the default
[V/MHz] toggles the tuning digit, as value. shown offset
tween 0.000.00 and 59.99500 MHz, and then below.
push
D-pad(Ent). (Setting example: 1.000.00 MHz)
The tuning step in the VFO mode is usedTS* when 1 MHz 10 MHz
NOTE: Rotate [DIAL
setting the frequency offset. *The frequency The current frequency
[V/MHz] toggles the tuning digit, as shown • The frequencyaccording
changes offset cannot to the be preset
changed tuning in the DR
offset
Pu
push D-pad(
steps. (p. 5-6)
mode.
below. Push [QUICK]
y Push [MENU] • The Auto to exit the
To reset
repeater
to the[MENU]
default value. screen.
function uses the preset fre-
TS* 1 MHz 10 MHz Push [QUICK] in step t as described above, then
quency offset. Depending on the frequency offset
push D-pad(Ent) to reset to the default value.
[DIAL] Rotate [DIAL], then
*The frequency changes according to the preset tuning value, the offNOTE: band indication, “OFF,” push appears on
Move to the page,
steps. (p. 5-6) if clicked. the display when• The [PTT]
frequency offsetis pushed.
cannot be changed in(p.
the 15-5)
DR
D-pad(Ent). Push D-pad(Ent)
mode.
y Push [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen. • The Auto repeater function uses the preset fre-
quency offset. Depending on the frequency offset

(p. 15-5)
value, the off band indication, “OFF,” appears on
[DIAL] the display when [PTT] is pushed. (p. 15-5)

Th
The current frequency
offset off
15-4
15-4

The screen shots at the right column, correspond Push [QUIC

To reset to the default value. to the operating instructions and procedures
Push [QUICK] shows both
in step t as described setting
above, then and operating example.
push D-pad(Ent) to reset to the default value.
Push [QUICK]
To reset to the default value.
Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the
NOTE:
Push [QUICK] in step t as described above, then
United Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia
push D-pad(Ent) to reset to the default value.• and/or
The otheroffset
frequency countries.
cannot be changed in the DR Push D-pad(
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
mode.
All other products or brands are registered trademarks• The Auto repeater function
or trademarks uses
of their the preset
respective fre-
holders.
NOTE: quency offset. Depending on the frequency offset
i
value, the off band indication, “OFF,” appears Push
on D-pad(Ent)
• The frequency offset cannot be changed in the DR
mode. the display when [PTT] is pushed. (p. 15-5)
• The Auto repeater function uses the preset fre-
Previous view

INTRODUCTION

Functions and features of Adobe® Reader®

The following functions and features can be used with Adobe® Reader®.

• Keyword search
Click “Find (Ctrl+F)” or “Advanced • Find screen
Search (Shift+Ctrl+F)” in the Edit
menu to open the search screen.
This is convenient when search-
ing for a particular word or phrase • Advanced search screen
in this manual.
*The menu screen may differ, depend-
ing on the Adobe® Reader® version.

Click to open the find or search

screen or advanced search screen.

• Printing out the desired pages. • Read Out Loud feature.

Click “Print (P)” in File menu, and then select the pa- The Read Out Loud feature reads aloud the text in
per size and page numbers you want to print. this Instruction Manual.
*The printing setup may differ, depending on the Refer to the Adobe® Reader® Help for the details.
printer. Refer to your printer’s instruction manual (This feature may not be usable, depending on your
for details. PC environment including the operating system.)
*Select "A4" size to print out the page in the equal-
ized size.

*The screen may differ, depending on the Adobe® Reader® version.

ii
Previous view

Section 1 ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT

■■ Antenna............................................................................... 1-2
■■ Battery pack........................................................................ 1-2
■■ Belt clip. .............................................................................. 1-3
■■ Hand strap........................................................................... 1-3

1-1
 Previous view

1 ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT

■■Antenna
Antenna
Insert the antenna connector into the antenna base
and tighten the antenna.

 EVER carry the transceiver by holding only the an-

N
tenna.

✓✓ For your information

Third-party antennas may increase transceiver perfor-
mance. An optional AD-92SMA antenna connector
adapter is available to connect an antenna that has a
BNC connector. (p. 18-3)

■■Battery pack
To attach or detach the battery pack:
Attach or detach the battery pack or battery case, as To attach To detach
illustrated to the right.
See page 4-2 for details of the battery pack.

Even when the transceiver power is OFF, a small

current still flows in the radio. Remove the battery
pack or case from the transceiver when not using it w q
for a long time. Otherwise, the battery pack or in- q
stalled batteries will become exhausted. q
The battery protection function automatically sets w
transceiver to Low1 power (0.5 W) when the temper-
ature is around 0°C (+32°F) or below. In this case, Battery pack
transmit power selections (High, Mid and Low2) are or battery case
disabled.
Illustration shows the
battery pack is attached.

1-2
 Previous view

1 ACCESSORY ATTACHMENT

■■Belt clip
To attach the belt clip:
qqRemove the battery pack from the transceiver, if it is To attach To detach
attached. (p. 1-2) q
wwSlide the belt clip in the direction of the arrow until the w
belt clip locks in place, and makes a ‘click’ sound.
Tab
To detach the belt clip:
Belt clip
qqRemove the battery pack from the transceiver, if it is
attached. (p. 1-2) Battery pack
wwLift the tab up (q), and slide the belt clip in the direc- or battery case
tion of the arrow (w).

■■Hand strap
To facilitate carrying the transceiver, slide the hand
strap through the loop on the top of the rear panel, as
illustrated to the right.

Hand strap

1-3
Previous view

Section 2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ About the microSD card....................................... 2-2
■■ Saving data onto the microSD card. .................... 2-2
■■ Inserting the microSD card. ................................. 2-3
DD Formatting the microSD card........................... 2-3
■■ Removing the microSD card................................ 2-4
■■ Save setting data onto a microSD card................ 2-5
■■ Save with a different file name............................. 2-7
■■ Loading the saved data files that are on the
microSD card........................................................ 2-9
■■ Backup the data stored on the microSD card
onto a PC........................................................... 2-11
DD About the microSD card’s folder composition.2-11
DD Make a backup file on your PC...................... 2-12
■■ Updating the repeater list................................... 2-13

2-1
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■About the microSD card ■■Saving data onto the microSD

The microSD and microSDHC cards are not available card
from Icom. Purchase locally. The following data can be stored onto the card:

A microSD card of up to 2 GB or a microSDHC of up to • Data settings of the transceiver

32 GB, can be used with the ID-51A/E. Memory channel contents, and repeater lists stored in
Icom has checked the operation with the following mi- the transceiver.
croSD and microSDHC cards.
• Communication contents
(As of November 2012) The transmitted and received audio.
Brand Type Memory size
microSD 2 GB • Communication log
4 GB The communication and receive history log.
SanDisk® 8 GB
microSDHC
16 GB • Automatic answering voice audio for the DV mode
32 GB Voice audio to use with the Auto Reply function in the
• The above list does not guarantee the card’s perfor- DV Mode.
mance.
• Through the rest of this document, the microSD card • Voice audio for the Voice TX function
and a microSDHC card are simply called microSD Voice audio to use with the Voice TX function.
cards.
• Icom recommends that you format all microSD cards • Position data from the GPS receiver
to be used with the ID-51A/E, even preformatted mi- Position and time data from a GPS receiver, that is in a
croSD cards for PCs or other uses. log file as a route.

NOTE: •V
 oice Recorder
• Read the instructions of the microSD card thorough- The microphone audio.
ly before use.
• NEVER remove the microSD card, detach the bat-
tery pack/case, or power OFF the transceiver, while
reading or writing data to or from the microSD card,
or during cloning. It will cause the data to be cor-
rupted or damage the card.
• NEVER drop, or apply vibration or impact to the mi-
croSD card. This will cause the data to be corrupted
or damage the card.
• The microSD card will get warm if used continuously
for a long period of time.
• A microSD card has a certain lifetime, so data read-
ing or writing will not be possible when using it over
a long time period.
• Icom will not be responsible for any damage caused
by data corruption of a microSD card.

2-2
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Inserting the microSD card

qqTurn OFF the transceiver.
wwLift OFF the [micro SD] slot cover on the side panel. NEVER forcibly or in-
eeWith the terminals facing the front, insert the card versely insert the card.
into the slot until it locks in place, and makes a ‘click’ It will damage the card
sound. and/or the slot.
DO NOT touch the terminals.
[micro SD] slot
rrFirmly close the [micro SD] slot cover.
Close the cover,
CAUTION:
leaving no gap.
After a microSD card is
inserted, firmly close the
[micro SD] slot cover as microSD card
shown to the right.
Terminals facing Slot cover
the front

Correct Wrong

• If you use a brand new microSD card, format the

microSD card, by doing the following steps. Appears when
• Formatting a card erases all its data. Before for- the microSD
matting any programmed card, make a backup file card is insert-
onto your PC. ed.

DDFormatting the microSD card

qqTurn ON the transceiver.
wwPush [MENU] .
eePush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad() to select “Format,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Format OK?” appears.
ttPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to format.
• The formatting starts and the display shows the format-
ting progress.
• NEVER turn OFF the power while formatting.
yyAfter formatting, the display automatically returns to
the SD CARD menu.
uuPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

Shows the
formatting
progress

2-3
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Removing the microSD card

qqTurn OFF the power.
wwLift OFF the [micro SD] slot cover on the side panel.
eePush in the microSD card until a click sounds, and
then carefully pull it out.
• DO NOT touch the terminals.
rrFirmly close the [micro SD] slot cover.
Close the cover,
CAUTION:
leaving no gap.
After a microSD card is
inserted, firmly close the
[micro SD] slot cover as
shown to the right.

Correct Wrong

Slot cover Slot cover

Push the microSD Pull the microSD
card until a click card out.
sounds.
If removing the microSD card while the transceiver’s
power is ON, by doing the following steps.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Unmount,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Unmount OK?” appears.
rrPush D-pad() to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to unmount.
ttWhen the unmounting is completed, “Unmount is
completed.” is displayed, then the screen automati-
cally returns to the SD CARD menu.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
uuLift OFF the [micro SD] slot cover on the side panel.
iiPush in the microSD card until a click sounds, and
then carefully pull it out.
• DO NOT touch the terminals.
ooFirmly close the [micro SD] slot cover.

2-4
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Save setting data onto a microSD card

Memory channels, item settings in the menu screen,
and repeater lists can be saved on the microSD card.
Saving data settings on the microSD card allows you
to easily restore the transceiver to its previous settings,
even if an all reset is performed.

✓✓ For your information

Data settings are saved in the “icf” file format that is
used in the CS-51 cloning software.
The saved data on the microSD card can be copied
onto a PC and edited by the cloning software.
Data settings can be saved as a new file or to overwrite
an older file.

Saved as a new file

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Save Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “<<New File>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The FILE NAME screen is displayed.
• The file name is automatically named in the following
manner; Setyyyymmdd_xx (yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd:
day, xx: serial number)
Example: If a 2nd file is saved on October 30, 2012, the
file is named “Set20121030_02”.
• If you want to change the file name, see “Save with a dif-
ferent file name” (p. 2-7).
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save the file name.
• The confirmation screen “Save file?” appears.
yyPush D-pad() to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to save.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.
uuPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

2-5
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Save setting data onto a microSD card (Continued)

Overwriting a file
(Example: Overwriting the “Set20121002_01”)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Save Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired file to be over-
written, and then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: Selecting “Set20121002_01”)
• The confirmation screen “Overwrite?” appears.
ttPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to overwrite the setting file.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

2-6
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Save with a different file name

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Save Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “<<New File>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The FILE NAME screen is displayed.
ttPush [CLR] to delete the previously programmed
character.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, symbol
or number.
When the cursor does not select a character, the previ-
ous character is deleted.
If [CLR] is held down, all the characters are delet-
ed.
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
• The selected character blinks.

About text entry

•P  ush D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to a upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the in-
put mode selection window.
-P  ush D-pad() to select the desired Upper case let-
ters, Lower case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
- To enter symbols, select “!”#,” and then push D-pad(Ent)
to open the symbol character selection window. Rotate
[DIAL] to select the desired symbol character, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Move the cursor, then rotate [DIAL] to insert a character.
• A space can be selected in any input mode selected.
• Push D-pad() to enter a space.
• If you make a mistake, push [CLR] to delete the se-
lected character, or hold down [CLR] to continuously erase
the characters, first to the right, and then to the left of the
cursor.

Input mode selection

☞☞Continued on the next page window

2-7
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Save with a different file name (Continued)

uuPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second

digit.
iiRepeat steps y and u to enter a name of up to
14-characters, including spaces.
(Example: My Data)
ooAfter entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).
• After pushing D-pad(Ent), “Save file?” appears.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!0 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-

pad(Ent) to save the setting file.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen appears after the save is completed.
!1 Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

2-8
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Loading the saved data files that are on the microSD card
The saved memory channels, item settings the in menu
To update the repeater list,
list and repeater lists can be copied to the transceiver.
click here!
This function is convenient when copying the saved
data, such as memory channels, or repeater lists, to
another ID-51A/E and then operating with the same
data.

Saving the current data is recommended before load-

ing other data in the transceiver.

 oading all the data in the

(Example: L
“Set20121002_01” file)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Load Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired file to be load-
ed, and then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: Selecting “Set20121002_01”)
• The LOAD FILE screen appears.
ttPush D-pad() to select the desired loading con-
tent, as shown below.
• ALL:
Loads all memory channels, item settings in the menu
list and the repeater list into the transceiver.
• Except My Station:
Loads all memory channels, item settings in the menu
list except MY call signs and the repeater list into the
transceiver.
• Repeater List Only:
Loads only the repeater list into the transceiver.
 (☞ Continued on the next page)

2-9
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Loading the saved settings file that are on the microSD card (Continued)

yyPush D-pad(Ent) to select the file, and then the “Keep

'SKIP' settings in Repeater List?” appears.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

uuPush D-pad() to select “YES” or “NO.”

• When “YES” is selected, the skip settings of the repeater
list are retained. (p. 9-36)
iiPush D-pad(Ent), “Load file?” appears.
ooPush D-pad() to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to start the file check.
• While checking the file, “CHECKING FILE” and a prog-
ress bar are displayed.
!0 After checking, settings data loading starts.
• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are dis-
played.
!1 After loading, “COMPLETED!” appears.
To complete the loading, reboot the transceiver.

2-10
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Backup the data stored on the microSD card onto a PC

A backup file allows easy restoring even if the setting wwGps

data in the microSD card is accidentally deleted.
Depending on your PC, a memory card reader (pur- eeQsoLog
chase locally) may be additionally required to read the qqID-51
rrReply
microSD card.
ttRxLog

yySetting
DDAbout the microSD card’s folder compo-
sition uuVoice iiyyyymmdd

The folder composition in the microSD card is as fol- iiyyyymmdd

lows:
qqID-51 folder ooVoiceRec iiyyyymmdd
The folders created in the ID-51A/E are composed in
this ID-51 folder. iiyyyymmdd
wwGPS folder
GPS logging data is stored in the “log” format. !0 VoiceTx
eeQsoLog
QSO log data is stored in the “csv” format. (Example: Selecting the setting data)
rrReply folder When the microSD card is inserted into the microSD card
Automatic reply data is stored in the “wav” format. drive of the PC or the microSD card reader (purchase local-
ttRxLog ly), the screen appears as shown below.
RX record log data is stored in the “csv” format.
yySetting folder
The transceiver’s setting data is stored in the “icf”
format.
uuVoice folder
The recorded QSO audio date folders are created in Click
the Voice folder.
iiyyyymmdd folder
Recorded audio file is stored in the “wav” format.
The folder name is automatically created in the fol-
lowing manner:
yyyymmdd (yyyy:Year, mm:month, dd:day)
ooVoiceRec
The recorded Voice recorder audio date folders are Click
created in the VoiceRec folder.
!0 VoiceTx
Recorded voice audio data for the Voice TX function
is stored in the “wav” format.

Click

The setting
data
2-11
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Backup the data stored on the microSD card onto a PC (Continued)

DDMake a backup file on your PC

Windows 7 is used for these instructions.
qqInsert the microSD card into the microSD card drive
on your PC.
• If no microSD card drive is built-in, connect a memory
card reader (purchase locally) and then insert the mi-
croSD card into it. Click
wwClick the “Open folder to view files” option to access
the card.

eeSelect “Removal disk” and right click.

rrClick “Copy.”

Click

Right click

ttOpen the desired folder to copied to, the right click

then click “Paste” to copy the data that is in the mi-
croSD card onto the hard disk.
(Example: Copying into the “Backup” folder in C
drive) Click

yyWhen removing the microSD card from the PC, click

the microSD card icon in the task bar. (“ ” icon in Click
the screen shot as shown to the right.)
• The screen shot shows when a memory card reader is
connected.

uuRemove the microSD card from the PC when “Safe

To Remove Hardware” appears.
• The screen shot shows when a memory card reader is
connected.

2-12
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■Updating the repeater list

For easy operation, the repeater list is preloaded into ID-51A/E’s latest setting file is uploaded to
your transceiver. “Cloning software(Rev. MM) and manuals” in
This section describes how to manually update the re- the Icom website screen.
peater list using a microSD card. • The displayed contents may differ.
The latest setting file can be downloaded from the Icom
website.

1. Downloading the latest setting file (ICF file)

q Access the following URL to download the latest
data.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/firm/
index.html

• The latest settings file (ICF file) and repeater list (CSV;
Comma Separated Values file) are contained in the
downloaded ZIP file.

File Name: 51_U_121201.zip

Depending on the ID-51A

Cloning software(Rev. MM) and manuals 2012/12/MM
updated file date. ID-51E

Depending on the version.

This instruction manual describes when the file

name is “51_U_121201.zip,” for example.

w Decompress the compressed file that is downloaded

from the Icom website.
“51_U_121201” folder will be created on the same
place where the downloaded file is saved.
PC
2. Inserting the microSD card into a PC
e Insert the microSD card into the microSD card drive
on your PC.
• Icom recommends that you format all microSD
cards to be used with the ID-51A/E, even prefor- microSD
card to the Card
matted microSD cards for PCs or other uses. Transceiver reader
See page 2-3 for details of inserting and removing
the microSD card.

3. Copying the latest ICF file to the microSD card

r Double-click the “51_U_121201” folder created on Click
the same place where the downloaded file is saved.
t Copy the ICF file (Example: “51_USA_121201.icf”)
in the folder to the “Setting” folder in the “ID-51” folder
of the microSD card.

☞☞Continued on the next page

Click

2-13
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Updating the repeater list (Continued)

4. Inserting the microSD card PC

y Remove the microSD card from the PC, and insert

the card into the transceiver’s slot.
See page 2-3 for details of inserting and removing
the microSD card.
microSD
card from the Card
Transceiver reader
Saving the current data is recommended before
loading other data into the transceiver.

5. Updating the repeater list

u Push [MENU] .
i Push D-pad() to select the root item (“SD Card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

o Push D-pad() to select “Load Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
!0 Push D-pad() to select the ICF file to be loaded,
and then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: Selecting “51_USA_121201.icf”)
• The LOAD FILE screen appears.
!1 Push D-pad() to select “Repeater List Only,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).

☞☞Continued on the next page

Select the file

to be loaded

Select

2-14
 Previous view

2 USING A microSD CARD

■■ Updating the repeater list (Continued)

!2 Push D-pad(Ent) to select the file, and then the “Keep

'SKIP' settings in Repeater List?” appears.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!3 Push D-pad() to select “YES” or “NO.”

• When “YES” is selected, the skip settings of the repeater
list are retained. (p. 9-36)
!4 Push D-pad(Ent), “Load file?” appears.
!5 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to start the file check.
• While checking the file, “CHECKING FILE” and a prog-
ress bar are displayed.
!6 After checking, settings data loading starts.
• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are dis-
played.
!7 After loading, “COMPLETED!” appears.
To complete the loading, reboot the transceiver.

Repeater list updating is complete!

2-15
Previous view

Section 3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Front, top and side panels.................................... 3-2
■■ Function display................................................... 3-5

3-1
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■Front, top and side panels

@2
@1
q
w

e
Function
display (p. 3-5)

r @0
t
!9
y !8

u !7

i !6
!5
o !4
!0
!3
!1
!2
Speaker
Internal
microphone

q ANTENNA CONNECTOR (p. 1-2) u MENU • LOCK KEY [MENU ]

Connect the antenna here. ➥ Push to enter or exit the Menu screen.
• An optional AD-92SMA adapter (p. 18-3) is available to (p. 16-2)
connect an antenna with a BNC connector.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to toggle the Key
w TX/RX INDICATOR [TX/RX] (pp. 5-9, 5-10) Lock function ON or OFF. (p. 5-11)
Lights green while receiving a signal or when the
i MODE • SCAN KEY [MODE•SCAN]
squelch is open; lights red while transmitting.
➥ Push to select the operating mode.
e PTT SWITCH [PTT] (p. 5-10) (p. 5-7)
Hold down to transmit, release to receive. • Selectable operating modes are AM, FM,
For ID-51E only FM-N or DV.
Push briefly, then hold down to transmit a 1750 Hz ➥ Hold down for 1 second to enter the scan
tone burst. type selection mode. (pp. 13-5, 13-9)
• Push again to start the scan.
r CD (RX CALLSIGN DISPLAY)/D-PAD (LEFT) KEY • Push to stop the scan.
[CD]/D-pad()
➥ While in the DV mode, hold down for o MAIN • DUAL KEY [MAIN•DUAL]
1 second to open the received calls record. ➥ Push to toggle the main band between A
(p. 9-5) and B bands. (p. 5-3)
➥ While in the DR mode, or with the Menu ➥ Push and hold for 1 second to toggle the
screen or Quick Menu screen opens, push dualwatch function ON or OFF. (p. 5-3)
to select an upper tier menu. (p. 16-2) !0 microSD CARD SLOT [micro SD]
t SQUELCH KEY [SQL] Insert a microSD card of up to 32 GB SDHC.
➥➥ Hold down to temporarily open the squelch and !1 ENTER KEY [ENT]
monitor the operating frequency. While in the DR mode, or with the Menu screen or
➥➥ While holding down this key, rotate [DIAL] to ad- Quick Menu screen open, push to open or set the
just the squelch level. (p. 5-6) selected item or option. (p. 16-2)
y POWER KEY [ ]
Hold down for 1 second to turn the transceiver power
ON or OFF. (p. 5-2)
3-2
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Front, top and side panels (Continued)

@2
@1
q
w

e
Function
display (p. 3-5)

r @0
t
!9
y !8

u !7

i !6
!5
o !4
!0
!3
!1
!2
Speaker
Internal
microphone

!2 DR (D-STAR REPEATER)/D-PAD (DOWN) KEY !6 MEMORY/CALL • SELECT MEMORY WRITE KEY
[DR]/D-pad() [M/CALL•S.MW]
➥ Hold down 1 second to enter the DR mode. ➥ In the VFO mode, push once to enter the
(p. 8-3) Memory selection mode, push again to en-
➥ While in the DR mode, or with the Menu ter the Call channel mode. (p. 8-3)
screen or Quick Menu screen open, push For ID-51A only
to move the value or option selector bar In the Call channel mode, push once to
down. (p. 16-2) enter the Weather channel mode.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to enter the Select
!3 EXTERNAL DC IN JACK [DC IN]
Memory Write mode. (p. 12-4)
➥➥ Connects to the supplied wall charger, BC-167SA/
SD/SV, to charge the attached battery pack. (p. 4-3) !7 VFO/MHz • CLEAR • OUTPUT POWER KEY
➥➥ Connect an external DC power supply through [VFO/MHz•CLR•LOW]
the optional CP-12L or CP-19R cigarette lighter ➥ Push to select the VFO mode. (p. 5-8)
cable or OPC-254L DC power cable for external ➥ While in the VFO mode, push to select
DC operation. (p. 4-6) 1 MHz and 10 MHz tuning steps. (p. 5-6)
➥ With the Menu screen or Quick Menu screen
!4 DATA JACK [DATA]
open, push to return to the operating mode
Connects to a PC through the optional OPC-2218LU
before entering the menu screen. (p. 16-2)
data communication cable, for low-speed data com-
➥ While in the Memory Name or Call Sign
munication in the DV mode or for cloning. The jack is
Programming mode, push to delete the
also used to connect an external GPS receiver.
character. (p. 12-11)
See page 9-14 or 17-17 for more details.
➥ While scanning, push to cancel a scan.
!5 QUICK MENU • SPEECH KEY [QUICK SPCH] (pp. 13-5, 13-9)
➥ Push to enter or exit the Quick Menu ➥ Hold down for 1 second to select the out-
screen. (p. 5-4) put power. (p. 5-10)
• The Quick Menu is used to quickly select vari- • Select the transmit output power of High, Mid,
ous functions. Low2, Low1 or S-low.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to audibly an- • While holding down this key, rotate [DIAL] to
nounce the displayed frequency, operating select the desired output power.
mode or call sign. (p. 17-6)
3-3
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Front, top and side panels (Continued)

@2
@1
q
w

e
Function
display (p. 3-5)

r @0
t
!9
y !8

u !7

i !6
!5
o !4
!0
!3
!1
!2
Speaker
Internal
microphone

!8 CS (CALL SIGN SELECT)/D-PAD (RIGHT) KEY @2 CONTROL DIAL [DIAL]

[CS]/D-pad() ➥➥ Rotate to select the operating frequency. (p. 5-6)
➥ Hold down for 1 second to enter the oper- ➥➥ While in the Memory mode, rotate to select a
ating call sign select mode. memory channel. (p. 12-3)
➥ While in the DR mode, or with the Menu ➥➥ While scanning, rotate to change the scanning
screen or Quick Menu screen open, push direction. (p. 13-3)
to select a lower tier menu. (p. 16-2) ➥➥ Hold down [SQL], and rotate to select the squelch
level. (p. 5-6)
!9 RXÚCS (RX CALL SIGN CAPTURE)/D-PAD (UP)
➥➥ While in the DR mode, or with the Menu screen
KEY [RXÚCS]/D-pad()
or Quick Menu screen open, rotate to select a de-
➥ Hold down for 1 second to set the received
sired option or value.
call signs (station and repeaters) as the
operating call sign.
• While holding down this key, rotate [DIAL] to
select another call sign in the RX history.
➥ While in the DR mode, or with the Menu
screen or Quick Menu screen open, push
to move the value or option selector bar up.
(p. 16-2)
EXTERNAL MICROPHONE/SPEAKER JACK
@0 
[MIC/SP]
Connect a cloning cable, optional speaker micro-
phone or headset, if desired.
See Section 18 for a list of available options.
Be sure to turn OFF the power before connecting
or disconnecting optional equipment to or from
the [MIC/SP] jack.
@1 VOLUME CONTROL [VOL]
Rotate to adjust the audio volume level. (p. 5-2)

3-4
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■Function display
e t !1
q w r y u io !0 !2

@3 !3

@2
!4
@1 !5 BC Radio setting pop-up
!6 window (Tuning mode)
@0 !7
!9 !8

Dual band display

Single band display

ᐜ㔞⾲♧
q BATTERY ICON t DUPLEX ICON (p. 15-5)
➥➥ Shows the capacity of the attached battery pack “DUP+” appears when plus duplex is selected, and
in four levels. (p. 4-2) “DUP–” appears when minus duplex is selected.
• “ ” (battery icon) appears when the battery y BC RADIO ICON (p. 6-2)
pack is attached. Appears when the BC radio is ON.
• “ ” appears when the battery pack must be
charged. u GPS ICON
➥➥ “ ” appears when the optional battery case is ➥➥ Appears while GPS function is in use. (p. 10-2)
඘㟁⾲♧
attached. (p. 4-4) Stays ON when the GPS receiver is activated and
valid position data is received.
w VOX ICON (p. 18-6) Blinks when invalid position data is being re-
Appears when the optional headset is connected ceived.
with the OPC-2006LS plug adapter cable, and the • GPS icons can be turned OFF in the Menu screen.
VOX function is ON. (p. 16-33)
e OPERATING MODE ICONS (p. 5-7) ➥➥ “S” blinks instead of the GPS icon, when the
Shows the selected operating mode. GPS alarm beeps. (p. 10-14)
• DV, AM, FM and FM-N are selectable. i RECORD ICON (p. 11-2)
• “DV-G” or “DV-A” appears when GPS or GPS-A transmis-
Appears while recording.
sion is selected in the DV mode. (p. 10-16)
• “ ” appears while the transceiver is recording.
r EMR/BK/Packet Loss/Auto Reply ICON • “ ” appears while the recording is paused.
➥➥ “EMR” appears when the Enhanced Monitor Re- o microSD ICON (Section 2)
quest (EMR) mode is selected. (p. 9-8) ➥➥ “ ” appears when a microSD card is inserted.
➥➥ “BK” appears when the Break-in (BK) mode is se- ➥➥ “ ” and “ ” alternately blinks while accessing the
lected. (p. 9-7) microSD card.
➥➥ “L” appears when Packet Loss has occurred.
(p. 9-14) !0AUTO POWER OFF ICON (p. 16-83)
➥➥ “ ” appears when the Automatic Reply function Appears when the Auto power OFF function is ON.
is selected. (p. 9-11)

3-5
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Function display (Continued)

e t !1
q w r y u io !0 !2

@3 !3

@2
!4
@1 !5 BC Radio setting pop-up
!6 window (Tuning mode)
@0 !7
!9 !8

Dual band display

Single band display

!1 TONE ICONS !3 PRIORITY WATCH ICON (p. 14-5)

• While operating in FM/FM-N mode: Appears when Priority Watch is in use.
(pp. 17-13, 17-15) !4 WEATHER ALERT ICON (p. 5-15)
➥➥ “TONE” appears while the Repeater Tone Encod- Appears when the Weather alert function is ON.
er is ON.
➥➥ “TSQL” appears while the Tone squelch function !5 ATTENUATOR ICON (p. 5-11)
is ON. Appears when the attenuator is ON in the AIR band.
➥➥ “TSQL-R” appears while the Reverse Tone !6 SKIP ICON (pp. 13-7, 13-8)
squelch function is ON. ➥➥ “SKIP” appears when the selected memory chan-
➥➥ “DTCS” appears while the DTCS squelch function nel is set as a skip channel.
is ON. ➥➥ “PSKIP” appears when the displayed frequency is
➥➥ “DTCS-R” appears while the reverse DTCS set as a skip frequency in the Memory mode.
squelch function is ON. ➥➥ “PSKIP” appears while the Frequency Skip Scan
➥➥ “S” appears with the “TSQL” or “DTCS” icon function is ON in the VFO mode.
while the Pocket Beep function (with CTCSS or
DTCS) is ON. !7 MEMORY CHANNEL NUMBER
➥➥ Displays the selected memory channel or bank
• While operating in DV mode: (pp. 9-19, 9-20) number. (p. 12-3)
➥➥ “DSQL” appears while the Digital Call Sign squelch ➥➥ “C0” to “C3” appears when the Call channel is se-
function is ON. lected. (p. 12-3)
➥➥ “CSQL” appears while the Digital Code squelch
function is ON. !8 MEMORY ICON (p. 12-3)
➥➥ “S” appears with the “DSQL” or “CSQL” icon Appears when the Memory mode is selected.
while the Pocket Beep function (with Digital Call
Sign or Digital Code squelch) is ON.
!2 CLOCK DISPLAY (p. 16-82)
Displays the current time.

3-6
 Previous view

3 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■■ Function display (Continued)

e t !1
q w r y u io !0 !2

@3 !3

@2
!4
@1 !5 BC Radio setting pop-up
!6 window (Tuning mode)
@0 !7
!9 !8

Dual band display

Single band display

!9 S/RF METER
➥➥ Shows the relative signal strength of the receive
signal. (p. 5-9)
➥➥ Shows the output power level of the transmit signal.
(p. 5-10)
@0 POWER ICONS (p. 5-10)
➥➥ “SLO” appears when S-low power is selected.
➥➥ “LO1” appears when low 1 power is selected.
➥➥ “LO2” appears when low 2 power is selected.
➥➥ “MID” appears when mid power is selected.
➥➥ No icon appears when high power is selected.
@1 MEMORY NAME DISPLAY (p. 12-12)
While in the Memory mode, the programmed mem-
ory or memory bank name is displayed.
@2 FREQUENCY READOUT
Displays a variety of information, such as the operat-
ing frequency, menu contents and so on.
• The decimal point blinks during a scan.
@3 MAIN BAND ICON (p. 5-3)
Shows the the selected band (A or B) is the Main
band.

3-7
Previous view

Section 4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■ Battery information............................................... 4-2
DD Battery life........................................................ 4-2
DD Battery icon ..................................................... 4-2
■■ Charging through the [DC IN] jack....................... 4-3
DD Battery icon...................................................... 4-3
DD Charging note. ................................................. 4-3
■■ Optional battery case........................................... 4-4
DD Battery life........................................................ 4-4
DD About the battery replacement......................... 4-4
■■ Charging with the optional desktop charger......... 4-5
DD Charging note. ................................................. 4-5
■■ External DC power operation............................... 4-6
DD Operating note................................................. 4-6

4-1
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■Battery information
DDBattery life
The approximate battery life (operating time) as shown Battery pack FM mode DV mode
to the right is calculated under the following assump- BP-271 Approx. 4.5 hrs. Approx. 4.5 hrs.
tions: BP-272 Approx. 8 hrs. Approx. 7 hrs.
• Power save setting: Auto (Short)
• Duty cycle: TX : RX : Stand-by = 1 : 1: 8 (based on
operating style)

See page 4-4 for the optional BP-273 battery case

battery life.

ᐜ㔞⾲♧
DDBattery icon
The “ ” battery icon appears when the BP-271 or Icon Battery condition
BP-272 Li-ion battery pack is attached to the trans-
ceiver. The battery has sufficient capacity.
The battery is exhausted a little.
• When the BP-273 battery case is attached to the The battery is nearing exhaustion. Charg-
transceiver, the battery icon cannot display the bat- ing is necessary. (The transceiver can be
tery capacity of the alkaline batteries. The battery operated for a short time.)
icon stays “ ,” and it does not reflect with the true
඘㟁⾲♧
battery capacity. The battery is almost exhaustion. Charg-
• Without disconnecting the battery charger or ex- ing is necessary. (The transceiver quickly
ternal DC power, the battery icon does not appear becomes impossible to operate.)
when turning power ON after charging is complet-
ed.

4-2
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■Charging through the [DC IN] jack

Prior to using the transceiver for the first time, the bat-
tery pack must be fully charged for optimum life and
operation.
BE SURE to turn OFF the power while charging. Other-
wise the attached battery pack cannot be charged. (see
page 4-6 for details)

DDBattery icon
While charging, the charging icon “ ” sequentially
shows eleven level steps along with the word “Charg-
ing...”.
The icon disappears when the battery pack is com-
pletely charged.

While charging

DDCharging note
• When using the supplied BC-167S battery charger, be • Charging period: BP-271 approximately 3.0 hours
sure to turn OFF the transceiver power. Otherwise the BP-272 approximately 4.5 hours
battery pack will not be charged completely, or it will
take much longer to charge.
Transceiver • BC-167S
• When using an optional CP-12L, CP-19R or OPC-
254L, the battery pack can be charged at power ON.
But by default, the battery pack cannot be charged at
to AC outlet
power ON, so you should turn OFF the power before
The BC-167SA,
charging. (p. 16-71) BC-167SD and
• Even if rechargeable batteries, Ni-Cd or Ni-MH, are BC-167SV have
installed in the optional BP-273 battery case, they • CP-12L (Optional) different shapes.
cannot be charged.
• The battery pack can be charged approximately 500 to
times. [DC IN]

to cigarette lighter
socket (12 V DC)
BP-271
• CP-19R (Optional)
Turn power OFF
while charging
the battery pack.

• OPC-254L (Optional)

to 12 V DC
(power supply)

Black: _

White: +

BE SURE to attach the battery pack

before connecting the DC cable.

4-3
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■Optional battery case

When using the BP-273 battery case, install three AA DDBattery life
(LR6) size alkaline batteries, as described below. The approximate battery life (operating time) as shown
below is calculated under the following assumptions;
qqRemove the battery case if it is attached. (p. 1-2) • Power save setting: Auto (Short)
wwInstall three AA (LR6) size alkaline batteries. • Duty cycle: TX : RX : Stand-by = 1 : 1: 8 (based on
• Install only alkaline batteries. operating style)
• Be sure to observe the correct polarity.
eeAttach the battery case. (p. 1-2)
FM mode DV mode
Approx. 7.5 hrs. Approx. 7 hrs.

NOTE:
• The battery life may differ, depending on the oper-
ating style or the installed alkaline batteries.
• The batteries may seem to have low capacity when
used in low temperatures, such as –10°C (+14°F)
A built-in step-up converter in the BP-273 increases or below. Keep the batteries warm in this case.
the voltage to 5.5 V DC.
Approximately 100 mW of output power is possible
with the BP-273 operation. Also, the transmit output
power selection is disabled. DDAbout the battery replacement
When the alkaline batteries are almost exhausted,
“LOW BATTERY”ᐜ㔞⾲♧ is displayed and the battery icon
CAUTION: starts to blink. After 10 seconds, the transceiver power
• When installing batteries, make sure they are all is automatically turned OFF.
the same brand, type and capacity. Also, do not mix In that case, replace all batteries with new alkaline bat-
new and old batteries together. teries.
• Keep the battery terminals clean. It’s a good idea to
occasionally clean them. When the BP-273 battery case is attached to the
• Never incinerate used battery cells since the inter- transceiver, the battery icon cannot display the bat-
nal battery gas may cause them to rupture. tery capacity of the alkaline batteries. The battery
• Never expose a detached battery case to water. icon stays “ ,” and it does not reflect with the true
If the battery case gets wet, be sure to wipe it dry ඘㟁⾲♧
battery capacity.
before using it.
• Never use batteries whose insulated covering is
damaged.
• Remove the alkaline batteries when battery case is
not used. Otherwise the installed alkaline batteries
will exhausted due to built-in step-up converter.

4-4
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■Charging with the optional desktop charger

The optional BC-202 rapidly charges of the BP-271 • Charging time: BP-271 approximately 2.0 hours
and BP-272 Li-ion battery packs. BP-272 approximately 3.5 hours

DDCharging note Transceiver

(with battery pack)
• Be sure to turn OFF the transceiver power. Battery pack
When the transceiver power cannot be turned OFF, AC Adapter
(A different type, or
detach the battery pack from the transceiver. Then no AC adapter is
charge the battery pack by itself, or charge the bat- supplied, depending
on the version.)
tery using regular charging. Otherwise the battery
pack will not be charged (the charging indicator on
the BC-202 blinks orange about 10 second after the Turn OFF the power
battery pack is installed in BC-202).
• The BC-202 desktop charger can only charge BP- BC-202 (optional)
271 or BP-272 Li-ion battery packs. Other types of Desktop charger
rechargeable batteries, Ni-Cd or Ni-MH cannot be
charged.
Screws*
• If the charging indicator blinks orange, there may be (Self tapping screws:
a problem with the battery pack or charger. If this oc- 3.5 × at least 30 mm)
curs, try charging the battery pack alone, without the *Purchase separately.
Using screws is
transceiver, or try using the standard (non-rapid) char- recommended to
The optional OPC-515L
ger. Contact your dealer if you have problems charg- (for DC power source) secure the charger.
ing a new battery pack. or CP-23L (for 12 V Charging indicator
cigarette lighter socket) • Lights orange : While charging
• NEVER place the transceiver with the battery pack can be used instead of • Lights green : Charging is completed
to the desktop charger when the transceiver is con- the AC adapter. • Blinks orange : A charging error has
nected to the DC power supply. This may cause the occured
charger’s malfunction and the charging indicator of
the charger lights red. In that case, disconnect the AC
adapter from the charger, and then reconnect the AC IMPORTANT: Battery charging caution
adapter to the charger. Ensure the guide rails on the battery pack are cor-
• The optional CP-23L and OPC-515L can be used rectly aligned with the tabs inside the charger.
instead of the supplied AC adapter. Connect one of
these to the [DC 12-16V] jack.
Guide rail

CAUTION: When using the OPC-515L DC power

cable
NEVER connect the OPC-515L to a power source
using reverse polarity. This will ruin the battery char-
ger.
White line: + Black line: –
Tabs

NOTE: If the charging indicator blinks orange for 10

seconds or more with the battery pack installed in the
transceiver, try charging the BP-271 alone. You can
also try regular charging the BP-271 attached to the
transceiver.

4-5
 Previous view

4 BATTERY CHARGING

■■External DC power operation

An optional CP-12L or CP-19R cigarette lighter cable, Transceiver
for a 12 V cigarette lighter socket, or an OPC-254L ex- • CP-12L (Optional)
ternal DC power cable can be used for external power.
The attached battery pack will not be charged while op-
erating the transceiver if “Charging (Power ON)” is set
to the factory default setting. If the setting is set to ON in
the MENU screen, the battery pack can be charged. to a cigarette lighter
• The external DC power supply voltage must be between socket (12 V DC)
• CP-19R (Optional)
10–16 V, and the current capacity must be more than 2.5 A
to
to charge the battery pack when operating.
[DC IN]

qqConnect the DC cable as shown to the right.

wwPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
BP-271
eePush D-pad() to select the root item (Function), • OPC-254L (Optional)
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
to a 12 V DC
D-pad (power supply)
(Ent)
(�) Black: _

( MENU > Function > Charging (Power ON)) White: +

rrRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D- BE SURE to attach the battery pack
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last before connecting the DC cable.
screen is displayed.
ttPush D-pad() to select “ON.” • “Charging (Power ON)” setting screen
• OFF : The transceiver cannot be charged when the power
is ON.
• ON : The transceiver can be charged even if the power
is ON.

When the transceiver power is ON, the battery icon

sequentially shows “ ,” “ ,” “ ” and “ ”
while charging, and the icon disappears when the
battery pack is completely charged.
NOTE: Up to 5 W (approximately) of maximum out-
put power is possible when using external DC power.
However, when the supply voltage exceeds 14 V, the
built-in protection circuit activates to reduce the trans-
mit output power to approximately 2.5 W.

DDOperating note
• The power supply voltage must be between 10.0– • The power save function is automatically deactivated
16.0 V DC. when using an external DC power source.
NEVER CONNECT OVER 16 V DC directly into the [DC • Be sure to observe the correct polarity of the OPC-
IN] jack of the transceiver. 254L supply connection.
• BE SURE to use a CP-12L, CP-19R or OPC-254L • When external power is used, the power save func-
when connecting a regulated 12 V DC power supply. tion is automatically turned OFF.
Use an external DC-DC converter to connect the transceiv- • ID-51A/E’s charging circuit may generate certain
er through an optional CP-12L, CP-19R or OPC-254L to a spurious signals; the S-meter appears, or noise may
24 V DC power source. be heard.
• The voltage of the external power supply must be When you operate the transceiver while charging, and
between 10–16 V DC when using either CP-12L, CP- if you cannot receive signals correctly, set “Charging
19R or OPC-254L, otherwise, use the battery pack. (Power ON)” in the MENU screen to OFF.
• Disconnect the power cables from the transceiver
when not using it. Otherwise, the vehicle battery will
become exhausted.
4-6
Previous view

Section 5 BASIC OPERATION

■■ Power ON............................................................. 5-2
■■ Setting audio volume............................................ 5-2
■■ MAIN band selection............................................ 5-3
■■ Selecting the operating band. .............................. 5-4
■■ Selecting a tuning step......................................... 5-5
DD Tuning step selection. ...................................... 5-5
■■ Setting a frequency.............................................. 5-6
■■ Setting the squelch level. ..................................... 5-6
■■ Selecting the operating mode. ............................. 5-7
■■ Monitor function. .................................................. 5-7
■■ Selecting the Mode. ............................................. 5-8
DD VFO mode........................................................ 5-8
DD Memory/Call
 channel/Weather channel* mode... 5-8
DD DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode.......................... 5-8
■■ Receiving. ............................................................ 5-9
■■ Transmitting........................................................ 5-10
DD About transmit power levels........................... 5-10
■■ Key Lock function............................................... 5-11
■■ ATT (AIR) function.............................................. 5-11
■■ Band Scope function.......................................... 5-12
DD Sweep operation............................................ 5-12
■■ Dualwatch operation. ......................................... 5-13
DD MAIN band selection...................................... 5-13
DD Setting the volume for Dualwatch. ................. 5-14
■■ Weather channel operation
(U.S.A. version transceivers only)....................... 5-15
DD Weather channel selection............................. 5-15
DD Weather alert function.................................... 5-15

5-1
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Power ON
➥➥Hold down [ ] for 1 second to turn ON power.
• Hold down [ ] for 1 second to turn OFF power.
• After the opening message and power source voltage are
displayed, the operating frequency appears.

The opening message and power source voltage

display options can be turned ON or OFF in the Dis-
play menu.
MENU > Display > Opening Message (p. 16-76)
MENU > Display > Voltage (Power ON) (p. 16-76) When “JA3YUA/ID51” is set as
your own call sign and note.

[ ]

■■Setting audio volume

➥➥Rotate [VOL] to adjust the audio level.
• If the squelch is closed, hold down [SQL] while setting
the audio level.
• The display shows the volume level while adjusting.

The beep level is adjusted in the Sounds menu.

MENU > Sounds > Beep Level (p. 16-79)

[VOL] Volume level display

No audio

Maximum audio
5-2
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■MAIN band selection

The ID-51A/E has two independent operating bands; A Frequency range on the A/B bands:
band and B band. 108.000 MHz to 174.000 MHz
The transceiver can monitor two frequencies simultane- 137.000 MHz to 174.000 MHz
ously on A band and B band. This is called Dualwatch
380.000 MHz to 479.000 MHz
operation. (p. 5-13)
• Some frequency ranges are blocked for the U.S.A. and Aus-
➥➥Push [MAIN] to toggle the MAIN band between tralian version by regulation.
A and B band.
• “MAIN” appears on the MAIN band.
➥➥Hold down [DUAL] for 1 second to turn the dual-
watch operation ON or OFF.
• During Dualwatch operation, the display shows the A
band in the upper half and the B band in the lower half.
• When Dualwatch operation is OFF, the display shows Upper: A band
only the MAIN band.

Lower: B band

Single band operation Dualwatch operation

Selecting upper half as

Selecting A band MAIN band

MAIN band
Hold down
(A band)

SUB band
(B band)

Push Push

SUB band
(A band)
Hold down

MAIN band
(B band)

Selecting B band Selecting lower half as

MAIN band

5-3
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Selecting the operating band

The transceiver can receive the AIR, 144 MHz or 430
MHz bands.

qqPush
 [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode, if neces-
sary.
wwPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
eePush D-pad() to select “Band Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad() to select the desired frequency

band.
• Available frequency bands are differ, depending on ver-
sion. See the specifications for details. (p. 19-2)
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to set and exit the Quick Menu
screen.

AIR band
144 MHz band
430 MHz band

5-4
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Selecting a tuning step

The following tuning steps are selectable. (kHz)
5.0 6.25 8.33* 10.0 12.5 15.0 20.0
25.0 30.0 50.0 100.0 125.0 200.0
*Appears only when the AIR band is selected.

When 10 kHz tuning steps

is selected, the frequency
changes in the 10 kHz steps.

DDTuning step selection

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TS,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select the desired tuning step.

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to save the setting and exit the
Quick Menu screen.

5-5
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Setting a frequency Blinks

qqWhen
 VFO mode is selected, push [V/MHz] to
select the 1 MHz or 10 MHz Quick Tuning function
step, or turn it OFF.
• When the 1 MHz step is selected, the frequency changes in
1 MHz steps.
• When the 10 MHz step is selected, the frequency changes
in 10 MHz steps.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select the desired frequency.
• The frequency changes according to the selected tuning
steps. See page 5-5 for details.
When the frequency changes
in 1 MHz steps.
[DIAL]
Blinks

When the frequency changes

in 10 MHz steps.

■■Setting the squelch level

The squelch function mutes the noise or received au-
dio signal, depending on the signal strength and the
squelch control setting.

➥➥While holding down [SQL], rotate [DIAL] to select the

squelch level.
• While holding down [SQL], rotate [DIAL] one click to dis-
play the squelch level.
• “LEVEL1” is loose squelch (for weak signals) and “LEV-
EL9” is tight squelch (for strong signals). Automatic squelch
• “AUTO” shows automatic level adjustment by a noise
pulse counting system.
• “OPEN” shows a continuously open setting. (This option
is not selectable in the DV mode.)

[DIAL]

[SQL]
Maximum level

NOTE: The independent squelch level can be set to

the A band and B band.
The squelch level setting can be done only for the
MAIN band.

5-6
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Selecting the operating mode

AM mode selected
Operating modes are determined by the modulation of
the radio signals. The transceiver has a total of four op-
erating modes; AM, FM, FM-N and DV.

➥➥Push [MODE] one or more times to select a de-

sired operating mode.
• The AM mode can be used for only the AIR band (108.000
MHz to 136.995 MHz).
• When the GPS TX Mode is set, “DV-G” or “DV-A” appears FM mode selected
instead of “DV.” (p. 10-16)

FM-N mode selected

DV mode selected

■■Monitor function
This function is used to listen to weak signals without
disturbing the squelch setting, or having to open the
squelch manually even when mute functions such as
the tone squelch are in use.

➥➥Hold down [SQL] to monitor the operating frequen-

cy.
• The 1st segment of the S-meter blinks.

The [SQL] key can be set to ‘sticky’ operation in

Function menu.
MENU > Function > Monitor (p. 16-66) The first segment
blinks

[SQL]

5-7
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Selecting the Mode

DDVFO mode
The VFO mode is used to set the desired frequency. VFO mode
Push to select
qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
• When VFO mode is selected, push [V/MHz] then ro- DR mode
Memory mode
tate [DIAL] to change the frequency in 1 MHz steps. Or Hold down Call channel mode
push [V/MHz] again for 10 MHz steps.
WX channel* mode
wwRotate [DIAL] to set the operating frequency.
to select Push
to alternately select

DDMemory/Call channel/
• VFO mode
Weather channel* mode
• Memory mode
Memory mode is used for operation on Memory chan-
nels, which store programmed frequencies.
• Call channel mode
Call channels are used for quick recall of most-often
used frequencies.
• Weather channel mode*
Weather channels are used for monitoring weather • Memory mode
channels from the NOAA (National Oceanographic and
Atmospheric Administration) broadcasts.

qqWhen the VFO mode is selected, push [M/CALL]

to select the memory mode.
• “ ” and the selected Memory channel number appear. Appears
wwPush [M/CALL] again to select the Call channel
mode, and then push again to select the Weather
• Call channel mode
channel mode.
• The Memory mode, Call channel mode or Weather chan-
nel mode* are alternately selected.
• While in the Call channel mode, the selected Call chan-
nel number (“C0” to “C3”) appears.
• While in the Weather channel mode*, the selected weath-
er channel number (“WX-01” to “WX-10”) appears. Appears
eeRotate [DIAL] to select a desired channel.
• Only programmed Memory channels can be selected.
• See p. 12-4 for memory programming details. • Weather channel mode*

*Appears in only the U.S.A. version transceivers.

DDDR (D-STAR Repeater) mode

The DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode is used for D-STAR
repeater operation. In this mode, you can easily select
the preprogrammed repeaters and UR call signs by ro- • DR mode
tating [DIAL].

qqHold down for 1 second to select the DR

mode.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select a desired access repeater.

5-8
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Receiving
Example: Receiving on 145.510 MHz

qqPush
 [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode, if neces-
sary.
wwPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
eePush D-pad() to select “Band Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad() to select the desired band.

• Example: “146.010”
• The last frequency operated on the band is displayed.
• The displayed frequency will appear after band selec-
tion.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save the setting and exit the
Quick Menu screen.
yyPush [MODE] to select the FM mode.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select “145.510 MHz.”
 When a signal is received:
• The Squelch opens and audio is heard.
• The TX/RX indicator lights green.
• The S-meter shows the relative signal strength level.

144 MHz band

[DIAL]

S/RF-meter

5-9
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Transmitting
CAUTION: Transmitting without an antenna will dam- R WARNING! NEVER transmit for long periods of
age the transceiver. time.
During prolonged transmissions at high power or mid
 OTE: To prevent interfering, hold down [SQL] to
N power, the transceiver radiates heat to protect itself
listen on the channel before transmitting. from overheating. The transceiver’s chassis will be-
come hot and may cause a burn.
qqSet
 the operating frequency. (p. 5-6) • To prevent the transceiver’s overheating, the default set-
• Transmitting can be done only when the 144 MHz or 430 ting of the time-out timer function is set to 5 minutes (p. 16-
MHz amateur band is selected as the MAIN band. 68). Be careful when the time-out timer function is turned
wwHold down [LOW] for 1 second to select the OFF or set to a long time period, and you transmit for long
transmit output power between S-Low, Low1, Low2, periods.
Mid and High to suit your operating requirements.
• Or while holding down [LOW] , rotate [DIAL] to select
DO NOT operate the transceiver in a situation that will
the output power. obstruct heat dissipation, especially if the transceiver
•L  ower output power during short-range communications uses an external power supply. Heat dissipation may
may reduce the possibility of interference to other sta- be affected, and it may cause a burn, warp the casing
tions, and will conserve battery power. or damage the transceiver.
• “SLO”/“LO1”/ “LO2”/“MID” appears when S-low/low 1/low
NOTE: When the transceiver becomes hot, the trans-
2/mid power is selected.
•N  o icon appears when high power is selected. ceiver’s heat protection function gradually reduces
eeHold down [PTT] to transmit. the output power to approximately 2.5 watts, then it
• The TX/RX indicator lights red. stops transmission after that. This is done to protect
• The S/RF meter displays the output power level. the transceiver itself until it can cool down.
rrSpeak at your normal voice level. CONNECT to only the rated voltage range when us-
• DO NOT hold the transceiver too close to your mouth or
ing an external power supply.
speak too loudly. This may distort your speech.
ttRelease [PTT] to receive.
TX/RX
indicator [DIAL]

[PTT]

Microphone

DDAbout transmit power levels

• Transmit power level display
❍ When the external DC power cable (13.5 V DC) is
connected or BP-271/BP-272 is attached. High power (5 W)
: 5 W (High)/2.5 W (Mid)/1.0 W (Low2)/
0.5 W (Low1)/0.1 W (S-Low) (approximately)
Mid power (2.5 W)
❍ When the BP-273 is attached.
: A
 pproximately 0.1 W (S-LOW) (fixed) Low2 power (1.0 W)

 OTE: When using the BP-273 battery case,

N
“SLO,” “LO1,” “LO2,” “MID” or no icon (high Low1 power (0.5 W)
power) appears on the display by holding
down [LOW] for 1 second. But “SLO” ap-
S-Low power (0.1 W)
pears while transmitting, and the output power
is limited to approximately 0.1 watts.

5-10
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Key Lock function

Activate to prevent accidental frequency changes and
unnecessary function access.
➥➥Hold down [LOCK] for 1 second to turn the Key
Lock function ON or OFF.
• When the Key Lock function is activated and the locked key
or dial is pushed or rotated, “LOCK ON” appears.
• [ ], [LOCK] , [PTT], [SQL] and [VOL] can be used
while the lock function is activated. The function is ON

Either or both the squelch control and volume control

can also be locked in the Function menu.
MENU > Function > Key Lock (p. 16-68)

The function is OFF

■■ATT (AIR) function

The attenuator reduces signal levels to prevent audio
distortion. This is useful when the transceiver receives
a very strong air band signal, or it is in very strong elec-
tromagnetic fields such as from a broadcasting station
near your location.
The attenuation is about 30 dB, and enabled when the
AIR band is selected.
qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select “ATT (AIR),” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “30dB.”

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to set, and exit the Quick Menu
screen.
• “ATT” appears.

5-11
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Band Scope function

The Band Scope function allows you to visually check a spec- About the sweep steps:
ified frequency range around the center frequency. The specified tuning step (in VFO mode) or programmed
tuning step (in memory mode) is used during sweep.
If the tuning step is set to wide, the present signal may not
Example: The tuning step is set to 10 kHz, and a be displayed (may be skipped), even that is strong signal.
strong signal is received on 146.060 MHz. Thus we recommend to set the tuning step to the 20 kHz
Strong level or less to use the Band Scope function.
See page 5-5 for the Tuning step selection details.

• For the single watch operation within 144 MHz or 430

Weak level MHz band, the displayed frequency’s audio sounds dur-
The signal on the ing a sweep.
146.060 MHz - In the AIR band, the displayed frequency’s audio does
not sound during a sweep, even if the single watch op-
Band Scope display Center frequency (Example: 146.010 MHz) eration is selected.
Sweep marker • The audio output during a sweep can be turned OFF in
the MENU screen.
MENU > Sounds > Scope AF Output (p. 16-81)

DDSweep operation Example: Continuous sweep on 146.010 MHz

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad(E) to select “Band Scope,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad($) to select the option between “Single

Sweep” and “Continuous Sweep.”
rrPush D-pad(Ent) to return to the frequency display
and start sweeping.
• A single Sweep checks the specified frequency range
only one time.
• A continuous Sweep repeatedly checks the specified fre-
quency range.
• Push D-pad(Ent) to stop sweeping and push again to
restart it.
• When the sweeping stops, rotate [DIAL] to move the
sweep marker to a detected signal; you can hear the sig-
nal audio.
• When the sweeping stops, push [CLR] to cancel the
Band Scope function.

While continuously
sweeping

When the sweeping stops,

rotate [DIAL] to move the
sweep marker to a detect-
ed signal; you can hear
the signal audio.

5-12
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Dualwatch operation
❍ SUB band mute status
Dualwatch operation simultaneously monitors two fre-
MAIN band SUB band
quencies.
DV mode
The ID-51A/E has two independent receiver circuits as DV mode
A band and B band. FM-N mode
Depending on the operating band or mode, the SUB DV mode
FM-N mode
band audio signal is muted. In such case, “ ” FM-N mode
appears. AIR band AIR band
During the dualwatch operation, the audio output may
be interrupted when the frequency is switched while
scanning, or by other factors. Example: MAIN band is FM-N mode.
SUB band is DV mode.
A/B band selection in the DR mode
The DR mode screen can be displayed on the A band
(upper) or B band (lower).
When the DR mode is displayed on the A band, and MAIN band
the DR mode is selected in the B band, the previously
displayed frequency or memory before entering the
DR mode is displayed on the A band.
SUB band
• Display image for the DR mode
DR mode screen

Appears when the SUB band

audio signal is muted.

A A
ba ba
nd nd
B
B ba
ba nd
nd

DDMAIN band selection

➥➥Push [MAIN] to alternately select upper half
band or lower half band as the MAIN band.
• “MAIN” appears on the MAIN band.
• “Band selection, operating frequency input using [DIAL],
operating mode selection, Memory channel selection,
memory write and band scope function can be made on
the MAIN band.
MAIN band is upper half

MAIN band is lower half

5-13
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■ Dualwatch operation (Continued)

DDSetting the volume for Dualwatch
The volume setting for Dualwatch can be set for both
bands simultaneously or for each band separately, in
the MENU screen.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Sounds), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

( MENU > Sounds > Volume Select)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last
screen is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired option.
• All : The audio output level for the BC
Radio, A band and B band are ad-
justed at the same time.
• BC Radio Separate : The audio output level for the BC
Radio is independently adjusted.
The audio output level for A band
and B band are adjusted at the
same time.
• Separate : The audio output level for the BC
Radio, A band and B band are in-
dependently adjusted.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

When “All” or “BC Radio Separate” is selected:

➥➥Rotate [VOL] to adjust the audio level.
• The audio output levels for A band and B band are ad-
justed at the same time:

When “Separate” is selected:

qqPush [MAIN] for 1 second to select A band or B
band for the MAIN band.
wwRotate [VOL] to adjust the audio level.
• When the audio output level for A band and B band are
independently adjusted.
F
 or example, even if the audio output level for A band is
adjusted, B band’s audio level stays at the original level.

[VOL]

5-14
 Previous view

5 BASIC OPERATION

■■Weather channel operation (U.S.A. version transceivers only)

There are 10 weather channels for monitoring weather
channels from the NOAA (National Oceanographic and
Atmospheric Administration) broadcasts.

DDWeather channel selection

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Weather channel mode
weather channel mode.
• “WX” and the weather channel number appear.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select the desired weather chan-
nel.
eePush [V/MHz] or [M/CALL] to return to the
previous frequency or Memory channel.

[DIAL]

DDWeather alert function

NOAA broadcast stations transmit weather alert tones
When the alert signal is detected
before important weather announcements.
When the weather alert function is turned ON, the se-
lected weather channel is monitored every 5 seconds
for the announcement.
When the alert signal is detected, the “ALT” and the
WX channel are alternately displayed, and a beep tone
sounds until the transceiver is operated.
The previously selected (used) weather channel is
checked periodically during standby or while scanning.

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad(E) to select “Weather Alert,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “ON” or “OFF.”

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to save the setting and exit the
Quick Menu screen.
ttSet the desired standby mode.
• “WX” appears when “ON” is selected in step e.
• Select the VFO, a Memory or Call channel.
• Scan or priority watch operation can also be selected.

5-15
Previous view

Section 6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation. ................................................... 6-2
DD Descriptions..................................................... 6-2
DD Turning ON the BC Radio. ............................... 6-2
DD Listening to the BC Radio while monitoring two
ham bands........................................................ 6-3
DD Mode selection................................................. 6-3
DD Bank selection on the Memory bank mode...... 6-4
DD AM/FM radio mode selection........................... 6-5
DD To searching the broadcast signal. .................. 6-5
DD Attenuator function........................................... 6-6
DD Setting squelch level........................................ 6-7
DD Monitor function. .............................................. 6-7
DD Setting a tuning step (AM Only)....................... 6-8
■■ Adding or editing a BC Radio memory................. 6-9
DD BC Radio Memory . ......................................... 6-9
DD Add a BC Radio memory................................. 6-9
DD Deleting a BC Radio memory. ....................... 6-12
DD Editing a BC radio memory............................ 6-13
DD Rearrange the display order of the BC Radio
memory.......................................................... 6-14
■■ Skip setting for the BC radio memory. ............... 6-15
■■ Using the BC Radio Mode. ................................ 6-16
■■ BC Radio setting................................................ 6-17
DD FM Antenna. .................................................. 6-17
DD Power Save (BC Radio)................................. 6-17
DD Auto Mute....................................................... 6-18
DD Volume Select................................................ 6-19
DD BC Radio Level.............................................. 6-20

6-1
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■Basic operation
DDDescriptions
You can listen to the AM or FM Broadcast (BC) Radio.
When the transceiver receives 2 amateur bands on the Frequency range for the BC Radio
MAIN band and SUB band, you can still listen to the FM 76.0 MHz* to 108.0 MHz
Broadcast (BC) Radio on the pop up window.
AM 520 kHz to 1710 kHz
Up to 50 BC Radio memory channels can be pro-
grammed into each bank for easy memory manage- *The usable frequency range differs, according to the trans-
ment. ceiver's version.
You can comfortably standby listening to the BC Radio.
Also, the transceiver can be used as just a BC Radio. In
this case, the other modes are in a sleep state.

The BC radio memory channel contents, described

in this manual, may differ from your transceiver’s pre-
programmed memory.

Example: While listening to FM-A Station

DDTurning ON the BC Radio

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<BC Radio ON>>,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eeThe BC Radio pop up window appears, and exits the

Quick Menu screen.
•“ ” appears.

To turn OFF the BC Radio, push [QUICK] , and

then select “<<BC Radio OFF>>,” as described
above.

Appears

6-2
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDListening
 to the BC Radio while monitoring two ham bands
When the transceiver receives 2 amateur bands on the
MAIN band and SUB band, you can still listen to the
BC Radio. Appears

BC Radio pop
qqPush [QUICK] . up window
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<BC Radio ON>>,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
•“ ” appears.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush [CLR] to turn OFF the BC Radio pop up

window. BC Radio pop up
• You can comfortably standby listening to the BC Radio. window is OFF
(BC Radio is ON)
NOTE: To show the BC Radio pop up window again,
push [QUICK] , and push D-pad() to select
“<<BC Radio>>,” then push D-pad(Ent).

To show the BC Radio

pop up window again,
select “<<BC Radio>>.”
DDMode selection
qqWhen the BC Radio pop up window is displayed,
push [M/CALL] to select between the Tuning
mode and the Memory bank mode.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select the frequency or memory Tuning mode
channel.

• Tuning mode
The BC Radio Tuning mode is used to set the desired
BC Radio frequency.
To save the selected frequency, hold down [S.MW]
for 1 second to program into the lowest memory chan-
nel of the selected bank.

• Memory bank mode Memory bank mode

The BC Radio Memory bank mode is very useful to
quickly select often-used frequency settings.
When the Memory bank mode is selected, “ ” and
the selected memory channel number appear.

NOTE: Push [QUICK] , and select “VFO” to se-

lect the Tuning mode, or select “MR” to select the
Memory bank mode.
6-3
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDBank
 selection on the Memory bank mode
Up to 50 BC Radio memory channels can be pro- Memory bank mode
grammed into each bank for easy memory manage- (Bank A)
ment.
If you switch the bank, other area channel can be se-
lected.

qqPush [M/CALL] to select the Memory bank

mode.
• “ ” and the selected memory channel number appear.
wwPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select the desired bank, and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrThe memory channel of the selected bank appears,
and exits the Quick Menu screen.
• Rotate [DIAL] to select a memory channel.
• Push [MODE] to select the FM or AM mode.
Select “Bank C”

[DIAL]

The preprogrammed
channel of Bank C is
displayed

6-4
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDAM/FM radio mode selection
➥➥Push [MODE] to select the AM or FM radio FM mode
mode.

AM mode

DDTo
 searching the broadcast signal
While in the Tuning mode, hold down or to start
searching the broadcast signal.
• When is held down, a down scan starts, and when is
held down, up scan starts.
• When a signal is received, the scanning stops on the fre-
quency.
While search-
• To cancel scanning, push , or [CLR] . ing a signal

When a signal
is received

6-5
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDAttenuator
 function
The attenuator reduces signal levels to prevent audio
distortion.
This is useful when the transceiver receives a very
strong AM or FM BC Radio signal, or it is in very strong
electromagnetic fields such as from a broadcasting sta-
tion near your location.
The attenuator can be set in both the AM and FM
mode.

qqPush [MODE] to select the desired AM or FM

mode.
wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “ATT (FM),” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• When the AM mode is selected in step q, select “ATT
(AM).”
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad() to select the attenuator.

• ATT (FM)
OFF : The attenuator is OFF.
30dB : The attenuation is about 30 dB.
• ATT (AM)
OFF : The attenuator is OFF.
Auto : The attenuation is automatically switched be-
tween OFF and 30 dB (maximum), depend-
ing on the received signal strength level.
30dB : The attenuation is set to 30 dB.
50dB : The attenuation is set to 50 dB.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save, and exit the Quick Menu
screen.
• When the attenuator is ON, “ATT” appears on the BC
Radio pop up window. Appears

6-6
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDSetting
 squelch level
The squelch level can be set only for the BC radio.

qqWhile holding down [SQL], rotate [DIAL] one click to

display the squelch level. (Default: AUTO)
wwWhile holding down [SQL], rotate [DIAL] to select the
squelch level.
• “LEVEL1” is loose squelch (for weak signals) and “LEV-
EL3” is tight squelch (for strong signals).
• “AUTO” shows automatic level adjustment by a noise
pulse counting system.
• “OPEN” shows a continuously open setting. When “AUTO” is selected.

[DIAL]

[SQL]

When Level 3 (Maximum)

is selected.

DDMonitor
 function
This function is used to listen to weak BC Radio sig-
nals without disturbing the squelch setting, or having to
manually open the squelch.

➥➥Hold down [SQL] to monitor the operating frequen-

cy.
• The 1st segment of the S-meter blinks.
Blinks
The [SQL] key can be set to ‘sticky’ operation in Func-
tion menu.
MENU > Function > Monitor (p. 16-66)

[SQL]

6-7
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Basic operation (Continued)

DDSetting
 a tuning step (AM Only)
If you select the BC Radio frequency by rotating [DIAL]
in the Tuning mode, the frequency changes in the se-
lected tuning step.

qqPush [MODE] to select the AM mode.

wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “TS,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad() to select the desired tuning step be-

tween 1.0 kHz, 9.0 kHz and 10.0 kHz.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save, and exit the Quick Menu
screen.

When 10.0 kHz

step is selected.

The frequency changes in the

selected tuning step.

6-8
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■Adding
 or editing a BC Radio memory
DDBC Radio Memory BC Radio Memory
A total of 26 banks are selectable for BC Radio Mem-
ory. You can assign up to 50 BC Radio memory chan- A: Area 1 FM FM-A Station
nels to each bank, for easy memory management. (A
B: Area 2 FM-B Station
maximum of 500 memories can be assigned to the BC
Radio Memory.) FM-C Station
Some area stations are preloaded into the BC Radio C: Area 3
memory for easy memory management.
D: Area 4
AM AM-A Station
The BC radio memory channel contents, described
in this manual, may differ from your transceiver’s pre- AM-B Station
programmed memory.
Z: AM-C Station

(Example)

DDAdd a BC Radio memory

1. A
 dding a BC Radio Memory and entering the edit
mode
q Push [MENU] .
w Push D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

e Push D-pad() to select a desired bank, and then

push D-pad(Ent).
r Push D-pad() to select the desired radio mode (AM
or FM) to be programmed.
t Push [QUICK] . BC RADIO MEMORY
y Push D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D- screen is displayed.
pad(Ent).
• The BC RADIO MEM EDIT screen is displayed.

When no memory is
programmed, “-- Blank --”
appears.

Select “Add”

☞☞Continued on the next page

6-9
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

2. BC Radio Memory name programming

u Push D-pad() to select “NAME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

i Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.

• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low-
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
• A space can be entered, in any input mode selected.
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
• See page 2-7 for programming details.
o Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit. Character
!0 Repeat steps i and o to enter a BC Radio Memory type selection
screen
name of up to 16 characters, including spaces.
!1 After entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).

(Example)
When entering
“FM-K Station”

☞☞Continued on the next page

6-10
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

3. Frequency programming
!2 Push D-pad() to select “FREQUENCY,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• A cursor appears and blinks.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!3 Rotate [DIAL] to input the frequency.

• AM: 520 to 1710 kHz
• FM: 76.0 to 108.0 MHz
!4 Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or for- (Example)
ward to edit the frequency. When entering
!5 Repeat steps !3 and !4 to enter the frequency. “88.9”
!6 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

4. Skip setting
!7 Push D-pad() to select “SKIP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
!8 Push D-pad() to select whether or not to use the
channel in the BC Radio memory.
• OFF: You can select the channel in the BC Radio
memory.
• Skip: The channel does not appear in the BC Radio
memory.
!9 After selecting, push D-pad(Ent).

5. Writing BC Radio Memory

@0 Push D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• If a previously added BC Radio memory is edited, select
“<<Overwrite>>.”
Select
@1 Push D-pad(#) to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).

To cancel the programmed data:

qqTo cancel the programmed
data, push [CLR] to
display “Cancel edit?.”
wwPush D-pad() to select
“YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to cancel pro- (Example)
gramming and return to When “FM-K Station” is
programmed in Bank K.
the BC Radio Memory’s
channel list screen.
The list of BC Radio Bank K
is displayed.

6-11
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

DDDeleting a BC Radio memory

All the contents of a BC Radio memory can be delet-
ed.
Please note that deleted memory cannot be restored.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (BC Radio),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Memory,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio group that
includes the memory you want to delete, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the memory channel to be
deleted.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then D-
pad(Ent).
iiPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The selected BC Radio memory is deleted.

Select the channel

to be deleted.

Select

“FM-K Station” is
deleted, and “-- Blank --”
is displayed in Bank K.

6-12
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

DDEditing a BC radio memory
This function reprograms a BC radio memory data. This
is useful when already-programmed data is incorrect,
has changed or some data should be added to the list.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Memory,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio bank that in-
cludes the memory you want to edit, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the memory to be edited.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Edit.”
iiPush D-pad() to select the desired item, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• See pages 6-9 to 6-11 for programming details.
ooAfter programming, the display returns to the BC
RADIO MEM EDIT screen.
!0 Push D-pad() to select “<<Overwrite>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent). Example:
!1 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- “FM-K Station”
is edited.
pad(Ent).
• The programmed contents are overwritten in the BC ra-
dio memory, and the transceiver returns to the BC Radio
bank screen.

6-13
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ Adding or editing BC Radio memory (Continued)

DDRearrange the display order of the BC Radio memory
You can move the programmed BC Radio memory to
rearrange their display order in the selected BC Radio
memory bank.
The programmed BC Radio memory cannot be moved
out of their assigned memory bank.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Memory,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio memory
bank that includes the BC Radio memory you want
to move, and then push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio memory to
be moved.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Move,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “DESTINATION” blinks on the upper left of the LCD.
iiPush
 D-pad() to select the location to insert the
memory you want to move, which will be above the
memory name selected in this screen, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The selected memory contents are inserted to above the
destination memory name. Select the memory
• When “<<Move End>>” is selected, the selected memory to be moved.
contents are moved to the bottom of the BC Radio mem-
ory bank.

Blinks

Select the
destination

“FM-A Station”
is moved to the
bottom.

6-14
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■Skip setting for the BC radio memory

You can set the undesired frequency to skip targets.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Memory,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio memory bank
that includes the BC Radio memory you want to set
the skip setting on, and then push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the BC Radio memory to
be skipped.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “SKIP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “SKIP” appears on the selected repeater.
• Push [QUICK] and select “SKIP” again, then push
D-pad(Ent) to cancel the skip setting.

In the BC radio window,

push [QUICK] , and se-
lect “SKIP” also set the skip Select the memory
setting. to be skipped.

Appears

6-15
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■Using the BC Radio Mode

The transceiver has an exclusive BC Radio mode
where only the BC Radio functions.

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<BC Radio Mode>>,”
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

• BC radio mode screen is displayed.

To cancel the BC Radio mode, push [QUICK] ,

and select “<<Normal Mode>>.”
Select

In the exclusive BC Radio mode, the other modes are

in a sleep state. Appears
To operate the transceiver in a normal way, push
[QUICK] , and then select “<<Normal Mode>>.”

BC Radio Mode screen

6-16
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■BC Radio setting

DDFM Antenna
Select the desired antenna for FM radio.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > BC Radio > BC Radio Set> FM Antenna)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired antenna used
for the FM radio
• External : The external antenna is used.
• Earphone : The earphone antenna is used.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

DDPower Save (BC Radio)

Set the power save function to reduce current drain and
conserve battery power when the BC Radio is ON.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > BC Radio > BC Radio Set> Power Save

(BC Radio))
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to set the power save function when
the BC Radio is ON.
• OFF : The power save function is OFF.
• ON : When the BC Radio is ON, and when no sig-
nal is received for 5 seconds, this function
is activated in a 1:3 ratio (300 milliseconds:
900 milliseconds) during FM mode opera-
tion, or 1:1 ratio (2000 milliseconds: 2000
milliseconds) during AM mode operation.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

NOTE: This function is disabled when the external

power supply is used.

6-17
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ BC Radio setting (Continued)

DDAuto Mute
This setting is enabled when you listen to the BC Radio
in the background.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“BC Radio”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > BC Radio > BC Radio Set> Auto Mute)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the Auto Mute timer to be-
tween 0 and 10 seconds (in 1 second steps), or
OFF.
• OFF : The Auto Mute function is OFF.
The BC Radio audio is not muted even
if the transceiver receives a signal on
the MAIN or SUB band.
The BC Radio audio is muted when the
transceiver transmits.
• 0 to 10sec : The BC Radio audio is automatically
muted when the transceiver transmits
or receives on the MAIN or SUB band.
After transmitting or receiving, the Auto
Mute timer starts. After the timer period
ends, you can listen to the BC Radio.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

6-18
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ BC Radio setting (Continued)

DDVolume Select
Select to adjust the audio output level of all bands to-
gether, all separately, or just the BC Radio separately.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Sounds”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Volume Select,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select whether or not to indepen-
dently adjust the audio output level.
• All : The audio output level of the BC Radio,
A band and B band are adjusted at the
together.
• BC Radio Separate
: The audio output level of the BC Radio
is separately adjusted.
The audio output level of A band and B
band are adjusted together.
• Separate : The audio output level of the BC Radio,
A band and B band are separately ad-
justed.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

6-19
 Previous view

6 BC RADIO OPERATION

■■ BC Radio setting (Continued)

DDBC Radio Level
Set the initial audio output level difference between the
BC Radio and the A and B bands when “All” is set in
“Volume Select.” (p. 16-78)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Sounds”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “BC Radio Level,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrRotate [DIAL] to adjust.
• +5 to +1 : The BC Radio audio output level is higher
than the A and B bands audio.
• 0 : The BC Radio audio output level is same
as the A and B bands audio.
• –1 to –5 : The BC Radio audio output level is lower
than the A and B bands audio.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

6-20
Previous view

Section 7 D-STAR INTRODUCTION

■■ D-STAR Intoroduction. ......................................... 7-2
■■ About the DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode. ............ 7-2
■■ Communication Form in the DR mode................. 7-3

To begin the digital mode communication except in the DR mode

To begin the digital mode communication except in the For a Local area call or Gateway call:
DR mode, you can use the VFO mode, Memory mode qqSet the access repeater’s frequency. (p. 15-2)
and Call channel mode. wwSet the frequency offset. (p. 15-4)
This manual describes focusing on the DR mode op- eeSet the Duplex direction. (p. 15-5)
eration which can be set up easily, and if you want to rrSet the call signs. (p. 16-48)
use another mode, see the procedures as described
to the right. For a Simplex call:
qqSet the operating frequency.
wwSet the call sign. (p. 16-48)

IMPORTANT!
• The repeater list, described in this manual, may differ from your transceiver’s preloaded contents.
• Although Japanese repeaters are used in the setting examples, the Japanese repeater node (port) letters are dif-
ferent from other country’s.
Be sure to add a repeater node letter as the 8th digit in the call sign field after a repeater call sign, according to
the repeater frequency band, as shown below.
1200 MHz : A (B in Japan)
430 MHz : B (A in Japan)
144 MHz : C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan)
7-1
 Previous view

7 D-STAR INTRODUCTION

Before starting D-STAR, the following steps are needed.

STEP 1 Entering your call sign (MY) into the transceiver. STEP 2 Registering your call sign
IMPORTANT! (MY) to a gateway repeater. You have completed the steps!!

See the Basic Instruction (printed manual) for details.

■■D-STAR Intoroduction
• In the original D-STAR (Digital Smart Technologies for • The transceiver can be operated in the digital voice
Amateur Radio) plan, JARL envisioned a system of mode, including low-speed data operation, for both
repeaters grouped together into Zones. transmit and receive. It has a built-in GPS receiver to
• The D-STAR repeater enables you to call a HAM sta- transmit and receive position data.
tion in another area through the internet.

■■About the DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode

The DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode is one mode you can
use for D-STAR repeater operation. In this mode, you Destination
can select the preprogrammed repeater or frequency in (Repeater/Station)
“FROM” (the access repeater or simplex), and UR call
sign in “TO” (destination), as shown to the right. Access repeater
or Simplex
NOTE: If the repeater, set to “FROM” (Access Re-
peater) has no Gateway call sign, you cannot make
a gateway call.
In the DR mode

7-2
 Previous view

7 D-STAR INTRODUCTION

■■Communication Form in the DR mode

In the DR mode, the transceiver has three communica-
tion forms, as shown below.

• Local area call : To call through your local area (ac-
cess) repeater.
• Gateway call : To call through your local area (ac-
cess) repeater, repeater gateway and
the internet to your destination re-
peater or individual station’s last used
repeater, using call sign routing.
• Simplex call : To call another station not using a re-
peater.

Local area call Access repeater

Hamacho
repeater

Hamacho area

Gateway call
Hirano Sapporo
repeater repeater

INTERNET

Hirano area Sapporo area

Simplex call

NOTE:
• Programming the repeater list is required for DR mode operation. (pp. 9-23 to 9-31)
• Before operating in the DV mode, be sure to check whether the repeater is busy, or not. If the repeater is busy,
wait until it is clear, or ask for a “break” using a method acceptable to your local procedures.
• The transceiver has a Time-Out Timer function for digital repeater operation. The timer limits a continuous trans-
mission to approximately 10 minutes. Warning beeps will sound approximately 30 seconds before time-out and
then again immediately before time-out.
7-3
Previous view

Section 8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “FROM” (Access repeater) setting. ...................... 8-2
DD Using the preloaded repeater list..................... 8-3
DD Using the DR mode scan................................. 8-4
DD Using the Repeater Search function................ 8-5
DD Using the TX History........................................ 8-7
■■ “TO” (Destination) setting..................................... 8-8
DD Using the “Local CQ” (Local Area call)............. 8-9
DD Using the “Gateway CQ” (Gateway call)......... 8-10
DD Using the “Your Call Sign”............................... 8-11
DD Using the RX History...................................... 8-12
DD Using the TX History...................................... 8-13
DD Directly inputting (UR).................................... 8-14
DD Directly inputting (RPT).................................. 8-15

IMPORTANT!
• The repeater list, described in this manual, may differ from your transceiver’s preloaded contents.
• Although Japanese repeaters are used in the setting examples, the Japanese repeater node (port) letters are dif-
ferent from other country’s.
Be sure to add a repeater node letter as the 8th digit in the call sign field after a repeater call sign, according to
the repeater frequency band, as shown below.
1200 MHz : A (B in Japan)
430 MHz : B (A in Japan)
144 MHz : C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan)
8-1
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■“FROM” (Access repeater) setting

Your access repeater must be set to “FROM” when you
transmit a call in the DR mode.
You have four ways to set the access repeater. “Hirano” repeater
Click the title shown below to jump to the specified is set in “FROM.”
page.

• When you know your access repeater

From the repeater list (p. 8-3)
Select the repeater preloaded in your transceiver’s
repeater list.*

• When you don't know which repeater you can access.

Search for a repeater using the DR mode scan (p. 8-4)
Searches for DV signals from a repeater or a simplex
frequency.

Blinks

While DR mode scanning

Search for the nearest repeater (p. 8-5)
The transceiver searches the nearest repeater by us-
ing your own and the repeater’s position.

• When the “FROM” data is stored in the TX History.

Setting from the TX History (p. 8-7)
When you transmit a call in the DR mode, “FROM”
(the access repeater) data is stored in the TX History.
You can select the access repeater from the record.

8-2
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “FROM” (Access repeater) setting (Continued)

DDUsing the preloaded repeater list

For easy operation, the repeater list is preloaded into Example: Select the “Hirano” repeater in Japan
your transceiver. from the repeater list.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group where “FROM” is selected.
your access repeater is listed, and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• Example: “11: Japan”
• The repeater list, described in this manual, may differ
from your transceiver’s preloaded list.
ttPush D-pad() to select your access repeater, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “Hirano”
yyIf the selected repeater name is displayed in “FROM”
on the DR mode screen, the access repeater setting
is completed.

How to switch the repeater group:

➥➥While in the DR mode, push [QUICK] to open Repeater area Repeater call sign
the Quick menu. Then push D-pad() to select
“Group Select.”
• You can switch the repeater group using D-pad()

Completed
8-3
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “FROM” (Access repeater) setting (Continued)

DDUsing the DR mode scan

The DR mode scan is useful to find a repeater. Example: Select the “Hirano repeater using the
To quickly find a repeater, the DR mode scan skips re- DR mode scan.
peaters that are not specified as an access repeater.
(“USE (FROM)” setting is “NO” (SKIP is set) on the re-
peater list.)

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR mode is selected.
wwHold down [SCAN] to start the DR mode scan.
• The frequency decimal point and “FROM” blink while
scanning.
• The repeaters in the repeater list are sequentially dis-
played.
• The scan pauses when a signal is received. The scan “FROM” is selected.
resumes the same as other scanning. (p. 16-18)
eeWhen the transceiver receives a signal from a re-
peater, the scan stops, then push [CLR] .
• The DR mode scan is cancelled.

You can skip certain repeaters from a scan target. The repeaters
You can also skip all repeaters in certain groups from are sequentially
a scan. See page 9-37 for details. displayed.

While DR mode scanning

Blinks

Means “JM1ZLK” is
using the “Hirano”
repeater.

While receiving a signal from a repeater

NOTE:
Even if the transceiver receives a signal from a re-
peater, the repeater may not receive the transceiv-
er’s signal, because the repeater’s output power is
higher than the transceiver’s.

The DR mode scan scans simplex frequencies if they

are entered in the repeater list.

Completed

Blinks While receiving a

signal on 433.450.

8-4
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “FROM” (Access repeater) setting (Continued)

DDUsing the Repeater Search function

The transceiver searches for the nearest repeater by Example: Select the “Hirano” repeater that is
using your own and repeater’s position data. the top search result.

1. R
 eceiving your own position data from the GPS
receiver
When it is difficult to receive signals indoors, even if
you are near a window, try going outdoors for better
reception.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)

eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Internal GPS.”
• The transceiver starts to receive your position data.
ttPush [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU
screen.
• The GPS icon blinks when receiving data, as illustrated
below, and stops blinking when valid data is received.
➪ ➪ ➪
- If “Manual” was selected, the icon does not appear.
• It may take only a few seconds to receive, but depend-
ing on the environment, it may take a few minutes. If you
have difficulties receiving, we recommend that you try a Appears
different location.

Continued on the next page.

To display your position data:

q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select "GPS Position," and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Your position is displayed on the GPS POSITION
screen.
e Push [CLR] to exit.

8-5
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “FROM” (Access repeater) setting

DD Using the Repeater Search function (Continued)

2. R
 eceiving your own position from the GPS re-
ceiver
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)
“FROM” is selected.
eePush D-pad() to select “Near Repeater,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The Repeater Search function starts.
• Up to 20 of the nearest repeaters are displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Hirano,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “Hirano” is displayed in “FROM.”

NOTE: When the position data accuracy level is set

to “Approximate,” the direction data is not displayed if
the distance to the repeater is under 5 kilometers. Shows the distance Shows the call sign
(p. 9-30) and direction from your of “Hirano430,”
position to the repeater

Completed

NOTE:
When using the Repeater Search function, be sure to
first receive your own position data.
• If no repeater is found in a 160 kilometers range,
screen 1, as shown to the right, will be displayed.
• If the last received position can be used, screen 2, as
shown to the right, will be displayed.

Screen 1 Screen 2

8-6
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “FROM” (Access repeater) setting (Continued)

DDUsing the TX History

The TX History stores up to 10 “FROM” (Access re-
peater) repeaters used when you transmit a call in the
DR mode.

NOTE: Only repeaters you transmitted to in the DR Example: Select the “Hirano” repeater from
mode are stored in the TX History. the TX History.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “TX History,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Hirano,” and then push D- “FROM” is selected.
pad(Ent).
• “Hirano” is displayed on “FROM.”

You can display detailed repeater information on the

TX HISTORY screen, or delete it from there.
➥➥ Push [QUICK] on the TX HISTORY screen,
then push D-pad() to select the desired item,
and then push D-pad(Ent).

Completed

8-7
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■“TO” (Destination) setting

The destination repeater or station must be set to “TO”
when you transmit a call in the DV mode.
You have seven ways to set the destination.
Click the title as shown below to jump to the specified “Hamacho” repeater
page. is set in “TO.”

NOTE: After you receive the repeater’s signal, the

calling station’s call sign can be captured by holding
down the Call Sign Capture key ( ), and you can
quickly and easily reply to a received call.

To make a Local Area CQ call

1: “Local CQ” setting (p. 8-9)
Set “CQCQCQ” in “TO” (Destination).

To make a Gateway CQ call

2: “Gateway CQ” setting (p. 8-10)
Select a repeater from the repeater list.
[TO SELECT] screen

To make a call to a specific station

3: “Your Call Sign” setting (p. 8-11)
Select the station call sign in the Your Call Sign
memory.

When the destination data is stored in the RX History

4: Setting from the RX History (p. 8-12)
When you receive a call, the calling station data is
stored in the RX History.
You can select the destination from the record.

When the destination data is stored in the TX History

5: Setting from the TX History (p. 8-13)
When you transmit a call, the destination repeater or
station data is stored in the TX History.
You can select the destination from the record.
How to switch the repeater group:
When “Local CQ” or “Gateway CQ” is se-
To directly input the destination station call sign lected, you can switch the repeater group.
6: Direct Input (UR) (p. 8-14) ➥➥While in the DR mode, push [QUICK]
Directly input the destination station call sign. to open the Quick menu. Then
push D-pad() to select “Group Select.”
• You can switch the repeater group using
D-pad()
To directly input the destination repeater call sign
7: Direct Input (RPT) (p. 8-15)
Directly input the destination repeater call sign.

8-8
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “TO” (Destination) setting (Continued)

DDUsing the “Local CQ” (Local Area call)

“CQCQCQ” is set in “TO” to call a station through your Example: Making a Local area call by accessing the
local area (access) repeater. “Hirano” repeater.
qq Hold down for 1 second.
• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO” (Destination), and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Local CQ,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• “CQCQCQ” is displayed on “TO.”

Completed

8-9
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “TO” (Destination) setting (Continued)

DDUsing the “Gateway CQ” (Gateway call)

The destination repeater is set in “TO” to call a station Example: Making a gateway CQ call to (Japan; Hama-
through your local area (access) repeater, gateway cho) from the “Hirano” repeater.
repeater, the internet and then to your destination re-
peater.

qq Hold down for 1 second.

• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO” (Destination), and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Gateway CQ,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• The REPEATER GROUP screen is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group where
your destination repeater is listed, and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• Example: “11: Japan”
ttPush D-pad() to select the destination repeater,
and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “Hamacho”
• “Hamacho” is displayed on “TO.”

After selecting a repeater, you can select other re-

peater preset in your transceiver by rotating [DIAL].

Means this repeat-

er is programmed
as the 282th of the
690 repeaters on
the repeater list.
Completed

8-10
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “TO” (Destination) setting (Continued)

DDUsing the “Your Call Sign”

The “Your Call Sign” memory stores the programmed
“UR” (destination) call sign.
When you select an individual station call sign for the
“TO” (Destination) setting using “Your Call Sign,” a gate-
way call can be made.
When you call the destination through a gateway, the
signal is automatically sent to the last repeater that the
station accessed.
So, even if you don't know where the station is, you can
make a call. Example: Select “TOM” from the “Your Call Sign.”

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Your Call Sign,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the destination, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “TOM”
• “TOM” is displayed on “TO.”

NOTE: If the repeater, set to “FROM” (Access Re-

peater) has no Gateway call sign, you cannot make The call sign of
a gateway call. the selected sta-
tion is displayed.
After selecting a destination, you can select other
station preset in your transceiver by rotating [DIAL].

Means this station

is programmed as
the 33th of the 33
stations on your
memory.

Completed

8-11
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “TO” (Destination) setting (Continued)

DDUsing the RX History

When a call is received in the DV mode, the call data is
stored in the RX History.
Up to 50 Callers, and only the last Called call signs can
be stored. Example: Select “TOM” from RX History.
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “RX History,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the destination, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “TOM”
• “TOM” is displayed on “TO.”

The call sign of

the selected sta-
tion is displayed.
To add the RX HISTORY data to memory, push
[QUICK] on the RX HISTORY screen, then push
D-pad(Ent).

Completed

8-12
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “TO” (Destination) setting (Continued)

DDUsing the TX History

The TX History stores the name and/or call sign of up
to 20 “TO” (Destination) settings which were used when
you made the calls.

NOTE: If you never transmit a call in the DV mode,

you cannot select “TO” (destination) from the TX His-
Example: Select the “Melbourne” repeater in the TX
tory.
History.
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “TX History,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the destination, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “Dallas”
• “Dallas” is displayed on “TO.”

“Dallas”
repeater’s
call sign is
The Sub name is dis- displayed.
played when a repeat-
er is selected.
You can add the TX HISTORY data to memory, or
delete it from there.
➥➥ Push [QUICK] on the TX HISTORY screen,
then push D-pad() to select the desired item,
and then push D-pad(Ent).

Completed

8-13
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “TO” (Destination) setting (Continued)

DDDirectly inputting (UR)

The destination station call sign can be directly input.
Example: Directly input the call sign “JM1ZLK.”
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Direct Input (UR).”

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to enter the edit mode.
ttRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
(Example: J)
• A to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously erase the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
yyPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
uuRepeat steps t and y to enter a call sign of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
(Example: First, J, then M, then 1, then Z, then L,
then K.)
iiAfter entering, push D-pad(Ent) twice to program.
• “JM1ZLK” is displayed on “TO.”
• After programming, you can correct the call sign in the
DIRECT INPUT (UR) screen.
• The programmed call sign remains on the DIRECT IN-
PUT (UR) screen, until inputting a new call sign.

[DIAL]

Completed
If the programmed call sign is duplicated in “Your
Call Sign” memory, the name is displayed. (Only
when the name has been programmed.)

8-14
 Previous view

8 D-STAR OPERATION <BASIC>

■■ “TO” (Destination) setting (Continued)

DDDirectly inputting (RPT)

The destination repeater call sign can be directly input. Example: Directly input the call sign “JP3YDH”

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Direct Input (RPT).”

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to enter the edit mode.
ttRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
(Example: J)
• A to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously erase the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
yyPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
uuRepeat steps t and y to enter a name of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
(Example: F irst, J, then P, then 3, then Y, then D,
then H.)
iiAfter entering, push D-pad(Ent) twice.
• “JP3YDH” is displayed on “TO.”
• After programming, you can correct the call sign in the
DIRECT INPUT (RPT) screen.
• The programmed call sign remains on the DIRECT IN-
PUT (RPT) screen, until inputting a new call sign.

[DIAL]

Completed

If the programmed call sign is duplicated to the re-

The following settings are also correct.
peater list, the name is displayed. (Only when the
name has been programmed.)

The repeater node* “/” is input.

is input. In this case, the call sign is of
a repeater for a Gateway call.
*Although the repeater node letter is ‘B’ for 430 MHz band,
‘A’ is used in Japan. See page 8-1 for details.

8-15
Previous view

Section 9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Message operation............................................... 9-2
DD TX message programming............................... 9-2
DD Message Transmission..................................... 9-3
DD TX message deleting....................................... 9-4
■■ Received call sign viewing................................... 9-5
DD View in the RX History screen. ........................ 9-5
■■ BK mode communication..................................... 9-7
■■ EMR communication............................................ 9-8
DD Adjusting the EMR AF level. ............................ 9-9
■■ Display type setting.............................................. 9-9
■■ DV automatic detection...................................... 9-10
■■ Automatic Reply function. .................................. 9-11
DD Recording an Auto Reply voice announcement. 9-12
DD Playing back the recorded voice audio. ......... 9-12
DD Auto Position Reply function. ......................... 9-13
■■ Low-speed data communication. ....................... 9-14
DD Connection..................................................... 9-14
DD Low-speed data communication application setting.. 9-14
DD Low-speed data communication operation. ... 9-14
■■ Speech function. ................................................ 9-15
DD To announce the received call sign................ 9-15
DD To announce the RX>CS call sign. ................ 9-16
DD Speech Language selection........................... 9-17
DD Phonetic Code setting for the Speech alphabet
character........................................................ 9-17
DD Speech speed selection................................. 9-18
DD Speech level selection. .................................. 9-18
■■ Digital squelch functions. ................................... 9-19
DD The digital call sign squelch setting. .............. 9-19
DD Pocket beep function with the digital call sign
squelch........................................................... 9-19
DD The digital code squelch setting..................... 9-20
DD Pocket
 beep function with the digital code squelch.. 9-20
■■ Viewing the call signs......................................... 9-21
■■ Repeater list....................................................... 9-22
DD Repeater list contents.................................... 9-22
■■ Repeater list programming................................. 9-23
DD New repeater programming. .......................... 9-23
DD Required items for the communication cases.. 9-23
IMPORTANT! ■■ Editing a repeater list. ........................................ 9-32
• The repeater list, described in this ■■ Deleting a repeater list....................................... 9-33
manual, may differ from your trans- ■■ Rearrange the display order of the repeater...... 9-34
ceiver’s preloaded contents. ■■ Adding the Repeater information using the
• Although Japanese repeaters are RX History.......................................................... 9-35
used in the setting examples, the ■■ Skip setting for the DR mode scan..................... 9-36
Japanese repeater node (port) let- DD Individual skip setting..................................... 9-36
ters are different from other coun- DD Group skip setting.......................................... 9-37
try’s. ■■ Repeater group name programming.................. 9-38
Be sure to add a repeater node letter ■■ Repeater detail screen....................................... 9-39
as the 8th digit in the call sign field
■■ Your (destination) call sign programming........... 9-40
after a repeater call sign, according
■■ Deleting Your (destination) call sign. .................. 9-42
to the repeater frequency band, as
shown below. ■■ Rearrange the display order of Your (destination)
1200 MHz : A (B in Japan) call sign.............................................................. 9-43
430 MHz : B (A in Japan) ■■ About the repeater list default values................. 9-44
144 MHz : C (no D-STAR repeat- DD Opening the default repeater list.................... 9-44
ers in Japan) ■■ Your setting is correct?....................................... 9-45
9-1
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Message operation Example: To program “JAPAN >TOM” into message

memory number 1.
The transceiver has a total of 5 message memories to
store short messages to transmit during DV mode op-
eration.
TX messages of up to 20 characters can be pro-
grammed in each of the 5 message memories.

DDTX message programming

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“My Station”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “TX Message,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select message memory number
“1.”
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Edit.”
uuPush D-pad(Ent) to enter the TX message edit
mode.
iiRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
(Example: J)
• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low-
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter. “JAPAN” and a
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the space are entered.
Character type
input mode selection window. selection screen
• A space can be selected, in any input mode selected. Symbol type
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space. is selected
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
• See page 2-7 for programming details.
ooPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
!0 Repeat steps i and o to enter up to 20 characters, To input “>,”
including spaces. [>] is selected
(Example: First, J, then A, then P, then A, then N, in the symbol
then (space), then >, then T, then O, list screen.
then M.)
!1 After entering the message, push D-pad(Ent) two
times to program.
!2 Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen. “JAPAN >TOM”
is entered.

9-2
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Message operation (Continued)

DDMessage Transmission
You can transmit a preprogrammed text message by
pushing [PTT]. First, select a TX message which also
turns ON the message transmission function.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“My Station”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “TX Message,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select message memory number
1 to 5.
• To turn OFF the message transmission function, select
“OFF.”
ttAfter
 selecting, push D-pad(Ent).
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• The message is transmitted along with your voice signal.
• The message is transmitted each time you push [PTT].
• The message is automatically transmitted every 30 sec-
onds during continuous transmission.

RX message display function

As the default, the received message is automatically
displayed and scrolled on the LCD.
To not display and scroll the received message, turn
OFF the RX message display function in “RX Mes-
sage” of the MENU screen. (p. 16-74)
(MENU > Display > RX Message)

The received mes-

sage is displayed
and scrolled here.

9-3
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Message operation (Continued) Example: To delete the programmed TX message “JA-
DDTX message deleting PAN >TOM” from message memory number
The programmed TX message can be deleted, as de- 1.
scribed below.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“My Station”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “TX Message,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select message memory number
1.
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Clear,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
uuPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
iiPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

9-4
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Received call sign viewing

When a DV call is received, the calling station and the
repeater’s call signs are stored in the RX HISTORY
screen.
Up to 50 calls can be stored.
Even if the transceiver is turned OFF, the RX record
won’t be deleted.
The stored call signs can be displayed in the following
manner.

DDView in the RX History screen

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“RX History”),
RX history
and then push D-pad(Ent). number
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select an RX history number be-

tween “RX01” and “RX50.”
• In addition to the RX history number, the call signs of
the caller and called station, RX message, Repeater call
sign of the called station, received date and time are dis-
played on the LCD.
• If only one call is received, skip step e.
• “GW” appears when the gateway call is received.
• “GPS” appears when the received call includes GPS po-
sition.
• “UP” appears when the repeater uplink signal is re-
ceived.
rrPush D-pad(Ent) to show the contents of the RX his-
tory.
ttPush D-pad() to switch the displayed contents of
the RX history.
• CALLER : Shows the call sign of the caller station and
any note programmed after the call sign.
• CALLED : Shows the call sign of the called station.
• RXRPT1* : Shows the call sign of the repeater that was
accessed by the caller station. If it was a
call through a gateway and the internet, this
item displays the gateway repeater call sign
of your local area repeater.
• Rx RPT2* : Shows the call sign of the repeater you re-
ceived the call from.
• MESSAGE : Shows any message included in the re-
ceived call, if programmed.
• RX TIME : Shows the date and time the call was re-
ceived.
*“FREQUENCY” appears instead of these items when the
call was not through a repeater (Simplex call), to show the
frequency that was used.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

When the received call includes the GPS

position data, it is displayed after RX TIME.

9-5
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Received call sign viewing (Continued)

When the received call includes

GPS position data.
You can delete the RX HISTORY data.
➥➥ Push [QUICK] on the RX HISTORY or the
contents screen, then push D-pad() to select
“Delete” or “Delete All.” And then push D-pad(Ent)
to delete.

✓✓ Information
“RX RPT1” setting may be differ, depending on the
communication form.

Example: When a Local area call is received.

RXRPT2 RXRPT1

ing
sten rt
UK li o nin
g
JG3L 3YHH p liste ort
P
o n J LUK H p
A... JG3 JP3YH
on
A...
CALLED K li
nin
g
ste por t
3LU HH
JG JP3Y
on
A..
. CALLER

YOUR STATION

Example: When a Gateway call is recelved.

RXRPT2
GW
g
RXRPT1
callin
ZLK
JM1 1YIU po
rt INTERNET
to J P ing
call rt
A... ing ZLK po
call r t
LK U po JM1 P1YIU
1Z J
JM P1Y
I to
A...
J
to
.
A..

CALLED CALLER

YOUR STATION

9-6
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■BK mode communication

The BK (Break-in) function allows you to break into a
conversation, where the two other stations are commu-
nicating with call sign squelch enabled. (Default: OFF)

NOTE: The BK function is automatically turned OFF

when transceiver is turned OFF.

qqAfter receiving a DV conversation, hold down

for 1 second.
• After releasing , beeps sound, and the calling sta-
tion call sign is announced. (RX>CS Speech function)
• The calling station or call sign of the repeater used is
automatically set.
• When a call sign is not received correctly, error beeps
sound, and no call sign is set.
wwPush [MENU] .
eePush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad() to select “BK,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “ON.”
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• “BK” appears.
uuWhen both stations are in standby, push [PTT] to
transmit. Appears
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
• “BK” blinks on the station that receives the break-in call.
iiRelease [PTT] to receive.
Wait for a reply call from the station.
ooAfter receiving the reply call, communicate normally.
!0 To cancel the BK mode, select “OFF” in “BK,” as step
t, or turn OFF the power.

How to use Break-in?

While using digital call sign squelch, the squelch never opens (no audio is heard) even if a call is received, unless
your own call sign is specified.
However, when a call including the “BK ON” signal (break-in call) is received, the squelch will open and audio is
heard even if the call is specified for another station.

• Station C calling to Station A with “BK OFF” • Station C calling to Station A with “BK ON”

Station A and Station A and

B are commu- B are commu-
nicating us- nicating using
ing digital call the digital call
sign squelch. Station A Station B sign squelch. Station A Station B

Station C Station C

Station B never hears that Station C Station B also hears that Station C
is calling Station A. is calling Station A.
9-7
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■EMR communication
The EMR (Enhanced Monitor Request) communication
mode can be used in only the DV mode. In the EMR
mode, no call sign setting is necessary.
All transceivers that receive an EMR mode signal auto-
matically open their squelch to receive the signal.
When an EMR mode signal is received, the audio (voice)
will be heard at the specified level, even if the volume
setting level is set to the minimum level, or digital call Example: To transmit from the “Hamacho” repeater in
sign/digital code squelch is in use. (Default: OFF) the EMR mode

NOTE: The EMR communication function is auto-

matically turned OFF when the transceiver is turned
OFF.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “FROM,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “11: Japan,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “Hamacho,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• “Hamacho” is displayed on “FROM”.
yyPush [MENU] .
uuPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
iiPush D-pad() to select “EMR,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
ooPush D-pad() to select “ON.”
!0 Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• “EMR” appears.
!1 Push [PTT] to transmit.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
• “EMR” blinks on a station that receives the EMR signal.
And the audio (voice) will be heard at the specified level,
or the [VOL] control level, whichever is higher.
!2 Release [PTT] to receive.
!3 To cancel the EMR mode, select “OFF” in step o, as
described above, or turn OFF the power.

Appears

9-8
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ EMR communication (Continued)

DDAdjusting the EMR AF level

The audio output level when an EMR signal is received
is adjustable between 0 and 39.
When an EMR signal is received, the audio will be
heard at the preset level, or the [VOL] control level,
whichever is higher.
To disable the setting, set it to “0.”

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “EMR AF Level,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to adjust the EMR audio output level
between 0 (minimum) and 39 (maximum) in single
digit steps. (Default: 19)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

■■Display type setting

The display size in the DR mode, such as a repeater
name, call sign, and so on, can be set to Large.
(Default: Normal)

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “Display Type,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
eePush D-pad() to select “Large,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The display size changes to large such as the repeater
name set in “TO” and “FROM.”

9-9
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■DV automatic detection

If you receive an FM signal during DV mode operation,
the “DV” and “FM” icons alternately blink to indicate the
received signal is FM.
When the DV Auto Detect function is turned ON, the
transceiver automatically selects the FM mode to tem-
porarily monitor the signal. (Default: OFF)
• Regardless of this setting, the “DV” and “FM” icons alter-
nately blink if you receive an FM signal during DV mode
operation.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “DV Auto Detect,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON.”
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• When an FM signal is received in the DV mode, the “DV”
and “FM” icons sequentially blink, and the transceiver re-
ceives the signal in the FM mode.

When digital call sign squelch (DSQL) or digital code

squelch (CSQL) is selected, the transceiver does not
receive FM signals, even if this function is ON.
You can silently wait for calls from others.

<When an FM signal is received while in the DV mode>

• DV Auto Detect function: OFF • DV Auto Detect function: ON

The “DV” and “FM” icons sequentially blink, but the au- The “DV” and “FM” icons sequentially blink, and the au-
dio cannot be heard. dio can be heard.

Thanks for the

• • •
These icons alter- These icons alter- nice QSO• • •
nately blink nately blink

The audio cannot The audio can

be heard. be heard.

9-10
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Automatic Reply function

When a call addressed to your own call sign is received,
the Automatic Reply function automatically replies with
your call sign. (Default: OFF)
Depending on the setting, the recorded message or
your position may be transmitted with the call sign.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Auto Reply,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON,” “Voice” or “Position.”
• ON : Replies with your own call sign. (No audio reply
is sent)
• Voice : Replies with your call sign and any Auto Reply
message recorded on the microSD (up to 10
seconds).
If no microSD card is inserted or no message
is recorded, only your call sign is transmitted.
The transmitted audio can be monitored.
• Position : Replies with your own call sign and transmits
your position using the internal GPS receiver.
(p. 9-13)
When “OFF” or “Manual” is set in “GPS Select,” Appears
the internal GPS receiver is temporarily turned
ON.
When “External GPS” is set in “GPS Select,”
the transceiver transmits your position. But if
the external GPS receiver is not connected, the
internal GPS receiver will be activated.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

NOTE:
• When “ON” or “Voice” is selected, the Automatic
Reply function is automatically turned OFF, when
you push [PTT].
• When “Position” is selected, the Automatic Reply
function is kept to ON, even if you push [PTT]. After receiving a call from “JG3LUK,” the
• The Power Save function is disabled when “ON” or transceiver automatically sends a reply call.
“Voice” is selected.
• The Power Save function is enabled when “Posi-
tion” is selected.
• The Automatic Reply function cannot be used on
the SUB band.

To record the voice signal

You can record a voice announcement for the Auto
Reply function in “DV Auto Reply” on the MENU
screen. (p. 16-27) “TO” setting does not change, but
(MENU > Voice Memo > DV Auto Reply) “UR: JG3LUK (Caller’s call sign)”
is displayed.

9-11
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Automatic Reply function (Continued)

DDRecording an Auto Reply voice announcement
The Auto Reply voice announcement can be recorded
and saved on the microSD card to reply to the call with
your voice.

NOTE: Be sure to insert a microSD card to the [mi-

cro SD] slot of the transceiver before starting to re-
cord a voice signal.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice
Memo”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “DV Auto Reply,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush [PTT] to start recording. (No RF is transmit-
ted)
• After releasing [PTT], the recording is cancelled.
• Maximum record period is 10 second
• Hold the microphone 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches) from your
mouth, then speak into the microphone at a normal voice
level.
• Only one announcement can be recorded. The current
contents will be overwritten if you record again.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen. While recording

Audio level is displayed

DDPlaying back the recorded voice audio

The recorded voice audio for the Auto Reply function can
be played back.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice
Memo”), and then push D-pad(Ent). Recording time
eePush D-pad() to select “DV Auto Reply,” and then is displayed
push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad(Ent) to start the playback.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

✓✓ Information
You can delete the recorded audio. While playing back
➥➥On the DV AUTO REPLY screen, push [QUICK] ,
and then push D-pad(Ent).
When no microSD card is inserted:
When no microSD card is in-
serted, this error message is
displayed.

9-12
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Automatic Reply function (Continued)

DDAuto Position Reply function
When you receive a call addressed to your own call wwYour position is auto-
sign, but are in a situation that makes it difficult to oper- matically transmitted.
ate the transceiver, this function automatically replies
with your own call sign and transmits your position.

After receiving the Auto Position Reply call, the desti-

qqA call addressed to
nation screen shows your position.
your own call sign. Destination
The D-STAR product other than the ID-51 do not show
(ID-51)
the position after receiving a call. Your
station

eeAfter receiving, the

screen shows the
position.

Scrolls your call sign

or the TX message.
• Your status message
may be displayed. After receiving the Auto Posi-
tion Reply call, the destination
screen shows your position.

• When no valid position is received

After receiving a call addressed to your own call sign,
even if “OFF” or “Manual” is set in “GPS Select,” the
internal GPS receiver is temporarily turned ON for ap-
proximately 5 seconds to receive your position.
Then, the transceiver automatically replies with a mes-
Scrolls your
sage, as described below.
message

When the internal GPS receiver is temporarily turned

ON, and valid data is received, the transceiver auto-
matically replies if a call addressed to your own call After receiving the Auto Position
sign is received again. Reply call, the destination screen
shows your message.
• Reply message list when no valid position is re-
ceived
Message Status NOTE:
No Position When no position is received • When “External GPS” is set in “GPS Select,” and
Old Position 2 minutes or more has passed since if the external GPS receiver is not connected, the
receiving the position. internal GPS receiver will be activated.
No Posi & GPS Start The internal GPS receiver is tem- • The position transmission is based on the GPS
porarily turned ON, but has not re- transmission mode. (p. 16-40)
ceived the position yet. • When the settings of GPS transmission mode are
Old Posi & GPS Start The internal GPS receiver is tem- incorrect for the Automatic Reply function, the trans-
porarily turned ON, and 2 minutes ceiver automatically correct them to reply a call.
or more has passed since receiving • When the GPS transmission mode is OFF, “GPS-A”
the position. is automatically selected.
9-13
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Low-speed data communication

In addition to digital voice communication, low-speed Before starting low-speed data communication:
data communication can be made. The “DV Data TX” item is set to “Auto” by default.
Use the optional OPC-2218LU data communication So, depending on the data communication application
cable with a third-party serial data communication soft- software, the transceiver may automatically transmit
ware. the data only when you input text on the software
screen.

DDConnection
Connect the transceiver to your PC using the OPC- NOTE: Before starting, be sure to set the following
2218LU cable, as illustrated below. items;
• Set the “GPS SELECT” option to “OFF,” “Internal
GPS” or “Manual” in the MENU screen. (p. 16-32)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)
• Set the “GPS OUT” option to “OFF” in the MENU
screen. (p. 16-33)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Out)
PC
• Set the “GPS TX Mode” option to “OFF” in the
To the [DATA] jack MENU screen. (p. 16-40)
(MENU > GPS > GPS TX Mode)

Transceiver OPC-2218LU To a
(Option) [USB] port

DDLow-speed data communication application setting

Configure the serial data communication software as *1 Depending on the PC environment, the COM port
follows. number used by the ID-51A/E may be higher than
• Port : The COM port number which is used by 5. In such case, use the application which can set to
the ID-51A/E.*1 higher than 5.
• Baud rate : 4800/9600 bps*2 *2 The baud rate can be set in the “Data Speed” item of
• Data : 8 bit the MENU screen. (p. 16-69)
• Parity : None (MENU > Function > Data Speed)
• Stop : 1 bit
• Flow control : Xon/Xoff

DDLow-speed
 data communication operation
qqSet your own call sign, UR call sign and the repeater
NOTE:
call sign.
• Only ASCII code can be used for the low-speed
wwFollow the instructions of the data communication
data communication.
application software.
• A message of up to 20 characters can be transmit-
eeWhen data is input from a PC through the [DATA]
ted with a DV voice signal.
jack, the transceiver automatically transmits it.
• Depending on the combination of your PC and your
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
• Push [PTT] to transmit the data and a voice signal when serial data communication software, some data
“PTT” is selected in the “DV Data TX” item of the MENU may be lost.
screen. (p. 16-56) • While receiving voice communication or low-speed
(MENU > DV Set > DV Data TX) data communication through the internet, some
• Before transmission, the transceiver sends approximate- packets may be lost due to network error (poor
ly 500 milliseconds carrier sense. data throughput performance). In such a case, “L”
appears on the LCD to show the Packet Loss has
occurred.

9-14
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Speech function
The speech function announces the called station call
sign, or the individual or station call sign that is selected
from the RX History by holding down and rotating
[DIAL].
It is convenient when you cannot watch the LCD, or you
missed the call’s audio.
This function helps you to know the call sign of the call-
er station without seeing the LCD.

DDTo announce the received call sign

The received call sign can be announced.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “RX Call Sign SPEECH,”

and then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON (Kerchunk)” or “ON
(All).”
• ON (Kerchunk) : When a DV call is received, and if the
call time is short, the calling station’s call
sign is announced. (Default) • When “ON (Kerchunk)” is selected
• ON (All) : When a DV call is received, the calling
station’s call sign is announced.
ttPush [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU
screen.
• When a DV call is received, the standby beep sounds,
and after approximately 1 second, the call sign is an-
nounced.

NOTE: K’
1ZL
• Even if a “/” and a note are after a call sign, they are ‘JM
not announced.
• The announced contents cannot be recorded on
the microSD card.
• When “ON (All)” is selected
• The ID-51A/E has other Speech functions:
[DIAL] speech function
The frequency or repeater call sign is announced 1
second after [DIAL] selection.
(MENU > SPEECH > DIAL SPEECH)
Mode speech function ’
tening?
The selected operating mode is announced when u lis
yo
[MODE] is pushed. ‘Are
(MENU > SPEECH > MODE SPEECH) K’
1ZL
• When the digital squelch function is used, and if a ‘JM
received signal is not addressed to your call sign,
or does not include an unmatched digital code, the
calling station’s call sign is not announced.

9-15
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Speech function (Continued)

DDTo announce the RX>CS call sign

The station call sign that is selected from the RX His-
tory by holding down and rotating [DIAL], will be
announced.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select the root item (“RX>CS

SPEECH”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON.” (Default: ON)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
yyWhile holding down , rotating [DIAL] to select
the station call sign.
• After releasing , the selected station call sign is an-
nounced.

NOTE:
While the call sign is being announced, you cannot
hear any received audio, and the audio is not record-
ed on the microSD card.
If the call sign is announced while recording, the
recorded contents are silent during the announce-
ment.
• When “ON” is selected

[DIAL]

Beeps
While holding down .

Beeps
K
JG3LU After releasing .

9-16
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Speech function (Continued)

DDSpeech Language selection

The speech language can be set to English or Japa-
nese.
This setting is used for all Speech functions.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH

Language”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “English” or “Japanese.”
(Default: English)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• A call sign is announced in the selected language.

DDPhonetic Code setting for the Speech al-

phabet character
The speech alphabet character can be set to phonetic
code.
This setting is used for all Speech functions.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Alphabet,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Phonetic Code.”
ttPush [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU
screen.

• When “Phonetic Code” is selected

ONE
M IKE O
IET KIL
JUL LIMA
U
ZUL
Example: JM1ZLK

9-17
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Speech function (Continued)

DDSpeech speed selection
The speech speed can be set to slow or fast.
This setting is used for all Speech functions.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “SPEECH Speed,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Slow” or “Fast.”
(Default: Fast)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

DDSpeech level selection

The speech volume level can be set to between 0 (mini-
mum) and 9 (maximum).
This setting is used for all Speech functions.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “SPEECH Level,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to set the speech volume level to be-
tween 0 (minimum) and 9 (maximum). (Default: 7)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• When “0” (minimum) is selected, the call sign won’t be
announced.
• The volume level can be adjusted with the [VOL] control.

9-18
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Digital squelch functions

The digital squelch opens only when receiving a signal
addressed to your own call sign, or a signal that in-
cludes a matching digital code.
You can silently wait for calls from others.

DDThe digital call sign squelch setting

qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR mode is selected.
•T o use the digital call sign squelch function in another
mode, push [V/MHz] or [M/CALL] to select the
VFO, Memory, or CALL channel mode.
wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “DSQL,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad() to select “DSQL S” or “DSQL.”

• DSQL S : Turn ON the digital call sign squelch pocket
beep.
• DSQL : Turn ON the digital call sign squelch.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to set the digital call sign squelch,
and then exit the Quick menu screen.
• “DSQL S” or “DSQL” appears.
yyWhen
 the received signal includes a matching call
sign, the squelch opens and the audio is heard.
• When the received signal’s call sign does not match, digi-
tal call sign squelch does not open; however, the S/RF
meter shows the received signal level.

NOTE:
• DO NOT use the digital code squelch function when Appears
communicating with two or more stations, because
the digital call sign squelch function opens only
when receiving a signal addressed to your own call
sign. Thus the digital call sign squelch function can
be used when communicating with only one sta-
tion.
•W  hile operating in the low-speed data communica-
tion mode, the digital squelch opens even if receiv-
ing a signal is not addressed to your own call sign.

• When “DSQL S” is selected

DDPocket beep function with the digital call
sign squelch
When a received signal is addressed to your own call
sign, the transceiver emits beep tones for 30 seconds
and “S” blinks.
➥➥Push [PTT] to answer, or push D-pad(Ent) to stop
the beeps or “S” blinking. .
Beep..
• “S” disappears.
e ep,
p, B
Bee
If no operation is performed for 30 seconds, the beep
tones automatically stops, but “S” continues to blink
to inform you of a call.
9-19
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Digital squelch functions (Continued)

DDThe digital code squelch setting
qqHold down for 1 second.
• The DR mode is selected.
• To use the digital call sign squelch function in another
mode, push [V/MHz] or [M/CALL] to select the
VFO, Memory, or CALL channel mode.
wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “DSQL,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad() to select “CSQL S” or “CSQL.”

• CSQL S : Turn ON the digital code squelch pocket
beep.
• CSQL : Turn ON the digital code squelch.
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to set the digital code squelch, and
then exit the quick menu screen.
• “CSQL S” or “CSQL” appears.
yyPush [MENU] .
uuPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/ Appears
TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
iiPush D-pad() to select “Digital Code,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ooRotate [DIAL] to select a digital code between 00
and 99 for the digital code squelch function.
!0 Push [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU
screen.
!1 When the received signal includes a matching code,
the squelch opens and the audio is heard.
• When the received signal’s code does not match, the
digital code squelch does not open; however, the S/RF
meter shows the received signal strength.

NOTE: While operating in the low-speed data com-

munication mode, the digital code squelch opens
even if receiving a signal does not match to your
digital code.

DDPocket beep function with the digital

code squelch
When a received signal matches your digital code, the
transceiver sounds beep tones for 30 seconds and
“S” blinks.
➥➥Push [PTT] to answer, or push D-pad(Ent) to stop
the beeps or “S” blinking. • When “CSQL S” is selected
• “S” disappears.

If no operation is performed for 30 seconds, the beep

tones automatically stop, but “S” continues to blink
to inform you of a call.

...
,Beep
eep
p, B
Bee

9-20
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Viewing the call signs

qqPush [MODE] one or more times to select the While operating D-STAR
DV mode. in the Memory mode.
wwHold down for 1 second to display the CALL SIGN
screen.
• The CALL SIGN screen can be displayed in the DR, VFO,
Memory or Call channel mode.
• To select the name display mode, push [QUICK] ,
and then push D-pad() to select “Name Display.” After
selecting, push D-pad(Ent).
eePush [CLR] to return to the previous screen.

Destination call sign

Access repeater call sign
Gateway repeater call sign
Your own call sign

9-21
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Repeater list
You can store repeater information for quick and simple NOTE: For easy operation, the repeater list is pre-
communication in up to 750 repeater memory channels loaded into your transceiver. However, if the CPU
(Repeater list) in up to 25 Groups. clears all programmed contents (All Reset), the re-
Programming the repeater list is required for DR mode peater list is also cleared. We recommend that
operation. memory data be backed up externally or be saved
to a PC using the supplied CS-51 cloning soft-
ware.

About the repeater list:

The repeater list can be downloaded from the Icom
website.
h ttp://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/
firm/index.html
DDRepeater list contents
The following contents are included in the repeater list: Example: “Hirano” repeater information

• NAME (Repeater name) (p. 9-24)

• SUB NAME (Repeater sub name) (p. 9-25)
• CALL SIGN (Repeater call sign and port letter)
(p. 9-26)
• GW CALL SIGN (Gateway repeater’s call sign and
port “G”) (p. 9-27)
• GROUP (Repeater group) (p. 9-27)
• USE(FROM) (Access repeater use) (p. 9-28)
• FREQUENCY (Access repeater’s input frequency)*
(p. 9-28)
• DUP (Duplex direction)* (p. 9-29)
• OFFSET FREQ (Frequency offset)* (p. 9-29)
• POSITION (Position data accuracy level) (p. 9-30)
• LATITUDE (Latitude position of the repeater)
(p. 9-30)
• LONGITUDE (Longitude position of the repeater)
(p. 9-30)
• UTC OFFSET (UTC Offset) (p. 9-31)

* Appears only when USE(FROM) is selected as YES.

9-22
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Repeater list programming

This section describes how to manually program new DD Required items for the communication cases
repeater into the repeater list.
Used as Used as a Used for a
Repeater list
an access destination simplex com-
The required setting items differ, depending on the re- contents
repeater repeater munication
peater use. Be sure to confirm the required items, as
NAME – – –
shown to the right.
SUB NAME – – –
This item MUST
NOTE: To program a repeater into the repeater list, CALL SIGN ✔ ✔
be blank.
the repeater’s call sign MUST be entered.
GW CALL ✔
✔ –
SIGN (For Gateway call)

GROUP – – –
USE(FROM) ✔ – ✔
FREQUENCY ✔ – ✔
This item MUST
DUP ✔ – be set to “OFF.”
OFFSET FREQ ✔ – –
POSITION – – –
LATITUDE – – –
LONGITUDE – – –
UTC OFFSET – – –

DDNew repeater programming

1. Repeater group selection

q Push [MENU] .
w Push D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

e Push D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• The repeater groups are displayed.
r Push D-pad() to select the desired repeater group
to be programmed, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The repeater list of the selected repeater group is dis-
played.
t Push [QUICK] .
y Push D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The REPEATER LIST EDIT screen is displayed.

*When you want to add a new repeater by editing a pro- Select

grammed repeater memory contents, select “Edit.” In this
*
case, after programming, be sure to select “<<Add Write>>.”
If you select “<<Overwrite>>,” the original repeater pro-
grammed contents are overwritten. ☞ Continued on the next page.
9-23
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Repeater list programming (Continued)

2. Repeater name programming

u Push D-pad() to select “NAME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter the repeater name edit mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

i Rotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.

• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low-
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor. Shows the currently se-
• See page 2-7 for programming details. lected character type
o Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit. Character type
!0 Repeat steps i and o to enter a name of up to 16 selection screen
characters, including spaces.
!1 After entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).

Example:
“East Tokyo” is
entered.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-24
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Repeater list programming (Continued)

3. Repeater sub name programming

!2 Push D-pad() to select “SUB NAME,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the repeater sub name edit
mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!3 Rotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.

• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low-
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters, Shows the currently se-
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor. lected character type
• See page 2-7 for programming details.
!4 Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second Character type
digit. selection screen
!5 Repeat steps !3 and !4 to enter a sub name of up to
8 characters, including spaces.
!6 After entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).

Example:
“Japan” is en-
tered.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-25
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Repeater list programming (Continued)

4. Repeater call sign programming

When used for simplex communication, go to
[7. Access repeater setting].

!7 Push D-pad() to select “CALL SIGN,” and then

push D-pad(Ent) to enter the repeater call sign edit
mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!8 Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.

• A to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
!9 Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
@0 Repeat steps !8 and !9 to enter a name of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
@1 After entering the call sign, push D-pad(Ent).

Example:
✓✓ Information “JP1YYY A” is
Be sure to add a repeater node (port) letter as the 8th entered.
digit in the call sign field after a repeater call sign, ac-
cording to the repeater frequency band, as shown be-
low.
Note that Japanese repeater node letters are different.
1200 MHz : A (B in Japan)
430 MHz : B (A in Japan)
144 MHz : C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan)

Cross band operation between different nodes at the

same repeater site can be made.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-26
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Repeater list programming (Continued)

5. Gateway repeater call sign programming

The 8th digit in the call sign, programmed in [4. Re-
peater call sign programming] as described above, is
automatically set to “G” as the gateway port. And you
can skip this setting and go to the next item.
If you need to change it, follow the steps, as de-
scribed below.

Push D-pad() to select “GW CALL SIGN,” and then

@2 
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the gateway repeater call
sign edit mode.
D-pad Example:
(Ent) “JP1YYY G” is
(�) entered.

@3 Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.

• A to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
@4 Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
@5 Repeat steps @3 and @4 to enter a name of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
• The 8th digit in the gateway repeater call sign is set to
only “G” or a space.
@6 After entering the gateway repeater call sign, push
D-pad(Ent).

6. Repeater group viewing

In this item, you can view the repeater group that is
selected in [1. Repeater group selection]. And you
can skip this setting and go to the next item.
If necessary, you can change the repeater group.

@7 Push D-pad() to select “GROUP,” and then push

D-pad(Ent) to enter the repeater group selection
mode.
@8 Push D-pad() to select the desired repeater group
(01 to 25), and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The selected repeater group is displayed on the RE-
PEATER LIST EDIT screen.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-27
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Repeater list programming (Continued)

7. Access repeater setting

The programmed repeaters can be used as an ac-
cess repeaters in the DR mode.
For simplex operation, or when the programmed
repeater is not used as an access repeater, select
“NO.” In this case, the programmed repeater does
not appear in the “FROM” selection.

Push D-pad() to select “USE(FROM),” and then

@9 
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

#0 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
• You can select the programmed repeater as an access
repeater (FROM).

8. Access repeater frequency programming

This item appears only when “YES” is selected in
[7. Access repeater setting].

Push D-pad() to select “FREQUENCY,” and then

#1 
push D-pad(Ent) to enter the frequency edit mode.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
#2 Rotate [DIAL] to input the 100 MHz digit of the fre-
quency.
#3 Push to move the cursor backward, or push to
move the cursor forward.
#4 Repeat steps #2 and #3 to enter the frequency.
#5 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

Example:
“439.340.00” is
entered.

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-28
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Repeater list programming (Continued)

9. Duplex direction setting

• This item appears only when “YES” is selected in
[7. Access repeater setting].
• “DUP–” is automatically set when the access re-
peater frequency is programmed in [8. Access re-
peater frequency programming].
• If necessary, you can change the duplex direction.

#6 Push D-pad() to select “DUP,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

#7 Push D-pad() to select the duplex direction.

• OFF : Turn the duplex function OFF.
For a simplex operation, this item MUST be set to
“OFF.”
• DUP– : The transmit frequency shifts down from the re-
ceive frequency by the offset amount.
• DUP+ : The transmit frequency shifts up from the receive
frequency by the offset amount.
#8 After setting, push D-pad(Ent).

10. Frequency offset programming

• This item appears only when “YES” is selected in
[7. Access repeater setting].
• The offset value* is automatically set when the ac-
cess repeater frequency is programmed in [8. Ac-
cess repeater frequency programming].
*The default value differs, depending on the version.
• If necessary, you can change the frequency offset.

#9 Push D-pad() to select “OFFSET FREQ,” and then

push D-pad(Ent) to enter the frequency offset edit
mode.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
$0 Rotate [DIAL] to input the frequency offset.
$1 Push to move the cursor backward, or push to
move the cursor forward.
$2 Repeat steps $0 and $1 to enter the frequency off-
set.
$3 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-29
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Repeater list programming (Continued)

11. Position data accuracy level setting

When the Repeater Search function is not used, or
the distance between your position and a repeater is
not displayed, select “OFF.”

$4 Push D-pad() to select “POSITION,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

$5 Push D-pad() to select the position data accuracy

level.
• None : Select when the repeater has no position
data.
• Approximate : Select when the programmed position data
is approximate.
• Exact : Select when the programmed position data
is exactly correct.
$6 After setting, push D-pad(Ent).

12. Latitude programming

This item appears only when “Approximate” or “Ex-
act” is selected in [11. Position data accuracy level
setting].

Push D-pad() to select “LATITUDE,” and then push

$7 
D-pad(Ent) to enter the latitude data edit mode.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
$8 Rotate [DIAL] to input the latitude.
$9 Push to move the cursor backward, or push to
move the cursor forward.
%0 Repeat steps $8 and $9 to enter the latitude.
%1 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

13. Longitude programming

This item appears only when “Approximate” or “Ex-
act” is selected in [11. Position data accuracy level
setting].

%2 Push D-pad() to select “LONGITUDE,” and then

push D-pad(Ent) to enter the longitude data edit
mode.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
%3 Rotate [DIAL] to input the longitude.
%4 Push to move the cursor backward, or push to
move the cursor forward.
%5 Repeat steps %3 and %4 to enter the longitude.
%6 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

☞ Continued on the next page.

9-30
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Repeater list programming (Continued)

14. UTC Offset programming

UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) offset is the time
difference between UTC and repeater local time. This
item enables you to check the destination repeater’s
time when you make a gateway call. (p. 9-39)

%7 Push D-pad() to select “UTC OFFSET,” and then

push D-pad(Ent) to enter the UTC offset edit mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

%8 Rotate [DIAL] to input the time difference between

UTC and the local time.
%9 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).

15. Storing the repeater list

^0 Push D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
^1 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The programmed contents are stored to the repeater list,
and the display returns to the RPT LIST screen.

Select
*

To cancel the programmed data:

To cancel the programmed
data, push [CLR] to
display “Cancel edit?.” Push
D-pad() to select “YES,”
and then push D-pad(Ent)
to cancel programming and
the display returns the RPT
LIST screen.

* “<<Overwrite>>” appears when “Edit” is selected

in [1. Repeater group selection].

9-31
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Editing a repeater list

This function reprograms a repeater’s data. This is use-
ful when already-programmed data is incorrect, has
changed or some data should be added to the list.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group that in-
cludes the repeater you want to edit, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater to be edited.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Edit.”
iiPush D-pad() to select the desired item, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• See pages 9-23 to 9-31 for programming details.
ooAfter programming, the display returns to the RE-
PEATER LIST EDIT screen.
!0 Push D-pad() to select “<<Overwrite>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent). Example:
!1 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- “East Tokyo” is
pad(Ent). edited.
• The programmed contents are overwritten on the repeat-
er list, and the display returns the RPT LIST screen.

9-32
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Deleting a repeater list

The programmed repeater contents can be deleted
from the repeater list.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group that
includes the repeater you want to delete, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater to be deleted.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
iiPush
 D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The programmed repeater contents are deleted from the
repeater list, and the display returns to the RPT LIST
screen.

Example:
“East Tokyo” is
deleted.

9-33
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Rearrange the display order of the repeater

You can move the programmed repeaters to rearrange
their display order in the selected repeater group.
The programmed repeater cannot be moved out of their
assigned repeater group.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group that
includes the repeater you want to move, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater to be moved.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Move,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “DESTINATION” blinks on the upper left of the LCD.
iiPush
 D-pad() to select the location to insert the
repeater you want to move, which will be above the
memory name selected in this screen, and then push Select the repeater
D-pad(Ent). to be moved.
• The selected repeater is inserted to above the destina-
tion repeater name.
• When “<<Move End>>” is selected, the selected repeater
is moved to the bottom of the repeater group.

Blinks

Blinks Select the

destination

“East Tokyo” is
moved to the
bottom.

9-34
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Adding the Repeater information using the RX History

This section describes how to add a new repeater infor-
mation to the repeater list using the RX history.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“RX History”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select the RX history number that

includes the repeater you want to add to the repeater
list. RX history number
rrPush D-pad(Ent).
• The RX history detail screen is displayed.
ttPush
 D-pad() to display “RXRPT1” and “RXRPT2.”
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Add To RPT List,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
iiPush D-pad() to select the repeater call sign you
want to add to the repeater list, and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• When only one call sign is displayed, directly push D-
pad(Ent).
• The display is switched from the RX HISTORY screen
to the REPEATER LIST EDIT screen of the MENU. The
selected repeater call sign is automatically programmed.
• If necessary, edit the contents. (pp. 9-22 to 9-31)
ooPush
 D-pad() to select “<<Add To RPT List>>,” and “RXRPT1”and
then push D-pad(Ent). “RXRPT2” are
!0 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- displayed.
pad(Ent).
• The programmed contents are added to the repeater list,
and the display returns to the RX HISTORY screen.

How to switch the name display:

When the call sign is displayed on the RX HISTORY
screen, you can switch the display type to “Name Dis-
play.”
When the repeater name is not programmed in the
repeater list, the display does not switch to the name
display. It is convenient that you find a repeater that is
not included in the repeater list.

➥➥When the RX HISTORY

screen is displayed, Example:
push [QUICK] to “JP1YJJ A” is
display the Quick menu. added.
Push D-pad() to select
“Name Display,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).

9-35
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Skip setting for the DR mode scan

You can set unnecessary repeaters as scan skip tar-
gets. The selected repeaters are skipped during scan-
ning for faster selection and scanning.
You can set the skip setting to all repeaters in the se-
lected repeater group, or the individual repeater.

When a repeater is specified as a skip target, its

“USE (FROM)” setting is automatically set to “NO.” In
this case, the repeater cannot be selected in “FROM”
(Access repeater).

DDIndividual skip setting

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group that in-
cludes the repeater you want to set the skip setting
on, and then push D-pad(Ent). Select the repeat-
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater to be skipped er group.
during the DR mode scan.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “SKIP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “SKIP” appears on the selected repeater.
Select the repeat-
• Push [QUICK] and select “SKIP” again, then push
er to set the skip
D-pad(Ent) to cancel the skip setting.
setting
• When “SKIP All ON” is selected, push D-pad(Ent) to set
all repeaters in the group as skip targets.

While in the DR mode, and

if you select “Repeater List”
on the FROM SELECT
screen, you can set the skip
settings in the same way as
described above.

Appears

9-36
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Skip setting for the DR mode scan (Continued)

DDGroup skip setting

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group to be
skipped during the DR mode scan. Select the repeat-
ttPush [QUICK] . er group to set the
yyPush D-pad() to select “SKIP All ON,” and then skip setting
push D-pad(Ent).
• “SKIP” appears on the selected repeater group.
• Push [QUICK] again and select “SKIP All OFF,” then
push D-pad(Ent) to cancel the skip setting.

While in the DR mode, and

if you select “Repeater List”
on the FROM SELECT
screen, you can set the skip
settings in the same way as
described above.

Appears

9-37
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Repeater group name programming

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Repeater List,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group you want
to program the name.
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Edit Name,” and then push
D-pad(Ent) to enter the group name edit mode.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low-
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters, Group name
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor. edit mode
• See page 2-7 for programming details.
iiPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
ooRepeat steps u and i to enter a name of up to 16
characters, including spaces.
!0 After entering, push D-pad(Ent) two times.
Shows the currently se-
lected character type

Character type
selection screen

Example:
“China” is programmed.

9-38
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Repeater detail screen

According to the programmed contents, such as posi- Example: Shows the “Hirano” repeater detail screen
tion data, UTC offset, and so on, the distance between
your position and the repeater or repeater time can be
displayed on the REPEATER DETAIL screen.

qqHold down for 1 second.

• The DR mode is selected.
wwPush D-pad() to select “TO,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Gateway CQ,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeater group, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “11: Japan”
ttPush D-pad() to select the repeater, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “Hirano”
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Detail,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The REPEATER DETAIL screen is displayed.
iiPush D-pad(Ent) to return to the RPT LIST screen.

While in the DR mode, and if you set the repeater as

shown to the right, the repeater details screen can be
displayed.
qqPush [QUICK] to open the quick menu
Repeater
screen.
name Call sign
wwPush D-pad() to select “Repeater Detail,” and
then push D-pad(Ent). Sub name Repeater
• The REPEATER DETAIL screen is displayed. Group frequency
number Duplex setting
Distance from
your position
Repeater time
Direction from your position*

* When the position data accuracy level is set to “Approxi-

Repeater is set in “FROM” “Repeater Detail” is selected mate,” direction data is not displayed if the distance to the
repeater is under 5 kilometers.
9-39
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Your (destination) call sign programming

A Your (destination) call sign can be manually pro- Example: Program “TOM/JM1ZLK” to the Your Call
grammed. Sign memory.
The Your (destination) call sign is set to “TO,” you can
make a call to a station, even if you don’t know where
the station is currently located.

Up to 200 Your call signs can be programmed.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Your Call Sign,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush [QUICK] .
ttPush D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter the edit mode.
yyPush D-pad() to select “NAME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character.
(For example: T) Select
• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low- (Select when you edit
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols. the programmed Your
• The selected character blinks. call sign.)
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
• See page 2-7 for programming details.
iiPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
ooRepeat steps u and i to enter a name of up to 16
characters, including spaces.
(For example: First, T, then O, then M.)
!0 After entering, push D-pad(Ent) two times.

“TOM” is entered.

☞ Continued on the next page

9-40
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■ Your (destination) call sign programming (Continued)

!1 Push D-pad() to select “CALL SIGN,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
!2 Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
(For example: J)
• A to Z, 0 to 9, / and a space can be selected.
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.
• Push [CLR] to erase the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously erase the characters af-
ter the cursor.
!3 Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
!4 Repeat steps !2 and !3 to enter a call sign of up to 8
characters, including spaces.
(For example: F irst, J, then M, then 1, then Z, then
L, then K.)
!5 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).
!6 Push D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
!7 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent). “JM1ZLK” is entered.
!8 Push [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

[DIAL]

Select
When you select
“Edit” in step t on
the previous page
“ < < O ve r w r i t e > > ”
appears here. If
you select “<<Over-
write>>,” the pro-
grammed call sign
overwrites the origi-
nal call sign.

To cancel the programmed data:

To cancel the programmed “TOM/JM1ZLK”
data, push [CLR] to is programmed
display “Cancel edit?.” Push into the Your Call
D-pad() to select “YES,” Sign memory.
and then push D-pad(Ent)
to cancel programming
and the display returns the
YOUR CALL SIGN screen.
When “TOM” is selected,
“JM1ZLK” is displayed here.
9-41
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Deleting Your (destination) call sign

The Your (destination) call signs can be deleted from
the Your Call Sign memory.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Your Call Sign,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the Your call sign you want
to delete.
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
uuPush
 D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- Select the call sign
pad(Ent). you want to delete.
• The selected call sign is deleted from the memory, and
the display returns the YOUR CALL SIGN screen.

Example:
“TOM” is deleted.

9-42
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Rearrange the display order of Your (destination) call sign

You can move Your call signs to rearrange their display
order.
It is easy to find stations that you often communicate if
the stations are moved to the top of the memory.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DV Memo-
ry”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Your Call Sign,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the call sign you want to
Select a Your
move.
call sign you
ttPush [QUICK] . want to move.
yyPush D-pad() to select “Move,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “DESTINATION” blinks on the upper left of the LCD.
uuPush
 D-pad() to select the location to insert the
call sign you want to move, which will be above the
memory name selected in this screen, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The selected call sign is inserted to above the destina-
tion.
• When “<<Move End>>” is selected, the selected call sign
is moved to the bottom of the YOUR CALL SIGN screen.

Blinks

Blinks

Select the
destination

“ICOM AMC”
is moved to
the bottom.

9-43
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■About the repeater list default values

You can check the repeater list default values using the
supplied CS-51 cloning software.

The ICF (Icom Cloning Format) file, including the de-

fault repeater list, can also be downloaded from the
Icom website.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/firm/
index.html

If you open the downloaded ICF file with the CS-51,

the repeater list default values are displayed on the
screen.
To reset the programmed repeater list to the default,
write the ICF file to the transceiver using the CS-51*1,
or copy the ICF file to the microSD card*2, and then
write to the transceiver.

*1 See the CS-51 instruction manual when using the

CS-51.
*2 See page 2-9 when using the microSD card.

DDOpening the default repeater list

qqStart the CS-51. Double-
• See the CS-51 instruction manual for how to install the click
software.
wwClick [Open] to open the ICF file.
eeClick the [Repeater list] folder to show the default
repeater list.

Select

Click
You can see the
default values of
the repeater list
on the CS-51.

When the ICF file is opened on the CS-51.

9-44
 Previous view

9 D-STAR OPERATION <ADVANCED>

■■Your setting is correct?

If you make a Local Area call with the Gateway call set-
ting, the destination repeater, selected in “TO,” will be
busy while you transmit.
So the station that uses that repeater as their Access
repeater cannot access it, as shown below.
BE SURE to set CQCQCQ in “TO” when you intend to
make a local call, or after you finish a Gateway call.

Example: JM1ZLK wants to make a Local Area call.

Hamacho repeater Hirano repeater correct! ater!

ing is in e
His sett ccess the rep
a n n o t a
Ic
ning
ning liste r t A
LK
liste r t A 1 Z p o
L K o JM P1YIU all...
Z p on J local
c
JM1 P1YIU all... a
J c tenin
g for
on local LK lis
JM1Z YIU por t
A
a
for on J P 1
loc a l c a ll .
..
for a
Caller Called
(JM1ZLK)
Hirano area

Hamacho area

NOTE: With this setting, the

JM1ZLK’s setting
Local Area call can be made,
but the destination repeater,
selected in “TO,” is also busy
while you transmit.
So the station that uses that
repeater as their Access re-
peater cannot access it.

The destination (“TO”) setting is incorrect.

Correct setting

To make a Local Area call, set the destina-

tion (“TO”) to “CQCQCQ.”
See page 8-9 for details.

9-45
Previous view

Section 10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS operation.................................................... 10-2
DD Receiving GPS data....................................... 10-2
■■ Checking GPS Position...................................... 10-3
DD Displaying Position Data. ............................... 10-3
DD Changing the Grid Locator............................. 10-4
DD Changing the Compass Direction.................. 10-4
DD Saving your own or received position data. ... 10-5
■■ Checking GPS Information (Sky view screen). .. 10-6
■■ Adding or editing GPS memory. ........................ 10-7
DD GPS Memory . ............................................... 10-7
DD Add a GPS memory....................................... 10-7
DD GPS group name programming................... 10-11
DD Deleting GPS data....................................... 10-12
DD Rearrange the display order of the
GPS memory................................................ 10-13
DD GPS alarm setting........................................ 10-14
■■ Transmitting GPS data..................................... 10-16
DD GPS data sentence setting.......................... 10-16
DD GPS message programming........................ 10-17
■■ Transmitting GPS-A data.................................. 10-18
DD D-PRS.......................................................... 10-18
DD Operating GPS-A......................................... 10-18
DD Setting GPS-A.............................................. 10-19
DD Displaying your position using a mapping
software........................................................ 10-23
■■ GPS Auto transmission for only Simplex.......... 10-24
DD Setting the GPS automatic transmission. .... 10-24
■■ GPS Logger function........................................ 10-25
DD GPS Logger operating outline...................... 10-25
DD GPS Logger operation................................. 10-25
DD Turning ON the GPS Logger function. ......... 10-26
DD Setting the GPS record interval. .................. 10-26
DD Viewing the route on a PC Map. .................. 10-27
DD Using <<GPS Logger Only>> mode............ 10-29

10-1
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■GPS operation
The ID-51A/E has a built-in internal GPS receiver. The To receive signals from an external GPS source, connect
GPS receiver’s position information can be received an external NMEA format compatible receiver to the ID-
in any mode. Also, a NMEA format compatible exter- 51A/E according to the instructions, shown below. The
nal GPS receiver can be connected to the ID-51A/E cable is not an Icom product and must be made sepa-
through the [DATA] port. rately. Refer to the wiring diagram for pin connections.
• Position data can be transmitted in only the DV mode.

DDReceiving GPS data

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > GPS > GPS Set> GPS Select)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above and
push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent) to enter,
one or more times until the last screen is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Internal GPS.”
• If an external GPS receiver is connected, select “External
GPS.”
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
• The GPS icon blinks when receiving data, as illustrated
below, and stops blinking when valid data is received.
  
- If “Manual” was selected, the icon does not appear. GPS SELECT
• It may take only a few seconds to receive, but depending on screen
the environment, it may take a few minutes. If you have difficul-
ties receiving, we recommend that you try a different location.

NOTE: While continuously using the Internal GPS mode,

the transceiver’s battery will quickly be exhausted. Blinks
Longer battery time can be achieved by turning ON the
Power Save mode. See page 16-32 for details.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Power Save (Internal GPS))

To prolong the battery life in the GPS mode

To prolong the battery life while operating in the GPS
mode, manually update your position with the re-
ceived GPS data.

qqSet the “GPS Select” option to “Internal GPS,” and re- • Connection
ceive your position from the internal GPS receiver.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set> GPS Select)
wwOpen the MANUAL POSITION screen, and then To the
RS-232C Port GPS
push [QUICK] . Receiver
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set> Manual Position) To the [DATA] Cable
eeD-pad() to select “Capture From GPS,” and then jack
push D-pad(Ent). RS-232C (DB-9 female)
To the [DATA] jack w
 • Your current position is now memorized and displayed
on the MANUAL POSITION screen. TxD GND t e q
rrAfter that, set the “GPS Select” option to “Manual.”
RxD
o y
ø 2.5 mm Less than ø 6.0 mm

Connect w with RxD, e with TxD and t with GND.

10-2
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■Checking GPS Position

You can check your current position.
The GPS position screen is cancelled when [PTT] is
pushed. After releasing, the screen automatically appears.
During transmission, the GPS position screen can be se-
lected by pushing [QUICK] .
MY Position
DDDisplaying Position Data
qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen. Compass
direction Top Latitude
wwPush D-pad() to select “GPS Position,” and then is North
push D-pad(Ent). Longitude
Your course
The first MY GPS position screen appears. (1/5) heading is Grid Locator
north-east
D-pad Altitude
(Ent) Your course
heading is
(�)
170 degrees
eePush D-pad() to view other position screens.
• MY Position : Latitude, Longitude, Grid Locator, Altitude, RX Position 1
Speed*, Time and Course* are displayed.
A compass heading is also displayed.
• RX Position 1 : The RX station’s position in Latitude, The direction of
Longitude, Grid Locator, Altitude are dis- the RX station
played. Also, the Distance and Direction from you.
The station is
from you are displayed. east-northeast
• RX Position 2 : The SSID, Course, Speed and Time stamp of you.
of the RX station is displayed. The distance
from you to
Depending on the activity of the RX sta- the station
tion, some data may not be displayed. RX Position 2
• MEM Position: T  he position of the GPS memory location Shows the SSID
if the RX station
in Latitude, Longitude and Grid Locator are
has entered. Shows the
displayed. Also, the Distance and Direction
The course GPS-A
from you to the location is displayed.
heading of the symbol
• ALM Position: The position of the GPS memory location RX station is
for the GPS alarm function in Latitude, 41 degrees
Shows the
Longitude and Grid Locator are displayed. from north.
time the
Also, the Distance and Direction from you
RX station
to the location is displayed. MEM Position acquires the
*Data entered manually in the “Manual Position” Edit position.
option is not displayed. (p. 16-32) The direction
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select) from you to
the memory
rrPush [CLR] to cancel the GPS POSITION location.
screen and return to the operating screen. The location is The
east-northeast distance
• Example of the GPS data screens to the right of you. from you to
the memory
GPS alarm: location
GPS memory:
Tokyo Skytree
Tokyo Big Sight
ALM Position *
249 ml 251 ml

RX station The direction

from you to the
Your Course is 41 degrees alarm location.
The
station Speed is 0.4 mph. The location is
distance
east-northeast
Course is 170 degrees Speed is 0.4 mph. from you to
of you.
the alarm
location
NOTE: The latitude, longitude and altitude may differ, *
depending on your GPS selection of either the inter-
nal or an external GPS receiver. Also, the time may *When a name is not assigned to the memory channel,
not be displayed, depending on the external GPS. Day and Time are displayed instead of the name.
10-3
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position (Continued)

DDChanging the Grid Locator
Grid Locator (GL) is a location compressed into a 6
character code, calculated by the longitude and the lati- • The grid locator map of Japan
tude.
140°
The locator is simply calculated by dividing the earth

PN
surface into squares.

QN
It is used to find the location of a radio station.

40°
Field

PM74SO
PM
QM
Square

Subsquare

DDChanging the Compass Direction

You can change the compass direction between Head-
ing Up, North Up and South Up.

qqWhile the MY, RX1, MEM or ALM screen is dis-

played, push [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “Compass Direction,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select the compass direction, and

then push D-pad(Ent).
• Heading Up : The compass always pointed to your
heading course direction.
• North Up : The top is always north.
• South Up : The top is always south.
Heading Up North Up South Up

Changing the GPS memory/alarm channel MEM screen ALM screen

While displaying the GPS position screen, GPS mem-
ory or GPS alarm location can be changed.

qqWhile the MEM or ALM screen is displayed, push

[QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “GPS Memory Select” or
“Alarm Select,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The GPS Memory or Alarm Select screen appears.
eePush D-pad() to select the desired Memory or
Alarm location.

10-4
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ Checking GPS Position (Continued)

DDSaving your own or received position data
With this function, you can save the position informa-
tion of your station from wherever you are, and also the
position information of the station you received it from.

The GPS Memory is capable of storing 200 channels

in total, assignable to one of 27 groups, A to Z and
“(No Group)”.

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “GPS Position,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
MY Position
(�)
Select the MY posi-
eePush D-pad() to select the position screen that you tion screen to save
want to save the contents. your position.
• To save your position, select the MY position screen.
• To save the RX station’s position, select the R1 position
screen.
rrPush [QUICK] .
ttPush D-pad() to select “Add To GPS Memory,” and
push D-pad(Ent).
• The GPS MEMORY EDIT screen is displayed.
• The position information (Latitude/Longitude) is automat-
ically added.
• See pages 10-7 to 10-10 for details on editing position
data.
yyPush D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Add Write?” appears.
uuPush D-pad(#) to select “Yes,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The added GPS Memory Channel is saved as [00], and
the previously saved channel numbers are moved up. GPS MEMORY EDIT
• The channel is added to GPS Memory and returns to the screen is displayed,
GPS POSITION screen. and Latitude/Longitude
iiPush [CLR] to exit the GPS POSITION screen. is added.

Select the destination

group to be saved.

MY Position

Your position is saved

into “(No Group)” in
the GPS Memory.

10-5
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■Checking GPS Information (Sky view screen)

This screen is used to receive GPS satellite when the
GPS indicator does not stop blinking for a long time.
GPS Information displays the quantity, signal power
and position of the GPS satellites.
Sky view screen shows the position of GPS satellites.
The screen also shows the direction, elevation angle,
satellite numbers and their receiving signal strength
status.

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “GPS Information,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

Meaning of the indications

• () : Untracking satellite.
• (01) : Tracking satellite with a weak signal shown
in satellite number.
• (01) : Tracking satellite with a strong signal
shown in satellite number.
• (SAT) : The quantity of tracking satellites.
• Altitude : The altitude of your station.
Tracking satellite
The altitude is only displayed when more
quantity
than 4 satellites are tracked. When less
than 3 satellites are tracked, [------ft] is Sky view
displayed. screen
• Longitude/Latitude Altitude
: Longitude and Latitude of your station.
Latitude
eePush [QUICK] to exit the GPS INFO screen.
Longitude

North

• The image of the satellite number 23

Elevation angle 90 degree
line (Zenith)
Elevation angle Satellite number Untracking
60 degree line 13’s signal is satellite
Elevation angle weak.
30 degree line
Satellite number
Elevation angle 19’s signal is
Satellite 0 degree line
number strong.
23
Elevation angle 90 Elevation angle
degree line (Zenith) 0 degree line
Elevation angle Elevation angle
60 degree line 30 degree line

10-6
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■Adding
 or editing GPS memory
DDGPS Memory
You can add GPS data to GPS Memory. GPS Memory
You can add the your own position, other station’s posi-
tion or any positions that are manually programmed. (No Group)
Also, an alarm can be set to GPS Memory to sound,
depending on the distance from your station. A: Icom Office ICOM Head Office

The GPS Memory is capable of storing a total of 200 B: Station Tokyo

channels in a “ALL” folder, or conveniently stored in up
to 27 groups, from A to Z and “(No Group)”. The groups C: Airport Osaka
can also be named. (p. 16-36)

DDAdd a GPS memory Z: (Sample)

1. Adding GPS Memory and entering the edit mode
q Push [MENU] .
w Push D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

e Push D-pad() to select “GPS Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
r Push D-pad() to select “(No Group),” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• All the previously added GPS memories are displayed.
t Push [QUICK] .
y Push D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The GPS MEMORY EDIT screen is displayed.

GPS
MEMORY
screen is
displayed.

Select “Add”
*

*When you want to edit the programmed memory

contents, select “Edit.”

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-7
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

2. GPS Memory name programming

u Push D-pad() to select “NAME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

i Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.

• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low-
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
• See page 2-7 for programming details.
o Push D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
!0 Repeat steps i and o to enter a GPS Memory
name of up to 16 characters, including spaces. Character
!1 After entering the name, push D-pad(Ent). type selection
screen

(Example)
When entering
“HOME”

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-8
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

3. GPS Memory date programming

!2 Push D-pad() to select “DATE,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The date edit screen is displayed.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!3 Rotate [DIAL] to edit the date.

• The dates between 2000/01/02 to 2099/12/30 are pro-
grammable.
!4 Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or for-
ward to select and edit the year, month or day.
!5 Repeat steps !3 and !4 to enter a GPS Memory
date.
!6 After entering the date, push D-pad(Ent).

4. GPS Memory time programming

!7 Push D-pad() to select “TIME,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The time edit screen is displayed.
!8 Rotate [DIAL] to edit the time.
• The time between 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 are program-
mable.
!9 Push D-pad(D) to move the cursor backward or for-
ward to select and edit the hour, minute or second.
@0 Repeat steps !8 and !9 to enter GPS Memory time.
@1 After entering the time, push D-pad(Ent).

5. GPS Memory latitude programming

@2 Push D-pad() to select “LATITUDE,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The latitude edit screen is displayed.
@3 Rotate [DIAL] to edit the latitude.
• The latitude between 0°00.00' to 90°00.00' are program-
mable.
If "ddd°mm'ss"" is selected in the POSITION FORMAT
screen, between 0°00'00" to 90°00'00" are programma-
ble.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Position Format)
@4 Push D-pad(D) to move the cursor to backward or
forward to select and edit degrees or decimal min-
utes.
@5 Repeat steps @3 and @4 to enter a GPS Memory lati-
tude.
• Select “N” to program the north latitude, and “S”
when program the South latitude.
@6 After entering the latitude, push D-pad(Ent).
☞☞Continued on the next page
10-9
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

6. GPS Memory longitude programming

@7 Push D-pad() to select “LONGITUDE,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The longitude edit screen is displayed.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

@8 Rotate [DIAL] to edit the longitude.

• The longitude between 0°00.00' to 180°00.00' are pro-
grammable.
If "ddd°mm'ss"" is selected in the POSITION FORMAT
screen, between 0°00'00" to 90°00'00" are programmable.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Position Format)
@9 Push D-pad(D) to move the cursor to backward or for-
ward to select and edit degrees or decimal minutes.
#0 Repeat steps @8 and @9 to enter a GPS Memory lon-
gitude.
• Select “E” to program the east longitude, and “W” when
program the west longitude.
#1 After entering the longitude, push D-pad(Ent).
5
7. GPS Memory Group programming
#2 Push D-pad() to select “GROUP,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The group edit screen is displayed.
#3 Push D-pad() to select a group between A to Z, or
select “OFF,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Each group is capable of storing up to 200 GPS memo-
ries.
#4 After selecting the memory group, push D-pad(Ent).

8. Writing GPS Memory

#5 Push D-pad() to select “<<Add Write>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent). Select
• If a previously added GPS memory is edited, select
“<<Overwrite>>.”
#6 Push D-pad(#) to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).

To cancel the programmed data:

qqTo cancel the programmed
data, push [CLR] to
display “Cancel edit?.”
wwPush D-pad() to select
“YES,” and then push D-
(Example)
pad(Ent) to cancel pro-
When “HOME”
gramming and return to is saved in
the GPS Memory’s chan- “(NO GROUP)”.
nel list screen.

10-10
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

DD GPS group name programming
You can program the name of each GPS group.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Memory,” and then GPS MEMORY

screen
push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired group to edit
its name.
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Edit Name,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
uuThe group name editing screen appears.
iiRotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low-
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks. Select
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window. Group name
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected. editing screen
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
• See page 2-7 for programming details. Character
ooPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second type selection
digit. screen
!0 Repeat steps i and o to enter a group name of up
to 16 characters, including a space.
!1 After entering the name, push D-pad(Ent).

(Example)
When group name
is programmed as
“My Favorite.”

10-11
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

Example: D
 eleting all memories in “(No Group).”
DDDeleting GPS data
All the contents of a GPS memory group can be de-
leted.
Please note that deleted GPS memories cannot be re-
stored.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the memory group that has
the memories you want to delete.
Example: (No Group)
ttPush [QUICK] .
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete All In Group,” and
then D-pad(Ent).
uuPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
5
pad(Ent).
• All memories in the group are deleted.

All memories in “(No

Group)” are deleted,
and “-- Blank --” is
displayed if you enter
the (NO GROUP)
screen.

To delete a specific GPS memory channel:

GPS memories can be deleted.
qqSelect a specific memory, as illustrated to the right,
and then push [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The contents in the selected group are deleted.

Select a memory to be erased. Select “Delete.”

10-12
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

DDRearrange the display order of the GPS memory
You can move programmed GPS memories to rear-
range their display order in the selected GPS memory
group.
The programmed GPS memory cannot be moved out
of their assigned memory group.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select the GPS memory group
that has the GPS memory you want to move, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select the GPS memory to be Select the memory
moved. to be moved.
yyPush [QUICK] .
uuPush D-pad() to select “Move,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “DESTINATION” blinks on the upper left of the LCD.
iiPush
 D-pad() to select the location to insert the
memory you want to move, which will be above the
memory name selected in this screen, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The selected memory contents are inserted to above the
destination memory name.
• When “<<Move End>>” is selected, the selected memory
contents are moved to the bottom of the GPS memory
group.

Blinks

Select the
destination

“Tokyo Big Sight”

is moved to the
bottom.

10-13
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation (Continued)

DDGPS alarm setting
A GPS alarm can sound when a target position comes
into the alarm area.
This function can be set to the caller station, all GPS
Memory channels, a specified Memory group or a
specified Memory channel.

• Alarm area (Group) — Setting plural stations • Alarm area (RX/Memory)— Setting specific stations
When all channels or group is selected: When a specified memory is selected:

Point A N
0.25’ 0.25’ Extended range
(approx. 1 km; 1094 Y)
0.25’

Your Your
position position
0.25’

Point B Limited range

(approx. 500m; 547Y)
Point C (Beeps three times)
Beeps one times Beeps three times

qqPush [MENU] .
Example: Alarm Area (Group)
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
Alarm Setting is set to all GPS Memories.
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Alarm,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Alarm Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “Group,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
yyPush D-pad() to select “All Memories,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• If you wish to set the alarm to a GPS Memory group,
select one between A to Z or “(No Group).”
uuPush
 [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
• When either one of the stations in a specified group en-
ters its set range, the beep sounds three times.
• When the GPS alarm beeps, “GPS ALARM” pops up on
the screen and then the S icon blinks.
• To cancel the GPS alarm, repeat step t and select
“OFF.”

NOTE: When “Group” is selected in step t, and a

target position enters in the active alarm range spec-
ified in “Alarm area (Group)” of the Menu screen, the
GPS alarm sounds. (p. 16-37)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Alarm Area (Group))
• GPS Alarm beeping screen
Blinks

“All Memories”
The pop up is is displayed.
displayed and
beeps 3 times.
10-14
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS memory operation

DD GPS alarm setting (Continued)

qqPush [MENU] . Example: Alarm Area (RX/Memory)

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and Alarm Setting is set to RX.
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Alarm,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Alarm Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “RX,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• If you want to set the alarm to a specified GPS memory
channel, select “Memory,” then push D-pad(Ent). And
then, select the channel in the GPS memory group.
yyPush
 [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
• When a set station is in the approximate 1 kilometer
range, GPS Alarm beeps once, and when it is in the ap-
proximate 500 meter range, beeps three times.
(Default: Both)
• When the GPS alarm beeps, “GPS ALARM” pops up on
the screen and then the S icon blinks.
• To cancel the GPS alarm, repeat step t and select
“OFF.”

NOTE: When “RX” or a GPS memory channel is se-

lected in step t, the GPS alarm sounds depend on
the “Alarm Area (RX/Memory)” setting in the Menu
screen. (p. 16-38)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Alarm Area (RX/Memory)) “RX” is
displayed.
NOTE: Even if “RX” is selected in step t, and the
received signal has no position, the GPS alarm does
not sound.

• GPS Alarm beeping screen

Blinks

The pop up is displayed

and beeps sound, de-
pending on the setting
of the alarm area.

10-15
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■Transmitting GPS data

Set a GPS sentence to transmit GPS data in DV mode.
DDGPS data sentence setting
qqPush [MENU] and select “GPS.”
wwPush D-pad() and D-pad(Ent) to select “GPS TX
Mode.”
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS(DV-G),” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “GPS Sentence” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The GPS Sentence screen is displayed.
ttPush D-pad() to select the desired GPS sentence,
and then push D-pad(Ent) to turn it ON or OFF.
• The selectable GPS sentences are RMC, GGA, GLL,
VTG, GSA and GSV. The GGA sentence is only set to
ON as default GPS sentence.
• Push [QUICK] , then push D-pad(Ent) to set the sen-
tence as the default.
yyRepeat step t to set other GPS sentences.
• A maximum of 4 GPS sentences can be set at a time.
uuPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

NOTE:
• Set the GSV sentence to OFF when sending the
GPS message to conventional digital transceivers
(IC-2820H, IC-E2820, ID-800H, IC-91AD, IC-E91,
IC-V82, IC-U82, IC-2200H, ID-1).
The GSV sentence is incompatible with them.
Those transceivers will not display GPS messages
properly if a GSV sentence is sent from the ID-
• The display while transmitting GPS (DV-G)
51A/E.
• If “GPS select” is set to “Manual,” the GPS sentence “DV-G” appears if “GPS (DV-
G)” is selected in DV Mode.
is artificially selected and transmitted, according
to the manually set position in “Manual Position.”
(p. 16-32)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Manual Position)
• If “GPS Auto TX” is set to any other setting than
“OFF,” the current position data is transmitted at the
specified interval. (p. 10-24)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Auto TX) When transmitted, the set GPS
sentence is transmitted.
• Contents of GPS sentence
GPS Time
Lat/ Date 2D COG SOG
Sentence Alt Stamp Status Others
Lon (UTC) /3D (True) (knot)
(UTC)
RMC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Mode Indicator
Number of satellites in use, HDOP, Geoidal separation,
GGA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Age of Differential GPS data
GLL ✔ ✔ ✔ Mode Indicator
VTG ✔ ✔ COG (Magnetic north), SOG (km/h), Mode Indicator
GSA ✔ ✔ ID numbers of satellites used in solution, PDOP, HDOP, VDOP
Total number of sentences, Sentence number, Total number of
GSV
satellites in view, Satellite information (ID, Altitude, Azimuth, S/N)

10-16
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ Transmitting GPS data (Continued)

Example: Adding “OSAKA suzuki”
DDGPS message programming
Enter a GPS message of up to 20 characters to be
transmitted with the position data.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > GPS > GPS TX Mode >

GPS(DV-G) SET > GPS Message)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above,
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush [QUICK] .
ttPush
 D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
yyThe message editing screen appears.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
(Example: O)
• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low-
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window. GPS MESSAGE
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected. screen
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
• See page 2-7 for programming details.
iiPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second
digit.
ooRepeat steps u and i to enter a group name of up
to 20 characters, including spaces.
!0 After entering, push D-pad(Ent).
!1Push [MENU] to exit the Menu screen. Insert a space
after entering
“OSAKA.”

Input mode
selection
window

10-17
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■Transmitting GPS-A data

GPS-A mode is an operating mode supported with the
D-PRS to transmit position data.
In GPS-A operation, the following codes are transmit-
ted to the PC connected to the ID-51A/E.
GPS-A code is based on APRS® code.
(APRS®: Automatic Position Reporting System).

About GPS-A data

GPS-A data is formatted as shown below.
(e.g.) JA3YUA>API51,DSTAR�/002338h3437.38N/13534.29E>000/000/A=000000Who are you?
q w e r y u i
t t
q Your own call sign e Time stamp* t GPS-A symbol (Car) u Data extension
w Unproto address r Latitude y Longitude i GPS-A comment/Altitude
*h: “hhmmss”, z: “ddhhmm
• The UTC time is used.
• The data from the internal or external GPS is used.

DDD-PRS
D-PRS is a function which simultaneously sends posi- • The image of D-PRS
tion data received from the internal or external GPS re-
ceiver, using the slow speed data packet space, along
with voice in the DV mode. It can be checked
In the analog format you can transmit or receive only at a map site.
voice or data at one time. However a D-PRS capable I-GATE
radio can transmit or receive message data or GPS po- PC
sition data at the same time voice is been transmitted
or received.

Internet APRS
server

DDOperating GPS-A
To transmit in GPS-A, follow the steps written below, NOTE:
and for more details, see the pages listed along with • If “Manual” is selected in the GPS select screen, the
the steps. processed GPS-A code is transmitted, according to the
manually set position data in “Manual Position.”
(p. 16-32)
1. “MY”(Your own call sign) programming
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Manual Position)
(p. 16-54) • Please note that if “GPS Auto TX” is set as any oth-
2. Receiving GPS data (p. 10-2) er setting than “OFF,” the data is transmitted each
3. Set GPS TX Mode to GPS-A (p. 10-16) and every setting time. (p. 16-47)
4. Transmitting GPS-A data setting (MENU > GPS > GPS Auto TX)
(pp. 10-19 to 10-22)

Setting is completed.
(Transmission is enabled in GPS-A)

10-18
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ Transmitting GPS-A data (Continued)

DDSetting GPS-A
Set to transmit in the GPS-A mode.

1. Setting GPS-A in the GPS TX Mode

q Push [MENU] .
w Push D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS-A(DV-A))

e Refer to the menu sequence shown directly above,
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.

2. Unproto Address display

The default address should be used, and editing is not
recommended.
r Push D-pad() to select “Unproto Address,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The default setting is “API51,DSTAR*.”
t Push D-pad(Ent) to return to the previous screen.

3. Setting Data Extension

Set the data extension of your station's course direction
and speed.
y Push D-pad() to select “Data Extension,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
u Push D-pad() to select “Course/Speed,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-19
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ Transmitting GPS-A data (Continued)

4. Setting Time Stamp
Set the time stamp function to transmit the received
time in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.

i Push D-pad() to select “Time Stamp,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

o Push D-pad() to select either the DHM or HMS for-

mat, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• OFF : Does not transmit the time.
• DHM : Transmits the time stamp in the Day, Hour,
and Minute format.
• HMS : Transmits the time stamp in the Hour, Min-
ute, and Second format.

5. Setting Altitude
Set the altitude transmission.

!0 Push D-pad() to select “Altitude,” and then push

D-pad(Ent)
!1 Push D-pad() to select “ON,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).

NOTE:
If you transmit with the altitude setting ON, to those
products that are not capable of displaying the al-
titude (IC-9100, IC-80AD, IC-E80D, ID-880H, ID-
E880, IC-92AD, IC-E92D), the characters appear as
a comment.

6. Setting GPS-A Symbol

Select the desired GPS-A symbol which represents
your operating situation.
The selected GPS-A symbol channel's symbols (1~4)
are transmitted along with the position data.

!2 Push D-pad() to select “GPS-A Symbol,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
!3 Push D-pad() to select a symbol between 1: Per-
son, 2: Bicycle, 3: Car and 4: House, and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• If you wish to use any GPS-A symbol (characters) or pre-
viously saved symbol, see page 16-44 for details.

Push [QUICK] to display

the "Edit Symbol" screen.

☞☞Continued on the next page

10-20
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ Transmitting GPS-A data (Continued)

7. Setting SSID
To assist in identifying a station’s type, the displayed
APRS® based SSID is added after the GPS-A data call
sign.
The SSID's adding method differs, depending on
whether if you enter a space in your call signs or not.

!4 Push D-pad() to select “SSID,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!5 Push D-pad() to select SSID, and then push D-

pad(Ent).
• --- : Change the space in call sign to "-".
If the space is the last character, delete
the space instead of changing it to a "-".
Example: JA3YUA A  JA3YUA-A
• (-0) : No SSID. If you use a capital letter, it will
be deleted.
Example: JA3YUA A  JA3YUA
• -1 to -15 : Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to your call
sign.
Example: “-9” is entered
JA3YUA A  JA3YUA-9
• -A to -Z : Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call
sign.
Example: “-Z” is entered
JA3YUA A  JA3YUA-Z
!6 After setting SSID, push D-pad(Ent).
☞☞Continued on the next page

About SSID
To assist in identifying a station’s type, designated call
sign SSIDs are used in D-PRS (APRS®), according to
the common guideline.
The guideline may be changed when the infrastruc-
ture environment, such as a product or network, is
changed.
Please check the latest guideline in the web site re-
lated on the D-PRS or APRS®, and correctly set.

10-21
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ Transmitting GPS-A data (Continued)

8. Comment programming
Program your comment and transmit it with the GPS-A
position data.
The number of characters you can enter differs, de-
pending on the settings of data extension (p. 10-19) and
altitude (p. 10-20).

Data Extension Altitude The number of characters

OFF OFF less than 43 (Default)
OFF ON less than 35
Course/Speed OFF less than 36
Course/Speed ON less than 28

!7 Push D-pad() and D-pad(Ent) to select “Com-

ment.”
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!8 Push [QUICK] .
!9 Push D-pad() to select “Edit,” then push D-pad(Ent),
and then the comment editing screen appears.
@0 Rotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low-
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.
• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.
• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
• See page 2-7 for programming details.
• A character after “ ” would not be transmitted.
@1 After entering the comment, push D-pad(Ent).
@2 Push [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

Ending icon (Up to 28 characters

can be input)

10-22
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ Transmitting GPS-A data (Continued)

DDDisplaying
 your position using a map-
ping software
If you transmit to an I-GATE station, then enter the call
sign information on the internet map website, the set
GPS-A symbol is displayed.

10-23
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■GPS Auto transmission for only Simplex

In the DV mode, this function automatically transmits
the GPS receiver’s current position data, at a selected
interval, and should only be used in Simplex transmis-
sion.

NOTE:
• Your own call sign must be entered to activate the
GPS automatic transmission.
• When the “GPS Select” item on page 16-32 is set to
“OFF” or “Manual,” this function is disabled.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)

DDSetting the GPS automatic transmission

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “GPS Auto TX,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired position data trans-
mit interval.
• Selectable settings are OFF, 5*, 10, 30 seconds and 1, 3,
5, 10 and 30 minutes.
* If four GPS sentences are selected in GPS SENTENCE
menu on page 16-41, “5sec” cannot be selected.
• Selecting “OFF” cancels the GPS automatic transmis-
sion.
• The GPS message is also transmitted, if programmed.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

NOTE:
• Use GPS automatic transmission in only the sim-
plex mode.
• GPS automatic transmission through a repeater
may interfere with other communications.
When a GPS message is programmed, the trans-
ceiver transmits it along with the position data. See
page 16-42 for the GPS message programming.

10-24
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■GPS Logger function

The GPS Logger function allows you to store the posi- NOTE:
tions from a GPS receiver, into a microSD card, as your • The GPS logger function requires inserting a mi-
route. croSD card.
The GPS Logger stores Latitude, Longitude, Altitude, • Once the GPS logger function is turned ON, the
Positioning state, Course, Speed and Date. transceiver continuously stores the position data
If you use this GPS Logger while driving, you can check from the GPS receiver, even if the transceiver is
your driving course on a mapping software. rebooted. To cancel this function, turn the function
OFF.
During this function is ON, and when the transceiv-
DDGPS Logger operating outline er is turned OFF, the log file will be closed. Then the
To use GPS Logger function, perform following opera-
transceiver is turned ON and Positioning is carried
tions.
out by the GPS receiver, a new log file will be cre-
ated.
1. Insert a microSD card.
• When a free space of the microSD card is lost, this
(microSD cards are not available from Icom. Pur-
function will be automatically paused.
chase a card to meet your needs.)
2. Turn ON the GPS receiver.
3. Turn ON the GPS Logger function. The transceiver has an exclusive GPS logger mode
 where only the logger is functioning.
The logger function starts. For example, when you are traveling and don’t want
to use the transceiver for communication, but you do
want to use just a GPS logger, this mode is useful.
See page 10-29 for details.
DDGPS Logger operation
qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above,
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Internal GPS.”
• If an external GPS receiver is connected, select “External
GPS.”
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
• The GPS icon blinks when receiving data, as illustrated
below, and stops blinking when valid data is received. If
“Manual” was selected, the icon does not appear.

  
• It may take longer or shorter time to receive, depending GPS SELECT
on the environment. If you find difficulties receiving, we screen
recommend that you change to a better location.

NOTE:
When the “GPS Select” item is set to “Internal GPS,”
the battery pack or batteries may become exhausted Blinks
soon, due to the internal GPS receiver working all
the time. To minimize this, use the “Power Save (In-
ternal GPS)” function in GPS Menu.
(MENU > GPS > GPS Set > Power Save (Internal GPS))

10-25
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS Logger function (Continued)

DDTurning ON the GPS Logger function
Turn the GPS logger function ON or OFF, to store your
route as you move.
When the GPS Logger function is set to ON, the trans-
ceiver stores the position data from GPS receiver into
microSD card in a specified time interval.
While using the Internal GPS receiver only four GPS
sentences, GGA, RMC, GSA and VTG, are used.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�) GPS LOGGER screen
(MENU > GPS > GPS Logger > GPS Logger) Select
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above,
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
*
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON.”
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
• The GPS Logger starts.

NOTE:
While using the external GPS receiver, uses only the
* The transceiver has an exclu-
compatible GGA, RMC, GSA and VTG sentences. sive GPS logger mode where
only the logger is functioning.
See page 10-29 for details.

DDSetting the GPS record interval

For example, when you are walking and if the time in-
terval is set to “1sec,” a lot of position data is stored
at almost same place. Select the GPS Logger function
record interval to suit your travel speed. (Default: 5sec)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“GPS”), and
then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > GPS > GPS Logger > Record Interval)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select a desired record interval.
• Selectable settings are 1, 5, 10, 30 or 60 seconds. Record Interval
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen. screen

10-26
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS Logger function (Continued)

DDViewing the route on a PC Map
If you want to display the your route, copy the log file
to your PC.

qqTurn OFF the transceiver, if it’s ON.

wwLift
 OFF the [micro SD] slot cover on the side panel.
eePush the microSD card in to release, then carefully
pull it out, to remove the card.

BE CAREFUL!:
• DO NOT touch the terminals.
• When removing the card during transceiver pow-
er ON, the Unmounting it first is necessary. See
page 2-4 for more details.

rrInsert the microSD card into the microSD card drive

on your PC. Slot cover Slot cover
• If no microSD card drive is built-in, connect a memory Pull the microSD
Push the microSD card
card reader (purchase locally) and then insert the mi- card out.
until a click sounds.
croSD card into it.
• The screen appears as shown to the right.
ttClick the “Open folder to view files” option to access
the card.
• The “ID-51” folder appears.
yyDouble click the folder. Click
• Eight folders appear.
uuDouble click the “Gps” folder.
• The log files appear.
• The files are named with the time the log was started, in
the following format:
y yyymmdd_hhmmss.log
yyyy = year, mm = month, dd = day, hh = hour,
mm = minute, ss = second
iiImport the selected file to a mapping software.
• You can see your route on the software map. Click
Those file may not be compatible with all mapping soft-
ware.

Click

The log
files are
saved here

10-27
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS Logger function (Continued)

For your information— About the recorded NMEA sentence for GPS logging
Regarding the GPS logging data of the ID-51A/E, each sentence corresponds to the NMEA standard and is
recorded in the following format.

D GGA sentence
(e.g.) $GPGGA,161229.487,3723.2475,N,12158.3416,W,1,07,1.0,9.0,M,25.5,M,3,0000*18<CR><LF>
q w e r y u i o !1 !2
t !0

q GGA protocol header ($GPGGA) u Horizontal Dilution of Precision (1.0) 0.0–50.0

w UTC of position (16:12:29.487) i Altitude re: mean-sea-level (geoid), meters
e Latitude (North 37º 23.2475′) N=North, S=South (9.0 meters)
r Longitude (West 121º 58.3416′) E=East, W=West o Geoidal separation, meters (25.5 meters)
t GPS quality indicator (1) !0 Age of Differential GPS data (3 seconds)
0=Fix not available or invalid, 1=SPS mode !1 Check Sum (*18) Error detection data
2=DGPS (SPS), 6=Estimated (Dead Reckoning) mode started with “*” (hex code)
y Number of satellites in use (7), 00–12 !2 End code
*Blank shows when not positioned.
D RMC sentence
(e.g.) $GPRMC,161229.487,A,3723.2475,N,12158.3416,W,0.13,309.62,011212, , ,D*10<CR><LF>
q w r t y u i !0 !1
e o
q RMC protocol header ($GPRMC) i UTC date of position (’12 Dec 1st) yymmdd
w UTC of position (16:12:29.487) o Mode Indicator (D)
e Status (A) A=Data valid A=Autonomous mode, D=DGPS,
V=Data invalid/not positioned E=Estimated (dead reckoning) mode,
r Latitude (North 37º 23.2475′) N=North, S=South N=Data not valid, R=Almanac data
t Longitude (West 121º 58.3416′) E=East, W=West !0 Check Sum (*10) Error detection data
y Speed over ground (0.13 knots) started with “*” (hex code)
u Course Over Ground (309.62º; degrees True) !1 End code
0.00º–359.99º *Blank shows when not positioned.

D GSA sentence
(e.g.) $GPGSA,A,3,07,02,26,27,09,04, , , , , ,15,1.8,1.0,1.5*33<CR><LF>
q r t y u i o
we
q GSA protocol header ($GPGSA) t Position Dilution of Precision (1.8) 0.0–50.0
w Mode indicator 1 (A) y Horizontal Dilution of Precision (1.0) 0.0–50.0
M=Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D mode u Vertical Dilution of Position (1.5) 0.0–50.0
A=Automatic, allowed to automatically switch 2D/3D i Check Sum (*33) Error detection data
e Mode indicator 2 (3) started with “*” (hex code)
1=Fix not available, o End code
2=2D (using satellites; less than 3), *Blank shows when not positioned.
3=3D (using satellites; more than 4)
r ID numbers of satellites used in solution (07, 02, 26, 27, 09, 04…15)
01–32 *Shows up to 12 ID’s

D VTG sentence
(e.g.) $GPVTG,309.62,T, ,M,0.13,N,0.2,K,A*03<CR><LF>
q w r t u i
e y
q VTG protocol header ($GPVTG) y Mode Indicator (A)
w Course Over Ground (309.62º; degrees True) A=Autonomous mode, D=DGPS,
0.00º–359.99º E=Estimated (dead reckoning) mode,
e Course over ground degrees; Magnetic north N=Data not valid, R=Almanac data
r Speed over ground, knots (0.13 knots) u Check Sum (*03) Error detection data
t Speed over ground, kilometer per hour (0.2 km/hr) started with “*” (hex code)
i End code
*Blank shows when not positioned.

10-28
 Previous view

10 GPS/GPS-A OPERATION

■■ GPS Logger function (Continued)

While GPS indicator While a microSD
DDUsing <<GPS Logger Only>> mode stays ON card is inserted
The transceiver has an exclusive GPS logger mode
where only the logger is functioning.
For example, when you are traveling and don’t want to
use the transceiver for communication, but you do want
to use just a GPS logger, this mode is useful.

NOTE:
In the “GPS Logger Only” mode, the GPS Logger
function is ON, but the transceiver function is dis-
abled, until you reboot the transceiver.

<<GPS Logger Only>> outline

1. Insert the microSD card. (p. 2-3)
(microSD cards are not available from Icom. Pur-
chase a card to meet your needs)
2. Turn ON the GPS receiver. (p. 10-2)
3. Turn ON the GPS Logger function. (p. 10-26)
4. Turn ON the <<GPS Logger Only>> mode.
Select

(The <<GPS Logger Only>> mode starts.)

qqPush [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<GPS Logger Only>>,”
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

• After the “Only GPS Logger is now functioning”

message appears, then the GPS position is dis-
played to start the GPS Logger Only mode.
Also you can select the <<GPS Logger Only>>
mode in the Menu screen. (p. 16-40)
(MENU > GPS > GPS Logger >
<<GPS Logger Only>>)
Latitude
Compass
direction is Longitude
Heading Up. Grid Locator
To cancel the <<GPS Logger Only>> mode, re-
boot the transceiver by turning it OFF and then Your course Altitude
heading is
ON again. 213 degrees Speed
• When the transceiver is tuned ON, the normal GPS
Logger restarts.
GPS LOGGER ONLY screen

If the GPS Logger item in the The GPS Information or

Menu screen is set to OFF, Compass Direction settings
the confirmation screen “ can be changed.
‘GPS Logger’ will be set to In the <<GPS Logger Only>>
ON. OK?” appears after op- mode, push [QUICK]
erating the step w. to open the Sub Menu as
shown to the right.
Push D-pad() to select Then push D-pad() to se-
“YES,” and push D-pad(Ent) to turn the GPS Logger lect a desired item, and then push D-pad(Ent) to en-
function ON. ter.
10-29
Previous view

Section 11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Recording a QSO audio..................................... 11-2
DD To start recording........................................... 11-2
DD To stop recording. .......................................... 11-3
■■ Playing back the recorded audio........................ 11-4
■■ Changing the recording mode............................ 11-5
■■ Operation while playing back. ............................ 11-6
DD Fast-forward while playing.............................. 11-6
DD Rewind while playing...................................... 11-6
DD Pause while playing. ...................................... 11-6
DD Playing the previously file............................... 11-6
DD Playing the next file........................................ 11-6
DD Pause at the beginning of the previously file
(Fast forward the file)...................................... 11-6
DD Pause
 at the beginning of the next file
(Rewind the file)............................................. 11-6
■■ Changing the skip time. ..................................... 11-7
■■ VOICE PLAYER screen’s description................. 11-8
■■ Deleting the recorded contents (audio).............. 11-9
■■ Deleting the folder............................................ 11-10
■■ Continue to record even if no signals are
received............................................................ 11-11
■■ Record the transmit and receive audio into
the same file..................................................... 11-12
■■ Start to record when the [PTT] switch is
pushed.............................................................. 11-13
■■ Viewing the file information.............................. 11-14
■■ Viewing the folder information.......................... 11-15
■■ Voice Recorder function................................... 11-16
DD To start recording......................................... 11-16
DD Playing back the recorded audio.................. 11-17
DD Erasing the recorded contents (audio)......... 11-18
DD MIC Gain setting.......................................... 11-19
DD Changing the skip time. ............................... 11-20
DD Viewing the file information.......................... 11-21
■■ Viewing the microSD card’s free space and
recordable time................................................. 11-22
■■ Playing back the voice memory data on a PC.. 11-23

11-1
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Recording a QSO audio

NOTE: BC Radio audio cannot be recorded.

You can record a QSO (communication) audio in the

MAIN band onto the microSD card.
The transceiver records both received and transmitted
audio.

If you want to record only received audio, see “Chang-

ing the recording mode” to change the recording
mode to “RX only.” (p. 11-5)

DDTo start recording

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen. Push [QUICK] .
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<REC Start>>.” Then, push D-pad() to
select.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad(Ent) to start voice recording.

• The transceiver displays “Recording started” and auto-
matically exits the Quick Menu screen.
• “ ” appears while the transceiver is recording.
• “ ” appears while the recording is paused.
• Recording is continuous until you manually stop record- Push D-pad(Ent) to start
ing, or the card becomes full. voice recording
• If the recording file’s content reaches 2GB, the transceiv-
er automatically creates a new file, and continues record-
ing.

NOTE:
You can start to record using the MENU screen. See
p. 16-22 for details.

While recording

While pausing

11-2
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Recording a QSO audio (Continued)

DDTo stop recording

qqPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select “<<REC Stop>>.”
eePush D-pad(Ent) to stop voice recording.
• The transceiver displays “Recording stopped,” and auto-
matically exits the Quick Menu screen.

✓✓ Convenient!
When the PTT Automatic Recording function is set to
ON in the MENU screen, the recording automatically
starts when [PTT] is pushed.
(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >
PTT Auto REC)

11-3
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Playing back the recorded audio

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder >

Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last
screen is displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made at recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder that contains the
file you want to play, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to
play, then push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.
• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed, and the file Folder list
starts to playback.
yyPush [MENU] or [CLR] to stop the play-
back.
• The file list is automatically displayed.

File list

11-4
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Changing the recording mode

The recording audio can be selected in the “REC Mode”
item on the Menu screen.

The default setting is “TX&RX” (Both transmit and

receive signals are recorded).

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder >

Recorder Set > REC Mode)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “RX Only,” and then push
D-pad(Ent) to save.
ttPush [MENU] to set, and exit the Menu screen.

11-5
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Operation while playing back

You can fast-forward or rewind while playing back.
Push to move to the previous file.
DDFast-forward while playing • Push : Fast-forward.
Push D-pad(") to fast-forward. (Default: 10 seconds) • Push while the playback is pausing
If you want to change the fast-forward time, see “Chang- :P
 ause at the beginning of
ing the skip time.” (p. 11-7) the previous file.

DDRewind while playing

Push D-pad(!) to rewind. (Default: 10 seconds)
If you want to change the rewind time, see “Changing
the skip time.” (p. 11-7)
• If you push D-pad(!) within 1 second after starting to play- Push to playback or pause.
back, the end of the previously recorded file will playback.
Push to move the next file.
DDPause while playing
Push D-pad(Ent) to pause. • Push : Rewind.
Push D-pad(Ent) again to exit the pause. • Push while the playback is pausing
: When the playback is paused anywhere
within the file, push D-pad(!) to return to
DDPlaying the previously file the beginning of the file, and pause.
Push D-pad(#) to playback the previously file. When the playback is paused at beginning
• In case there are other files in the folder, while the oldest file of a file, push D-pad(!) to move to the
is playing back, push D-pad(#) to start playing the beginning beginning of the previous file, and pause.
of the file .

DDPlaying the next file NOTE:

Push D-pad($) to play the next file. You can also change the playback location by rotat-
• In case there are other files in the folder, while the most re- ing [DIAL].
cent file is playing back, push D-pad($) to stop the file. • If you use [DIAL] to change the location, regardless
of “Skip time,” you can change the location in steps
DDPause
 at the beginning of the previously of 1/20 of the file’s playback time.
file (Fast forward the file)
When the playback is paused anywhere within the file,
push D-pad(!) to return to the beginning of the file,
and pause.
• Push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.

When the playback is paused at beginning of a file,

push D-pad(!) to move to the beginning of the previ-
ous file, and pause.
• Push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.

DDPause
 at the beginning of the next file
(Rewind the file)
When the playback is paused, push D-pad(") to move
to the beginning of the next file, and pause.
• Push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.

11-6
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Changing the skip time

You can change the skip time of fast forward and re-
wind.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder >

Player Set > Skip Time)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the skip time of 3 seconds,
5 seconds, 10 seconds or 30 seconds, and then
push D-pad(Ent) to save.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-7
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■VOICE PLAYER screen’s description

The displayed items are follows.

q File name i
The playback file name is displayed.
q
w Recording information w
The recorded frequency, mode and audio category
are displayed. e u
• When the receive audio is playing back, the audio cat- r y
egory is displayed as “RX.”
When the transmit audio is playing back, the audio cat-
t
egory is displayed as “TX.”

e Playback mark
While the audio is playing back, the playback mark is
displayed.
• The mark disappears while doing fast forward, rewind or
pausing.

r Playing back time

The playing back time is displayed.

t Repeater call sign/name

The repeater call sign used in the DV mode is dis-
played.
When the repeater name is programmed in your re-
peater list, the name is also displayed.

y Total time
The file’s total playing back time is displayed.

u Progress bar
The playing back progress bar is displayed.

i File number/Total file number

The playing back file number, and total file number in
the folder are displayed.

11-8
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Deleting the recorded contents (audio)

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made at recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder including the file
that you want to delete, then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to de-
lete, then push [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu
screen.
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” then push D-
pad(Ent). Folder list
• The confirmation screen “Delete file?” apperas.
uuPush D-pad(#) to select “YES,” then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The selected file is deleted.

File list

<To delete all files>

When you want to erase all
audio files in the folder at one
time, select “Delete All” in step
y as described above.

11-9
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Deleting the folder

NOTE:
All the files in the folder are also deleted.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made at recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder which you want
to delete.
ttPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Delete folder?” appears.
uuPush D-pad(#) to select “YES,” then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The folder is deleted.
Folder list

<To delete all folders>

When you want to erase all
folders at one time, select “De-
lete All Folders” in step y.

11-10
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Continue to record even if no signals are received

In the default settings, the transceiver records audio
only while receiving signals (the squelch opens).
If you want to continue recording even if no signal is
received, do the following steps.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder

Set > RX REC Condition)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad(#) to select “Always,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to save.
• Always : Recording continues, even if no signals
are received.
• Squelch Auto : The transceiver records audio only while
receiving signals (the squelch opens).
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-11
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Record the transmit and receive audio into the same file
The transceiver can record the transmit and receive au-
dio into the same file.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder

Set > File Split)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “OFF,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to save.
• OFF : The transceiver records the transmit and receive
audio into the same file.
• ON : The transceiver records the transmit and receive
audio into each files.
The transceiver makes separate new files for
transmit and receive audio. (Default setting)
• When you set the RX REC Condition item to
“Squelch Auto,” the transceiver records audio to
the new file when the squelch is closed.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder set >
RX REC Condition)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

NOTE: Even if you set File Split item to OFF, when

the recording file’s content becomes 2 GB, the trans-
ceiver continues to record, but to a new file.

About the VOICE PLAYER screen when recording

into the same file
The VOICE PLAYER screen
shows information that is re-
corded first.
When the receive audio was
recorded first, the transmit
audio information is not dis-
played on the screen.

11-12
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Start to record when the [PTT] switch is pushed

The transceiver starts to record the transmitted audio
at the same time the [PTT] switch is pushed.
After transmitting, the transceiver receives signal in a
given amount of time, it also records the received au-
dio. Therefore, you can record all communication audio
to use this function.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder

Set > PTT Auto REC)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON,” then push D-pad(Ent)
to save.
• OFF : The transceiver does not start to record when the
[PTT] switch is pushed.
• ON : The transceiver starts to record when the [PTT]
switch is pushed.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

NOTE: When you set PTT AUTO REC to ON, see

the notes below.
• The transceiver also starts to record audio when
pushing the optional microphone’s [PTT] switch,
transmitting using with the VOX function or CI-V re-
mote controller.
• All transmit audio is recorded when “TX&RX” is set
in the “REC Mode” item on the Menu screen.
• When the transceiver receives a signal less than
10 seconds after transmitting, the transceiver also
records the receive audio.
• In addition, when the transceiver receives a signal
less than 10 seconds after the signal is received, it
also records the receive audio.

11-13
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Viewing the file information

The transceiver can display the recorded file’s frequen-
cy, mode, date, and so on.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made at recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder that contains the
file you want to view, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to view
the information, then push [QUICK] to open the
Quick Menu screen.
yyPush D-pad() to select “File Information,” then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The information screen appears.
uuPush D-pad(Ent) to exit the information screen.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

Example of file information screens (The display items differ, depending on the recording contents.)
• Transmit Information screen (Transmitting in the
(Your own position) DR mode)

• Receive Information screen (Receiving in the

(Your own position) DR mode) (Destination position)

11-14
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Viewing the folder information

The transceiver can display the folder’s name, number
of the files in the folder, total capacity of the files and
date.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made at recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder want to view the
folder information, then push [QUICK] to open
the Quick Menu screen.
ttPush D-pad() to select “Folder Information,” then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The information screen appears.
yyPush D-pad(Ent) to exit the information screen.
uuPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-15
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Voice Recorder function

The microphone audio, including audio from an exter-
nal microphone, can be recorded for your convinience.
• Depending on the microSD card capacity, you may continu-
ously record up to a maximum of about 37 hours. If the file
size exceeds 2 GB, a new file is automatically created in the
same folder, and the recorded voice audio is saved there.

DDTo start recording

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder)

eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select “Record,” and then D-
pad(Ent).
• The VOICE RECORDER screen appears.
rrPush [PTT] to start recording.
• “Recording” appears and the microphone audio record-
ing starts.
ttPush [PTT] again to stop.
• The information screen appears.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

[PTT]

NOTE:
While recording a QSO, a
voice recorder cannot be
made, and the screen shown
to the right appears. In that Shows the remain time
case, push [MENU] to exit periods
the Menu screen, and push
Shows the microphone
[QUICK] . Push D-pad() gain level
to select “Stop Recording” to
stop the QSO recording.

Even if the external microphone is connected, the in-

ternal microphone’s voice audio is recorded when the
Shows the recording time
transceiver’s [PTT] is held.
To record the external microphone’s voice audio, hold
down the external microphone’s [PTT].
Shows the microphone
input level
11-16
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDPlaying back the recorded audio
qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter, one or more times until the last
screen is displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made at recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder that contains the
file you want to play, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to
play, then push D-pad(Ent) to play it back.
• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed, and the file
starts to playback.
• The next file continuously starts to playback.
• Push D-pad(Ent) to pause.
yyPush [MENU] or [CLR] to stop the play-
back.
• The file list is automatically displayed.

NOTE:
While recording a QSO, a
voice recorder recorded audio
cannot be played back, and
the screen shown to the right
appears. In that case, push
[MENU] to exit the Menu
screen, and push [QUICK]
. Push D-pad() to select
“Stop Recording” to stop the
QSO recording.
11-17
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDErasing the recorded contents (audio)
qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Play files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above and
push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent) to enter,
one or more times until the last screen is displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made at recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder including the file
that you want to erase, then push D-pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y: year,
m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to
erase, then push [QUICK] to open the Quick
Menu screen.
yyPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Delete file?” apperas.
uuPush D-pad(#) to select “YES,” then push D-pad(Ent).
• The selected file is erased.

The file that you

want to erase.

<To erase a folder>

When you want to erase a
folder, select the folder that you
want to erase in step e, then
To erase all files
push [QUICK] . And push
at one time, se-
D-pad() to select “Delete,” lect “Delete All.”
then push D-pad(Ent).

<To erase all folders>

When you want to erase all
folders, push [QUICK] in
step e. And push D-pad() to
select “Delete All Folders,” then
push D-pad(Ent).

11-18
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDMIC Gain setting

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Recorder

Set > MIC Gain)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder including the file
that you want to erase, then push D-pad(Ent).
• The MIC Gain screen is displayed.
ttPush D-pad() to set the internal microphone sensi-
tivity to between 1 (minimum sensitivity) and 4 (max-
imum sensitivity), to suit your needs.
• Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to
your voice.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

MIC Gain setting in the VOICE RECORDER screen

While in the VOICE RE-
CORDER screen as shown
to the right, push [QUICK]
. And then push D-
pad(Ent) to set the internal
microphone sensitivity.

The selected gain

level is displayed
here.

11-19
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDChanging the skip time

You can change the skip time of fast forward and re-
wind.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder >

Player Set > Skip Time)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the skip time of 3 seconds,
5 seconds, 10 seconds or 30 seconds, and then
push D-pad(Ent) to save.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-20
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■ Voice Recorder function (Continued)

DDViewing the file information
The transceiver can display the recorded file’s frequen-
cy, mode, date, and so on.

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.

wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice Memo),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next level.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Play Files)
eeRefer to the menu sequence show directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made at recording.)
• The folder name is composed yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
rrPush D-pad() to select the folder including the file
that you want to view the information, then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The file list is displayed.
• The file name is composed yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y:
year, m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: sec-
ond.)
ttPush D-pad() to select the file that you want to view
the information, then push [QUICK] to open the
Quick Menu screen.
yyPush D-pad() to select “File Information,” then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The information screen appears.
uuPush D-pad(Ent) to exit the information screen.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.
The file that you
want to view

<To view a folder information>

When you want to view a
folder information, select the
folder that you want to view
the information in step e, then
push [QUICK] . And push
D-pad() to select “Folder
Information,” then push D-
pad(Ent).

11-21
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Viewing the microSD card’s free space and recordable time

qqPush [MENU] to enter the Menu screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (SD Card),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
eePush D-pad() to select “SD Card Info,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to display the SD Card Informa-
tion.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

• The information screen appears.

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to exit the information screen.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

11-22
 Previous view

11 VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION

■■Playing back the voice memory data on a PC

You can also playback the voice memory data on a
PC
PC.
However, the recorded information (frequency, date,
and so on) are not displayed.
• Mircosoft® Windows® 7 is used for the description.
• When you copy the voice memory data from the mi-
croSD card to the PC’s hard disk drive, you also oper- microSD
ate same as following steps for playing back data. card to the Card
• (e.g.) A memory card reader (3rd party products) is Transceiver reader
connected to the PC, and insert the microSD
card into the reader. Then playing back the voice
memory data in the card.

qqConnect the memory card reader (purchase locally)

to the PC, and then insert the microSD card into the
reader.
• If your PC has a microSD card drive, insert the card into
the drive.
wwWhen the microSD card is inserted in the microSD
card drive of the PC or the microSD card reader, the Click
screen appears as shown to the right.
• The [ID-51] folder appears.
eeDouble-click the [ID-51] folder.

Click

rrDouble-click the [Voice] or [VoiceRec] folder.

• To playback the QSO voice audio, double-click the [Voice]
folder.
• To playback the voice recorder audio, double-click the
[VoiceRec] folder.

To playback
the QSO
voice audio.

To playback
the voice
recorder audio.
ttDouble-click the folder in which the file you want to
playback is stored.
(e.g. 20121120 folder)
yyTo playback the file, double-click it.
(e.g. 20121120_032854.wav) Double-click

NOTE: 
• The operations while playing back may differ, de-
pending on the software. Therefore, refer to the
software’s instruction manual for details.
• When the file does not playback, even if you dou- Double-click
ble-click the file, download appropriate software
like Windows Media® Player.
11-23
Previous view

Section 12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■ General description............................................ 12-2
DD Memory channel contents.............................. 12-2
■■ Memory channel selection................................. 12-3
■■ Selecting a call channel. .................................... 12-3
■■ Memory channel programming. ......................... 12-4
■■ Copying memory and Call channel contents. .... 12-5
DD Memory or Call channelVFO...................... 12-5
DD Memory or Call channelAnother memory or
Call channel.................................................... 12-6
■■ Memory bank setting.......................................... 12-7
DD Assigning a memory channel to a
memory bank................................................. 12-7
DD Directly programming into a memory bank.... 12-8
■■ Memory bank selection...................................... 12-9
■■ Programming memory/bank/scan name.......... 12-10
DD Programming memory name, bank name or
scan name.................................................... 12-10
■■ Selecting a memory name display................... 12-12
■■ Memory clearing. ............................................. 12-13

12-1
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■General description
The Memory mode is very useful to quickly select of-
ten-used operating settings.
The transceiver has 500 regular memory channels,
50 scan edge channels (25 pairs) and 4 call channels.
Also, 26 memory banks, A to Z, can be used to store
groups of operating channels, and so on. Up to 100
channels can be assigned to a bank.

DDMemory channel contents

The following information can be programmed into
memory channels:
• Operating frequency
• Operating mode
• Duplex direction (DUP+/DUP–) with a frequency
offset
• Subaudible tone encoder, tone squelch or DTCS
squelch ON/OFF
• Subaudible tone frequency, tone squelch frequency
or DTCS code with polarity
• Scan skip setting
• Memory bank
• Memory name
• Tuning step
• UR Station call sign
• R1/R2 call sign
• Digital Call sign squelch or Digital code squelch ON
or OFF
• Digital code

NOTE: Memory data can be erased by static elec-

tricity, electric transients, and other causes. In addi-
tion, they can be erased by a malfunction and during
repairs. Therefore, we recommend that memory data
be backed up or be saved to a microSD card or to a
PC.
• The microSD card is not available from Icom. Purchase a
microSD card to meet your needs.
• The CS-51 cloning software that is included on the sup-
plied CD can also be used to backup the memory data.
• The optional OPC-2218LU is required to connect the
transceiver and a PC.

12-2
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■Memory channel selection

The Memory mode is used for operation on memory
channels, which store programmed frequencies, call
signs and other data.

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the

Memory mode.
•“ ” appears when the Memory mode is selected.
• Push [M/CALL] again to select the Memory mode or
Weather channel mode*. The Memory mode, Call chan-
nel mode or Weather channel mode* are alternately se-
lected.
*Appears only for the U.S.A. version transceivers.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select a desired memory channel.
• Only programmed memory channels can be selected.
• See page 12-4 for memory programming details. Appears
Rotate [DIAL] to select the
[DIAL] memory channel number

■■Selecting a call channel

Call channels are used for quick recall of most often-
used operating settings.

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the

Call channel mode.
• Push [M/CALL] again to select the Memory mode or
Weather channel mode*. The Memory mode, Call chan-
nel mode or Weather channel mode* are alternately se-
lected.
*Appears only in the U.S.A. version transceivers.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel between
“C0” to “C3.”

[DIAL] Rotate [DIAL] to select

12-3
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■Memory channel programming

qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. Example: Programming 146.030 MHz/FM mode into
wwSet a desired frequency and operating mode: memory channel 11 (a blank channel).
➥➥ Rotate [DIAL] to set a desired frequency.
Set 146.030MHz in
(Example: 146.030)
the VFO mode.
➥➥ Push [MODE] one or more times to select a
desired operating mode. (Example: FM mode)
➥➥ Set the duplex direction, frequency offset, tone
squelch, and so on, if needed.
eeHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sound.
• The memory channel number blinks, and memory con-
tents are displayed.
rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired channel to be pro-
grammed. Hold down [S.MW]
(Example: Channel 11) for 1 second to enter
ttHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to program, and the Select Memory write
then return to the VFO mode. mode.
• 3 beeps sound.
• Before returning to the VFO mode, the programmed
memory contents are briefly displayed.
• The Memory channel number automatically increases
when continuing to hold down [S.MW] for 1 second
after programming.

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the program and Rotate [DIAL] to select a
exit the Select Memory write mode before memory channel 11.
programming.

[DIAL]

Hold down [S.MW]

for 1 second to program.

Returns to the VFO mode.

12-4
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■Copying memory and Call channel contents

This function copies a memory channel’s contents to
the VFO, another memory or Call channels. This is use-
ful when searching for signals around a memory chan-
nel frequency, and for recalling the frequency offset,
subaudible tone frequency and so on.

DDMemory or Call channelVFO

qqSelect the Memory or Call channel to be copied.
➥➥ Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select Select the memory or call
the Memory mode or the Call channel mode, then channel to be copied.
rotate [DIAL] to select a desired channel.
wwHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the
Select Memory write mode, and copy the memory
contents.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds.
• The memory channel number blinks.
eeRotate [DIAL] to select “VFO.”
rrHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to copy the se-
lected channel contents to the VFO.
• The transceiver automatically returns to the VFO. Hold down [S.MW]
for 1 second to enter
NOTE: Holding down [S.MW] for 2 seconds in the Select Memory write
step w will also copy the memory contents to the mode, and then, rotate
[DIAL] to select “VFO.”
VFO. In that case, steps e and r are not neces-
sary.

[DIAL]

Hold down [S.MW]

for 1 second to copy.
The selected channel
contents appear in the
VFO screen.

12-5
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■ Copying memory and Call channel contents (Continued)

DDMemory or Call channelAnother memory or Call channel

qqSelect the Memory or Call channel to be copied.
➥➥ Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select Select the memory chan-
the Memory mode or the Call channel mode, then nel to be copied.
rotate [DIAL] to select a desired channel.
wwHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds.
• The memory channel number blinks.
• DO NOT hold down [S.MW] for more than 2 sec-
onds. If you do, the memory contents will be copied to the
VFO.
eeRotate [DIAL] to select the target Memory or Call
channel. Hold down [S.MW]
Other channels shown below can be programmed: for 1 second to enter
rrHold down [S.MW] for 1 second again to copy. the Select Memory write
• 3 beeps sound. mode, and then, rotate
• The transceiver automatically selects the copied chan- [DIAL] to to select the tar-
nel. get channel.

[DIAL]

Hold down [S.MW]

for 1 second to copy.
The copied channel is au-
tomatically selected.

12-6
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■Memory bank setting

The ID-51A/E has a total of 26 banks (A to Z). NOTE: The memory banks are only used to hold
Regular memory channels 0 to 499 are assigned to any memory channels. Thus if the original memory chan-
desired bank for easy memory management. Up to 100 nel contents have been changed, the memory bank
channels can be assigned to a bank. contents are also changed at the same time.

DDAssigning a memory channel to a memory bank

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Hold down [S.MW] for
1 second to enter the Se-
Memory mode, and then rotate [DIAL] to select a de-
lect Memory write mode.
sired channel to be assigned to a bank.
wwHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds. Push D-pad() to select
• The memory channel number blinks. “Edit.”
• DO NOT hold down [S.MW] for more than 2 sec-
onds. Otherwise the memory contents will be copied to
the VFO.
eePush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
 ush D-pad() to select
P
rrPush D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-
“BANK,” and then push
pad(Ent) to enter the Memory bank edit mode.
D-pad(Ent).
ttPush D-pad() to select “BANK,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• “– – – –” appears, then the first digit blinks.
• If the selected memory channel has already been as- The first digit blinks.
signed to a bank, the Bank group and the bank channel
number are displayed.
• If the Bank name has already been programmed, it is
also displayed. Rotate [DIAL] and select
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank group, “A” to “Z.” “F”, then push D-pad().
uuPush D-pad() to select the bank channel digit.
iiRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank channel num-
ber between “00” and “99.” Rotate [DIAL] and select
• The bank channels are not displayed when the memory “05”, then push
channel is already assigned. D-pad(Ent).
• Push D-pad() to change the bank group or bank chan-
nel number selection.
ooPush D-pad(Ent) to set, and exit the Memory bank
edit mode.
!0 Push D-pad() to select “<<Write>>,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
• The confirmation screen “Overwrite?” appears.
!1 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push Push D-pad() to select
D-pad(Ent). “<<Write>>,” and then
• The selected memory channel is updated and assigned to push D-pad(Ent).
the bank, and then the transceiver returns to the Memory
mode.
Push D-pad() to select
[DIAL] “YES,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).

Returns to the Memory Mode.

12-7
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■ Memory bank setting (Continued)

DD Directly programming into a memory bank
You can also program the memory contents directly
into a memory bank channel. This way is a short cut to
programming the memory channel, and then assigning
it to a bank. In that case, the transceiver automatically
selects the lowest blank memory channel, to program.

qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.

wwSet a desired frequency and operating mode: Example: Programming 146.010 MHz/FM mode into
➥➥ Rotate [DIAL] to set a desired frequency. Memory bank channel J-01.
(Example: 146.010 MHz)
➥➥ Push [MODE] one or more times to select a Hold down [S.MW]
desired operating mode. (Example: FM mode) for 1 second to enter
➥➥ Set duplex direction, frequency offset, tone squelch the Select Memory write
mode.
and so on, if desired.
eeHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode.
• 1 short and 1 long beep sound. Push D-pad() to select
• The memory channel number blinks, and memory con- “Bank Select.”
tents are displayed.
rrPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
ttPush D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
Rotate [DIAL] to select
(�) the bank group, “J.”
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank group, “A” to
“Z,” and then push D-pad(Ent). (Example: “J”)
• If you want to change the bank group after pushing
D-pad(Ent), return to step r.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank channel be-
tween “00” and “99.” (Example: “01”)
• The bank channel number blinks. The bank channel num-
• If the selected bank channel is already assigned, the ber blinks.
memory contents are displayed.
iiHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to program, and
then return to the VFO mode.
• 3 beeps sound.
• If an already assigned bank channel is selected in step
Rotate [DIAL] to select
u, the memory contents will be overwritten into the
the bank channel “01.”
memory channel and bank channel.
• The Bank channel number automatically increases when
continuing to hold down [S.MW] after programming.

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the program and

exit the Select Memory write mode before memory
programming. Hold down [S.MW]
for 1 second to program.
NOTE: If the Memory bank display is already select-
ed and you want to program the contents into the
memory channel, do the following steps:
q Select “ALL CH Select” in
step t. Returns to the VFO mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select a
desired memory channel.
eH old down [S.MW] for
1 second to program.

12-8
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■Memory bank selection

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Example: Selecting the bank group “A.”
Memory mode.
wwPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen. Push [M/CALL] one
eePush D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and then or more times to select
push D-pad(Ent). the Memory mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank group, “A” to

“Z.”
• Only Bank groups that have memory channels assigned Push [QUICK] , then
to them are displayed. push D-pad() to select
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to set. “Bank Select.”
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank channel.
• Only assigned bank channels are displayed.
• To return to the Memory channels display, repeat steps
w to e, and select “OFF” in step r.

[DIAL]
Rotate [DIAL] to select the
bank group “A.”

Push D-pad(Ent) to set.

Rotate [DIAL] to select a

desired bank channel.

12-9
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■Programming memory/bank/scan name

Each memory channel can be programmed with an al-
phanumeric channel name for easy recognition. Names
can be a maximum of 16 characters.

NOTE: Only one name can be programmed for each

bank. Therefore, the previously programmed bank
name will be displayed when bank name is selected.
Also, the bank names are automatically updated in oth-
er memory channels assigned to the same bank
group.

DDProgramming memory name, bank name or scan name

qqHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se-
lect Memory write mode. Example: Programming the memory name “ID-51” in
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds. M-CH000.
• The memory channel number blinks.
• DO NOT hold down [S.MW] for more than 2 seconds.
In the Select Memory
wwRotate [DIAL] to select a desired memory channel.
Write mode, select
• Select Call channels (C0 to C3) to program a Call chan-
M-CH000, and then
nel name, or Scan edge channels (0A/0B to 24A/24B) to
push [QUICK] .
program a scan name.
eePush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter the name programming mode.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

ttPush D-pad() to select “MNAME,” “BNAME” or Push D-pad() to select

“SNAME,” and then push D-pad(Ent). “Edit,” and then push
• MNAME” is for a memory name, “BNAME” for a bank D-pad(Ent).
name or “SNAME” for a scan name.
• If the selected memory channel’s name has already been
programmed, the name is displayed.
• “BNAME” appears only when the selected memory chan-
nel is assigned to a bank.
• “SNAME” appears only when the selected memory chan-
nel is a scan edge channel. The same name is automati-
cally assigned to both scan edge channels, A and B.
• After pushing D-pad(Ent), the cursor blinks on the first Push D-pad() to select
digit. “MNAME.”

NOTE: When entering the scan type selection mode,

the programmed Scan name is displayed instead of
the frequency range indication.

[DIAL]

The cursor blinks on the

first digit.

Continued on the next page

12-10
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■ Programming memory/bank/scan name Continued from the previous page

DD Programming memory name, bank name or scan
name (Continued) Rotate [DIAL] to select “I”.
Push D-pad() to move
yyRotate [DIAL] to select a desired character. the cursor to the second
• Selectable input characters are Upper case letters, Low- digit.
er case letters, Numbers or Symbols.
• The selected character blinks.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to change Rotate [DIAL] to select “D.”
the character to an upper case or lower case letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open the
input mode selection window.

Repeat steps y and u

until the desired memory
name is programmed.

• A space can be entered in any input mode selected.

• Rotate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.  ush D-pad(Ent) to save
P
• See page 2-7 for programming details. the name and exit the
uuPush D-pad() to move the cursor to the second Memory name edit mode.
digit.
iiRepeat steps y and u to enter the desired channel
name of up to 16 characters.
ooPush D-pad(Ent) to save, and exit the Memory name
edit mode.
!0 Push D-pad() to select “<<Write>>,” and then push
D-pad(Ent). Push D-pad() to select
• The confirmation screen “Overwrite?” appears. “<<Write>>,” and then
!1 Push D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D- push D-pad(Ent.)
pad(Ent).
• Returns to the screen viewed before entering the Select
Memory write mode in step w.

[DIAL]

Push D-pad() to select

“YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).

Returns to the screen

viewed before entering
the Select Memory write
mode.
Memory name is dis-
played.

12-11
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■Selecting
 a memory name display
While in the memory mode, the programmed memory Push [QUICK] .
name can be displayed.

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the

Memory mode.
wwPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
eePush D-pad() to select “Display Type,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired Display type, and Push D-pad() to select
“Display Type,” and then
then push D-pad(Ent.)
push D-pad(Ent).
• Freq (Name OFF) : Displays only the frequency.
• Freq : Displays the large font sized
frequency and small font sized
memory name.
• Name : Displays large font sized mem-
ory name and a small font sized
frequency.

Push D-pad() to select

a desired Display type,
and then push
D-pad(Ent).

Example: When Memory Name “ID-51” is programmed

into M-CH 000 (146.010MHz).

• Freq (Name OFF) • Freq • Name

12-12
 Previous view

12 MEMORY CHANNEL PROGRAMMING

■■Memory clearing
Contents of programmed memories can be cleared
(erased), if desired.

qqHold down [S.MW] for 1 second to enter the Se- Example: Clearing the memory channel 007.
lect Memory write mode.
In the Select Memory
• 1 short and 1 long beep sounds.
write mode, rotate [DIAL]
• The memory channel number blinks.
to select the memory
• DO NOT hold down [S.MW] for more than 2 sec-
channel to be cleared.
onds.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select a desired memory channel
to be cleared.
• Select Call channels (C0 to C3) to erase a call channel,
or scan edge channels (0A/0B to 24A/24B) to erase a
scan channel.
eePush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Clear,” and then push D-
pad(Ent). Push [QUICK] , and
• The confirmation screen “Clear?” appears. push D-pad() to select
D-pad “Clear,” then push
(Ent) D-pad(Ent).
(�)

ttPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-

pad(Ent) to clear the contents.
• After clearing, the display returns to the Select Memory
write mode. Push D-pad() to select
• To cancel the memory clearing, select “NO” and push D- “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent.) pad(Ent) to clear.
yyPush [CLR] to exit the Select Memory write
mode.
• Returns to the previous screen viewed before entering
the Select Memory write mode in step q.

[DIAL]
Returns to the Select
Memory write mode.

Push [CLR] to
return to the screen
viewed before entering
the Select Memory write
mode.

12-13
Previous view

Section 13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Scan................................................................... 13-2
DD About the scan function. ................................ 13-2
DD VFO scan....................................................... 13-2
DD Memory scan. ................................................ 13-2
DD Memory bank scan. ....................................... 13-2
DD Scanning direction. ........................................ 13-3
DD Squelch setting for a scan.............................. 13-3
DD Tuning step for a VFO scan............................ 13-3
DD Skip function. ................................................. 13-3
DD Temporarily Skip timer. .................................. 13-3
DD Receive mode for a scan. .............................. 13-3
DD When a signal is received.............................. 13-4
DD Scan name..................................................... 13-4
DD Scan Stop Beep function. .............................. 13-4
DD Scan function during Dualwatch operation. ... 13-4
■■ VFO scan........................................................... 13-5
DD VFO mode scan............................................. 13-5
■■ Setting and clearing the skip frequencies.......... 13-7
DD Setting the skip frequencies........................... 13-7
DD Clearing the skip setting................................. 13-8
■■ Memory scan. .................................................... 13-9
DD Memory (skip) scan. ...................................... 13-9
DD Memory bank scan. ..................................... 13-10
■■ Setting the skip channel................................... 13-12
■■ Setting the temporary skip function.................. 13-13

13-1
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Scan
Scanning is a versatile function that can automatically
DDVFO scan
search for signals and makes it easier to locate stations
• ALL (Full scan) p. 13-5
to contact or listen to, or to skip unwanted channels or
Repeatedly scans the entire band.
frequencies.
108 MHz 479 MHz

DDAbout the scan function P SKIP Scan P SKIP

• In the VFO mode Jump

The frequencies that are set as “PSKIP” are skipped
during a scan. (p. 13-7) • BAND (Selected band scan) p. 13-5
Scans all frequencies over the entire selected band.
NOTE: One or more pair of the scan edge channels Band edge Band edge

must be programmed to start a program scan. P SKIP Scan P SKIP

• In the memory mode Jump

Repeatedly scans all programmed Memory channels.
• PROG 0–24 (Program scan) p. 13-5
The frequencies that are set as skip channels “PSKIP”
Scans the frequency range which is programmed
and “SKIP” are not scanned. (p.13-12)
into the program scan channels (PROGRAM-CH).
NOTE: Two or more memory channels must be pro- Band
Scan edges
Band
edge XXA XXB edge
grammed to start a memory scan.
Jump Scan

Jump
[Duplex (DUP) scan]
The Duplex scan searches for both TX and RX fre- • P-LINK0–9 (Program link scan) p. 13-5
quencies which are used in duplex operation. Sequentially scans the program scan channels
(p. 15-4, 15-5) which are set to link in the “PROGRAM LINK” item
• The “DUP–” or “DUP+” icon is displayed in the duplex in the MENU screen. (p. 16-20)
mode. (MENU > Scan > Program Link)
• A duplex scan will not start when the frequency offset is
set to “0.000 MHz.”

DDMemory scan
• ALL (Memory full scan) p. 13-9
[Tone scan] Scans all memory channels.
The tone scan searches for tone frequencies or
DTCS codes that are used by stations using the Tone • BAND (Selected band memory scan) p. 13-9
Squelch function. Scans all Memory channels on the same frequency
• A tone scan can be made in any mode: VFO, mem- band as the selected channel.
ory or Call channel.
• During a tone scan, rotate [DIAL] to switch scan di- • MODE (Mode memory scan) p. 13-9
rection. Scans memory channels which are programmed
with the same receiving mode as the currently se-
Refer to “Tone Squelch function” or “DTCS code lected mode.
Squelch function” for details. (pp. 17-13 to 17-16)
DDMemory bank scan
• ALL (Full bank scan) p. 13-10
Scans all banks.

• BANK-LINK (Bank link scan) p. 13-10

Sequentially scans the banks which are set to link in
the “BANK LINK” item in the MENU screen.
(MENU > Scan > Bank Link)

• BANK-A–Z (Bank scan) p. 13-10

Scans the memory channels in the selected bank.

13-2
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Scan (Continued)
DDScanning direction
• If desired, rotate [DIAL] to switch the scanning direc-
tion during a scan.

DDSquelch setting for a scan

The squelch level can be changed to suit your operat-
ing needs. Set the squelch level to open the squelch,
according to the received signal strength.
The default squelch level is “AUTO.”
• During a scan, while holding down [SQL], and then ro-
tate [DIAL] to adjust the squelch level. Release [SQL] Squelch level
to restart the scan.

DDTuning step for a VFO scan

The selected tuning step is applied to the scan.

DDSkip function
The skip function speeds up scanning by not scanning
When the “PROGRAM SKIP” item is set to OFF, the
those frequencies set as skip channels.
Scan Skip function cannot be used. (p. 16-19)
(MENU > Scan > Program skip)

DDTemporary Skip timer

The Temporary Skip function temporarily skips unwant-
ed frequencies during a scan, for the set period.
• These settings can be changed in the MENU screen.
(p. 16-18)
(MENU > Scan > Temporary Skip Timer)

Scanning in the FM mode

DDReceive mode for a scan
• The selected receive mode is used by the scan.
• During a memory or bank scan, the receive mode pro-
grammed into the channel is used by the scan.
Blinks

Blinks

13-3
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Scan (Continued)
DDWhen a signal is received
When a signal is received, the scan pauses for approxi-
mately 10 seconds (default), then resumes.
The scan resumes approximately 2 seconds (default)
after the signal is disappears. Blinks
To manually resume the scan, rotate [DIAL].
• These settings can be changed in the MENU screen. Blinks
(p. 16-18)
(MENU > Scan > Pause Timer)
(MENU > Scan > Resume Timer)

The S-meter shows the

received signal strength.

DDScan name
A desired name can be assigned to each PROGRAM-
CH (**A/**B). (p. 12-10)
By selecting the scan name, the scanning frequency
range will be set. Scan name
“Scan 0”

The scan type selecting screen.

DDScan Stop Beep function

The Scan Stop Beep function sounds a beep when a
signal is received.
The function can be turned ON in the MENU screen.
(p. 16-80)
(MENU > Sounds > Scan Stop Beep)

DDScan
 function during Dualwatch opera-
tion
When the scan function is used during the dualwatch Example: Full scan is running on the MAIN
operation, the SUB band audio signal may be muted, band, and the AIR band is selected
depending on the operating band or mode. on the SUB band.
And, the audio output may be interrupted when the fre-
quency or operating mode is switched while scanning.
MAIN
❍ SUB band mute status band
MAIN band SUB band
DV mode SUB
DV mode
FM-N mode band
DV mode
FM-N mode
FM-N mode When an AIR band frequency is
AIR band AIR band scanned on the MAIN band, the
SUB band audio signal is muted.

13-4
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■VFO scan Hold down

There are 6 scan types: Full scan, Band scan, Program [SCAN]
scan, Program link scan, Duplex scan and Tone scan. for 1 second.

NOTE:
The frequencies that are set as skip channels
“PSKIP” are skipped during a scan.
When the “PROGRAM SKIP” item in the MENU screen
is set to OFF, the frequencies that are set as skip chan-
nels “PSKIP”, are not skipped during a scan.
(MENU > Scan > Program Skip)
Push D-pad() to
select, then push
DDVFO mode scan D-pad(Ent).
qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
wwPush [MODE] to select the operating mode.
eeHold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
rrPush D-pad() to select the scan type.
• ALL : Full scan.
• BAND : Band scan.
• P-LINK0–9 : Program link scan.
• P00–24 : Program scan.
• DUP : Duplex scan (p. 13-2).
(Appears only when duplex is set.)
• TONE : Tone scan. Example: Full scan in the FM mode.
(For tone squelch scanning)
D-pad
(Ent)
(�) Blinks
ttPush D-pad(Ent) to start the scan.
• ALL : The decimal point and “ALL” blinks. Blinks
• BAND : The decimal point and “BND” blinks.
• P-LINK0–9/P00–24
: The decimal point and Scan edge number blink.
• DUP : The decimal point and “DUP+”/“DUP–” blink.
• If desired, rotate [DIAL] to switch the scanning direction
during a scan.
• If desired, push [MODE] to change the operating When a signal is received.
mode during a scan.
• The scan resumes even while the MENU screen is dis-
played.
yyTo cancel the scan, hold down [SCAN] for Blinks
1 second.
• Pushing [CLR] also cancels the scan. Blinks

[DIAL]

The S-meter shows the

received signal strength.

✓✓ Convenient!
Holding down [SCAN] and rotate [DIAL] also se-
lects the scan type. The scan immediately starts when
[SCAN] is released.

13-5
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

DD VFO mode scan (continued)

When a scan name is assigned.

When a scan name is assigned, the scan type can be • When the scan name is assigned
set by selecting the scan name from the scan type list.
(Step r on page 13-5.)

NOTE: The scan name is not displayed during a

scan.
Scan name
“Scan 0”

• When the scan name is not assigned

Scan edges

When a program link name is assigned.

When a program link name is assigned, the scan type • When the program link name is assigned
can be set by selecting the program link name from the
scan type list. (Step r on page 13-5.)

NOTE: The program link name is not displayed dur- Program link
ing a scan. name “Link 0”

• When the program link name is not assigned

Program link

13-6
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Setting and clearing the skip frequencies

DDSetting the skip frequencies
 he frequencies set as skip channels “PSKIP” are
T
skipped (not scanned).
Example: Full scan in the FM mode.
qqStart the VFO scan (p. 13-5).
• When a signal is received, the scan pauses.
wwWhile the scan is paused, and if you want to skip the
frequency, hold down [S.MW] for 1 second (until
Blinks
the 3 beeps sound).
• The memory channel number blinks.
• When a signal is received during the scan, the transceiv- Blinks
er attempts to program the frequency as a skip channel,
into empty memory channel 499.
• If channel 499 is already programmed, the transceiver
automatically searches backwards for a blank channel to
program.
If no blank memory channel is found, a beep sounds, and
no skip channel is programmed. When a signal is received.
eeAfter the skip channel is programmed, or the beep Hold down
sounds, the scan resumes. [M/CALL]
for 1 second.

Blinks

Blinks

153.005 MHz is pro-

grammed into memory
channel “499,” as the
skip frequency.

Blinks
The channel is
programmed as
a skip frequency.
Blinks

13-7
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Setting and clearing the skip frequencies (Continued)

DDClearing the skip setting

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Push [M/CALL] ,
Memory mode. then rotate [DIAL] to
wwRotate [DIAL] to select the memory channel you select the memory
want to clear as the skip channel. channel to clear its skip
eePush [QUICK] . setting.
rrPush D-pad() to select “SKIP,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

ttPush D-pad() to select “OFF.” Push [QUICK] .

• OFF : Cancel the skip setting.
• SKIP : Skipped during a memory scan.
• PSKIP : Skipped during both VFO and memory scans.
yyPush D-pad(Ent) to save the selection.
• The skip setting is canceled.
The channel that
is programmed as
[DIAL] a skip frequency.

✓✓ Information
The skip setting is also cancelled when the memory chan-
nel set as skip channel is deleted. Push D-pad() to
See page 12-13 for details. select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

“PSKIP” disappears.

13-8
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Memory scan
Repeatedly scans all programmed Memory channels.
There two types of scan in the memory mode; Memory Push [M/CALL] .
scan and memory bank scan.
• Channels set as “PSKIP” or “SKIP” are skipped during
a scan.
• Two or more memory channels, which are not set
as skip channels, must be programmed into start a
memory scan.

DDMemory (skip) scan Hold down [SCAN]

 he memory channels set as “PSKIP” or “SKIP” skip
T for 1 second.
channels are not scanned.

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the

Memory mode.
wwHold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
eePush D-pad() to select the scan type.
• ALL : Full scan
• BAND : Band memory scan Push D-pad() to
• MODE : Mode memory scan select, then push
• DUP : Duplex scan (p. 13-2) D-pad(Ent).
(Appears only when duplex is set on the chan-
nel.)
• TONE : Tone scan (For tone scanning)
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to start the scan.

• If desired, rotate [DIAL] to switch the scanning direction
during a scan.
• The scan resumes even while the MENU screen is dis-
played.
ttTo cancel the scan, hold down [SCAN] for 1 sec- Blinks
ond.
• Pushing [CLR] also cancels the scan.
Blinks

[DIAL]
When a signal is received.

Blinks

Memory channel
number
Blinks
The S-meter shows the
received signal strength.
✓✓ Convenient!
Holding down [SCAN] and then rotating [DIAL]
also selects the scan type. The scan immediately starts
when [SCAN] is released.

13-9
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Memory scan (Continued)

DDMemory bank scan
 memory bank scan searches through the memory
A
channels in the selected bank.
• Two or more memory channels, which are not set as skip chan-
nels, must be programmed to start a memory bank scan.
• When the “BANK” item in the MENU screen is set to “OFF,”
a bank scan is not started.

qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the Push [M/CALL] .

Memory mode.
wwPush [QUICK] to open the Quick Menu screen.
eePush D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrRotate [DIAL] to select a desired bank group to be Hold down [SCAN]

scanned, and then push D-pad(Ent). for 1 second.
• Only Bank groups that have memory channels assigned
to them are displayed.
ttHold down [MODE] for 1 second.
yyPush D-pad () to select the scan type.
• ALL : Full bank scan
• BANK-LINK
: Bank link scan
• BANK-A to Z
: Bank scan
(Only banks which contain a memory chan- Push D-pad() to
nel are displayed.) select, then push
• DUP : Duplex scan (p. 13-2) D-pad(Ent).
(Appears only when duplex is set on the
channel.)
• TONE : Tone scan (For tone scanning)
uuPush D-pad(Ent) to start the scan.
iiTo cancel the scan, hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
• Pushing [CLR] also cancels the scan.

[DIAL]

Blinks

Blinks

When a signal is received.

✓✓ Convenient!
Holding down [SCAN] and rotate [DIAL] also se-
lects the scan type. The scan immediately starts when Blinks
[SCAN] is released.
Bank channel
NOTE: number
• The bank contains only channels which are set as
“SKIP” or “PSKIP” are skipped. Blinks
• When the all selected banks contain only channels The S-meter shows the
which are set as “SKIP” or “PSKIP,” the scan is not received signal strength.
started.
13-10
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■ Memory scan
DD Memory bank scan (continued)

When a bank name is programmed • When the bank name is programmed.

When a bank name is programmed, the scan type can
be set by selecting the bank name from the scan type
list. (Step y on page 13-10.)

NOTE: The bank name is not displayed during a

scan. Bank name
“UHF Contest”

13-11
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Setting the skip channel

 he channels set as “SKIP” or “PSKIP” skip channels
T
are skipped (not scanned).
Example: Set “SKIP” to Memory channel “009.”
See page 13-8 for details of clearing the skip set- Rotate [DIAL] to select
ting. the memory channel.
qqPush [M/CALL] one or more times to select the
Memory mode.
wwRotate [DIAL] to select the memory channel to be
set as a skip channel.
eePush [QUICK] .
rrPush D-pad() to select “SKIP” or “PSKIP,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• OFF : Cancel the skip setting.
• SKIP : Skipped during a memory scan. Push [QUICK] .
• PSKIP : Skipped during both VFO and memory scans.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

ttPush D-pad(Ent) to save the selection. Memory channel

• The skip setting is set. number

[DIAL]
Push D-pad() to
select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

Push D-pad() to
select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

“SKIP” is set.

13-12
 Previous view

13 SCAN OPERATION

■■Setting the temporary skip function

This function temporarily skips unwanted frequencies Example: Full scan in the FM mode.
during a scan, for the set period.
This function enables you to temporarily skip the un-
wanted frequencies without the skip frequency setting.
Blinks
qqStart the scan. (pp. 13-5, 13-9)
• When a signal is received, the scan pauses.
Blinks
wwWhile the scan is paused, and if you want to skip the
frequency, push [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “Temporary Skip,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�) When a signal is received.
rrAfter pushing D-pad(Ent), the scan resumes. Push [QUICK] .
• The frequency will be skipped for the Temporary Skip
time period.
• After the Temporary Skip time period passes, or the scan Blinks
is cancelled, the Temporary Skip is also cancelled.
Blinks
The Temporary Skip time period is set to “5 minutes”
by default.
You can change the setting in the MENU screen.
(MENU > Scan > Temporary Skip Timer)

Push D-pad() to
select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

✓✓ Convenient!
During Memory or DR mode scanning, follow steps w
and r to skip the channel for the set period (Default:
5 minutes).

Up to 5 Temporary Skip fre-

quencies or memories can
be set.
When the 6th frequency or
memory is set, the pop up
screen appears as shown
to the right, and the oldest
frequency or memory is au-
tomatically deleted.
13-13
Previous view

Section 14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ Priority watch. .................................................... 14-2
DD VFO frequency and a priority channel. .......... 14-2
DD VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan..... 14-2
DD VFO scan and a priority channel. .................. 14-2
DD VFO scan and a Memory/Bank scan............... 14-2
DD DR mode and a priority channel. ................... 14-3
DD DR mode scan and a priority channel............. 14-3
■■ VFO frequency and a priority channel. .............. 14-4
■■ VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan......... 14-6
■■ VFO scan and a priority channel........................ 14-8
■■ VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan.................. 14-10
■■ DR mode and a priority channel......................... 14-13
■■ DR mode scan and a priority channel.............. 14-16

14-1
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■Priority watch
While operating on a VFO frequency, DR mode or while
scanning, Priority watch checks for signals on a selected
frequency every 5 seconds.

DDVFO frequency and a priority channel DDVFO scan and a priority channel
(p. 14-4) (p. 14-8)
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds, Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
while receiving on a VFO frequency. during a VFO mode scan.
Memory channel, Bank channel or Call channel can be se- Memory channel, Bank channel or Call channel can be se-
lected as the priority channel lected as the priority channel

• VFO frequency and a Memory channel • VFO scan and a Memory channel

VFO VFO
Selected Selected
mode mode
M-CH M-CH

Receiving Scan
(5 seconds) (5 seconds)

• VFO frequency and a Bank channel • VFO scan and a Bank channel

VFO VFO Selected

Selected mode
mode Bank CH
Bank CH

Receiving Scan
(5 seconds) (5 seconds)

• VFO frequency and a Call channel • VFO scan and a Call channel

VFO VFO
mode mode CALL-CH
CALL-CH

Scan
Receiving (5 seconds)
(5 seconds)

DDVFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan DDVFO scan and a Memory/Bank scan
(p. 14-6) (p. 14-10)
Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels every Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels ev-
5 seconds, while receiving on a VFO frequency. ery 5 seconds, during a VFO mode scan.
Memory scan or Bank scan can be selected. Memory scan or Bank scan can be selected.

• VFO frequency and a Memory scan • VFO scan and a Memory scan
0 0
VFO SKIP 1 SKIP 1
VFO
mode 2 mode 2
499 499
Receiving
(5 seconds) M-CH Scan M-CH
(5 seconds)

• VFO frequency and a Bank scan

• VFO scan and a Bank scan
00
00
SKIP 01
VFO SKIP 01
mode 02 VFO
mode 02
99
Receiving 99
Bank CH Scan
(5 seconds) Bank CH
(5 seconds)

14-2
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ PRIORITY WATCH (Continued)

DDDR mode and a priority channel DDDR mode scan and a priority channel
(p. 14-13) (p. 14-16)
Checks a priority channel every 5 seconds, while receiv- Checks a priority channel every 5 seconds, during a DR
ing on a repeater in the DR mode. mode scan.
VFO frequency, Memory channel, Bank channel or Call VFO frequency, Memory channel, Bank channel or Call
channel can be selected as the priority channel channel can be selected as the priority channel

• DR mode and a VFO frequency • DR mode scan and a VFO frequency

DR VFO DR VFO
mode frequency mode frequency

Receiving Scan
(5 seconds) (5 seconds)

• DR mode and a Memory channel • DR mode scan and a Memory channel

DR Selected DR Selected
mode M-CH mode M-CH

Receiving Scan
(5 seconds) (5 seconds)

• DR mode and a Bank channel • DR mode scan and a Bank channel

DR Selected DR Selected
mode Bank CH mode Bank CH

Receiving Scan
(5 seconds) (5 seconds)

• DR mode and a Call channel • DR mode scan and a Call channel

DR DR
mode CALL-CH mode CALL-CH

Receiving Scan
(5 seconds) (5 seconds)

14-3
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■VFO frequency and a priority channel

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
while receiving on a VFO frequency.
Example: Checks Memory channel “490” every 5 sec-
1. Set the VFO frequency onds, while receiving on 145.800 MHz.

q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. Rotate [DIAL] to set the
w Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency. receive frequency.

2. Set the priority channel Push [M/CALL] .

• In case of the Memory channel

q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Memory channel you
want to watch. Rotate [DIAL] to select
the Memory channel.
• In case of the Bank channel
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. Push [QUICK] .
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Bank channel you
want to watch.
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] .
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and Push D-pad() to
then push D-pad(Ent). select, then push
• The Bank list is displayed. D-pad(Ent).
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• If “OFF” is selected, cancel the bank selection.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

• In case of the Call channel

q Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select Push D-pad() to
the Call channel mode. select, then push
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel you want D-pad(Ent).
to watch.

3. Start the Priority scan

q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
• ON : When a signal is received on the priority [DIAL]
channel, the channel is automatically se-
lected.
• Bell : When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
VFO mode.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority scan.
• The “PRIO” icon appears

NOTE:
• You can set the priority channel (Step 2) before set-
ting the VFO frequency (Step 1).
• Push [CLR] to cancel the Priority scan.
☞☞Continued on the next page.
14-4
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO frequency and a priority channel (Continued)

4. During the Priority scan

Example: Checks M-CH “490” while receiving on 145.800
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
MHz frequency.
while receiving on a VFO frequency.
Appears Appears

Priority channel Checks the Memory chan-

nel every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks Bank CH “D06” while receiving on
145.800 MHz frequency.
Appears Appears

Priority channel Checks the Bank channel

every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks Call CH “C3” while receiving on 145.800
MHz frequency.
Appears Appears

Priority channel Checks the Call channel

every 5 seconds.

5. When a signal is received

Example: In case of the Memory channel
• When “ON” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel,
the channel is automatically selected. Blinks
The “PRIO” icon blinks on the screen.
- The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan. (p. 16-18)

• When “Bell” is selected. Automatically selects the priority channel.

When a signal is received on the priority channel,
a beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks on the Blinks
screen.

Remains the VFO mode.

14-5
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan

Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels ev- Example: Sequentially checks the Memory channels every
ery 5 seconds, while receiving on a VFO frequency. 5 seconds, while receiving on 145.800 MHz.
Rotate [DIAL] to set the
1. Set the VFO frequency receive frequency.
q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
Push [M/CALL] .
w Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency.

2. Start the Memory or Bank scan

• In case of the Memory scan
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. Hold down [SCAN]
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second. for 1 second.
e Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and
then push D-pad(Ent) to start the Memory scan.
(p. 13-9)
D-pad
(Ent)
(�) Push D-pad() to
• In case of the Bank scan select, then push
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. D-pad(Ent).
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
e Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and
then push D-pad(Ent) to start the Bank scan.
(p. 13-10)
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] . Blinks
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and
then push D-pad(Ent). Blinks
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and
then push D-pad(Ent). Push [QUICK] .
• If “OFF” is selected, cancel the bank selection. Push D-pad() to
select, then push
3. Start the Priority scan D-pad(Ent).
q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
Push D-pad() to
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
select, then push
• ON : When a signal is received on the priority
D-pad(Ent).
channel, the channel is automatically se-
lected.
• Bell : When a signal is received on the priority [DIAL]
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
VFO mode.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority scan.
• The “PRIO” icon appears

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the Priority and

Memory/Bank scan at the same time.

☞☞Continued on the next page.

14-6
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan (Continued)

4. During the Priority scan
Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels ev- Example: Sequentially checks the Memory channels while
ery 5 seconds, while receiving on a VFO frequency. receiving on 145.800 MHz frequency.
Appears Appears

The Memory chan-

nels are sequential-
ly checked.

Checks the Memory chan-

nel every 5 seconds.

Example: S
 equentially checks Bank channels while re-
ceiving on 145.800 MHz frequency.
Appears Appears

The bank channels

are sequentially
selected.

Checks the Bank channel

every 5 seconds.

5. When a signal is received

• When “ON” is selected. Example: In case of the Memory scan
When a signal is received on the priority channel,
the channel is automatically selected. Blinks
The “PRIO” icon blinks on the screen.
- The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan. (p. 16-18)

• When “Bell” is selected.

Automatically selects the Memory channel.
When a signal is received on the priority channel,
a beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks on the Blinks
screen.

Remains the VFO mode.

14-7
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■VFO scan and a priority channel

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
during a VFO mode scan. Example: Checks memory channel “490” every 5 sec-
onds, during a VFO scan.
1. Set the priority channel
• In case of the Memory channel Push [M/CALL] ,
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. then rotate [DIAL] to se-
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Memory channel you lect the Memory chan-
want to watch. nel.

• In case of the Bank channel Push [QUICK] .

q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Bank channel you Push D-pad() to
want to watch. select, then push
D-pad(Ent).
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] .
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and Push D-pad() to
then push D-pad(Ent). select, then push
• If “OFF” is selected, cancel the bank selection. D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�) Hold down [SCAN]
for 1 second.
• In case of the Call channel
q Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select
the Call channel mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel you want
to watch.
Push D-pad() to
2. Start the Priority scan select, then push
q Push [QUICK] . D-pad(Ent).
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
• ON : When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the channel is automatically se- Blinks
lected.
• Bell : When a signal is received on the priority Blinks
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
VFO mode.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority scan. [DIAL]
• The “PRIO” icon appears.

3. Start the VFO scan

q Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
w Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and then
push D-pad(Ent) to start the VFO scan (p. 13-5).

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel both scans.

☞☞Continued on the next page.

14-8
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO scan and a priority channel (Continued)

4. During the Priority scan

Example: C
 hecks M-CH “490” while VFO scanning
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
while VFO scanning Appears Appears

Checks the Memory chan-

Blinks
nel every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks Bank-CH “D06” while VFO scanning
Appears Appears

Blinks Checks the Bank channel

every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks Call-CH “C3” while VFO scanning
Appears Appears

Checks the Call channel

Blinks
every 5 seconds.

5. When a signal is received.

Example: In case of the Memory channel
• When “ON” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel, Blinks
the channel is automatically selected.
The “PRIO” icon blinks.
* The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan.

• When “Bell” is selected. Automatically selects the priority channel.

When a signal is received on the priority channel,
a beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks. The VFO Blinks
scan resumes.

Blinks

Blinks

Remains the VFO mode.

14-9
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan

Sequentially checks the Memory or Bank channels ev-
ery 5 seconds during a VFO scan.
Example: Sequentially checks the memory channels ev-
1. Start the Memory or Bank scan ery 5 seconds during a VFO scan.
• In case of the Memory scan
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. Push [M/CALL] .
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second. Hold down [SCAN]
e Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and for 1 second.
then push D-pad(Ent) to start the Memory scan.
(p. 13-9)
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)
Push D-pad() to
• In case of the Bank scan select, then push
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode. D-pad(Ent).
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
e Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and
then push D-pad(Ent) to start the Bank scan.
(p.13-10)
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] . Blinks
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and
then push D-pad(Ent). Blinks
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and Push [QUICK] .
then push D-pad(Ent).
• If “OFF” is selected, cancel the bank selection. Push D-pad() to
select, then push
2. Start the Priority scan D-pad(Ent).

q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
• ON : When a signal is received on the priority Push D-pad() to
channel, the channel is automatically se- select, then push
lected. D-pad(Ent).
• Bell : When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
VFO mode.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority scan.
• The “PRIO” icon appears ☞☞Continued on the next page.

14-10
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan (Continued)

3. Start the VFO scan Hold down [SCAN]

for 1 second.
q Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
w Push D-pad() to select the scan type, and then
push D-pad(Ent) to start the VFO scan (p. 13-5).

NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the all scans at the

Push D-pad() to
same time.
select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

Blinks

Blinks

4. During the Priority scan

Example: Checks the Memory channels while VFO scan-
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
ning
while VFO scanning.
Appears Appears

Blinks

Checks the Memory chan-

nels every 5 seconds.

Example: C
 hecks the Bank channels while VFO scanning
Appears Appears

Blinks

Checks the Bank channels

every 5 seconds.

14-11
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ VFO scan and Memory/Bank scan (Continued)

5. When a signal is received.

• When “ON” is selected. Example: In case of the Memory scan
When a signal is received on the priority channel,
the channel is automatically selected. Blinks
The “PRIO” icon blinks.
* The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan.

• When “BELL” is selected.

When a signal is received on the priority channel, a Automatically selects the Memory channel.
beep sounds and the “ ” icon blinks.
The VFO scan resumes. Blinks

Blinks

Blinks

Remains the VFO mode.

14-12
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ DR mode and a priority channel

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
while receiving a repeater in the DR mode. Example: Checks “145.800 MHz” every 5 seconds, while
receiving on the repeater in the DR mode.
1. Set the priority channel Rotate [DIAL] to set the
receive frequency.
• In case of the VFO frequency
q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
Hold down
w Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency.
for 1 second.
• In case of the Memory channel
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Memory channel you
want to watch.

• In case of the Bank channel

q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Bank channel you
want to watch.
How to select the Memory and Bank:
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] .
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• If “OFF” is selected, cancel the bank selection.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

• In case of the Call channel

q Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select
the Call channel mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel you want
to watch.

2. Select the repeater in the DR mode

q Hold down for 1 second to select the DR
mode.
w Push D-pad() to select the “FROM” (Access re-
peater) item. [DIAL]
e Rotate [DIAL] to select the desired repeater.

3. Start the Priority scan

q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
• ON : When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the channel is automatically se-
lected.
• Bell : When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the NOTE: Push [CLR] to cancel the Priority scan.
VFO mode.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority scan. ☞☞Continued on the next page.
• The “PRIO” icon appears
14-13
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ DR mode and a priority channel (Continued)

4. During the Priority scan

Example: Checks the VFO frequency while receiving a
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds, repeater in the DR mode.
while receiving a repeater in the DR mode.
Appears Appears

Checks the VFO frequen-

cy every 5 seconds.

Example: Checks the M-CH “490” while receiving a re-

peater in the DR mode.
Appears Appears

Checks the M-CH every 5

seconds.

Example: Checks the Bank CH “D06” while receiving a

repeater in the DR mode.
Appears Appears

Checks the Bank CH ev-

ery 5 seconds.

Example: Checks the Call CH “C3” while receiving a re-

peater in the DR mode.
Appears Appears

Checks the Call CH every

5 seconds.

14-14
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ DR mode and a priority channel (Continued)

5. When a signal is received.

Example: In case of the Memory channel
• When “ON” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel, the
channel is automatically selected. Blinks
The “PRIO” icon blinks.
* The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan.

• When “Bell” is selected.

When a signal is received on the priority channel, Automatically selects the priority channel.
a beep sounds and the “PRIO” icon blinks on the
screen.
Blinks

Remains the DR mode.

14-15
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■DR mode scan and a priority channel

Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds, Example: Checks “145.800 MHz” every 5 seconds, dur-
during a DR mode scan. ing the DR mode scan

1. Set the priority channel Rotate [DIAL] to set the

receive frequency.
• In case of the VFO frequency
q Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode. Hold down
w Rotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency. for 1 second.
• In case of the Memory channel
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Memory channel you
Hold down [SCAN]
want to watch.
for 1 second.
• In case of the Bank channel
q Push [M/CALL] to select the Memory mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Bank channel you
want to watch.
How to select the Memory and Bank:
The DR mode scan starts.
z In the Memory mode, push [QUICK] .
x Push D-pad() to select “Bank Select,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• The Bank list is displayed.
c Push D-pad() to select a desired bank and
then push D-pad(Ent). Push [QUICK] .
• If “OFF” is selected, cancel the bank selection.
D-pad
(Ent)
Push D-pad() to
(�)
select, then push
D-pad(Ent).
• In case of the Call channel
q Push [M/CALL] one or more times to select
the Call channel mode.
w Rotate [DIAL] to select the Call channel you want Push D-pad() to
to watch. select, then push
D-pad(Ent).
2. Start the DR mode scan
q Hold down for 1 second to select the DR [DIAL]
mode.
w Hold down [SCAN] for 1 second.
• The DR mode scan starts.

3. Start the Priority scan

q Push [QUICK] .
w Push D-pad() to select “PRIO Watch,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
e Push D-pad() to select “ON” or “Bell.”
• ON : When a signal is received on the priority
channel, the channel is automatically se-
NOTE:
lected.
• You can start the priority scan (Step 3) before start-
• Bell : When a signal is received on the priority
ing the DR mode scan (Step 2).
channel, the “ ” icon is displayed in the
• Push [CLR] to cancel the Priority scan and the
VFO mode.
DR mode scan.
r Push D-pad(Ent) to start the Priority scan.
• The “PRIO” icon appears ☞☞Continued on the next page.
14-16
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ DR mode scan and a priority channel (Continued)

4. During the Priority scan Example: Checks the VFO frequency during the DR
mode scan.
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
during a DR mode scan. Appears Appears

Checks the VFO frequen-

Blinks cy every 5 seconds.

Example: Checks the M-CH “490” during the DR mode

scan.
Appears Appears

Checks the M-CH every 5

Blinks seconds.

Example: Checks the Bank CH “D06” during the DR

mode scan.
Appears Appears

Checks the M-CH every 5

Blinks seconds.

Example: Checks the Call CH “C3” during the DR mode

scan.
Appears Appears

Checks the Call CH every

Blinks 5 seconds.

14-17
 Previous view

14 PRIORITY WATCH

■■ DR mode scan and a priority channel (Continued)

5. When a signal is received. Example: In case of the Memory channel
• When “ON” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel, the Blinks
channel is automatically selected. The “PRIO” icon
blinks.
Push [CLR] to resume the priority scan. Push it
again to cancel the scan.
* The scan pause timer and resume settings are the
same as for a normal scan. Automatically selects the priority channel.

Blinks
• When “Bell” is selected.
When a signal is received on the priority channel,
a beep sounds and the “PRIO” icon blinks. The DR
mode scan resumes.

Remains the DR mode.

14-18
Previous view

Section 15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■ FM Repeater operation...................................... 15-2
DD Checking the repeater input signal. ............... 15-3
■■ Duplex operation................................................ 15-4
DD Setting the frequency offset........................... 15-4
DD Setting the duplex direction............................ 15-5
DD Duplex operation............................................ 15-5
■■ Off band indication............................................. 15-5
■■ Auto repeater function........................................ 15-6
DD Auto repeater setting...................................... 15-6
DD Frequency range and offset direction............. 15-6
■■ 1750 Hz tone...................................................... 15-7

15-1
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■FM Repeater operation Repeater

A repeater receives transmitted signals and retransmits 144.900 MHz 144.900 MHz
them on a different frequency. The transmit frequency
is shifted from the receive frequency by a preset fre-
quency offset. 145.500 MHz 145.500 MHz
In duplex operation, the transceiver’s frequency offset
is set to the same as that of the repeater. (p. 16-16)

qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.

wwPush [MODE] several times to select the FM
mode. Station A Station B
eeRotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency (repeater
Transmit frequency Receive frequency
output frequency).
• The frequency changes according to the preset tuning
steps. See the page 5-6 for details.
 nly USA and Korean versions have an Auto
O
Repeater function:
 When the function is turned ON, steps r and t
are not necessary.*
(Default for USA version : ON (DUP))
(Default for Korean version : ON)
 The Auto Repeater function can be turned OFF in
the Auto Repeater item of the MENU screen. Push [MODE] to
(MENU > Function > Auto Repeater) select the FM mode.
See page 16-66 for details.
rrSet the duplex offset direction. (p. 15-5)
• “DUP–” or “DUP+” appears.
• The frequency offset can be set in the “Offset Freq”
screen. (p. 15-4)
(MENU > DUP/TONE... > Offset Freq) Rotate [DIAL] to set the
ttPush [QUICK] , and push D-pad() to select receive frequency.
“TONE,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

yyPush
 D-pad() to select “TONE,” and then push D-
pad(Ent). Set the duplex offset di-
• “TONE” appears. rection and turn ON the
• The tone frequency can be set in the “Repeater Tone” repeater tone.
screen. 88.5 Hz is set by default. (p. 16-16)
(MENU > DUP/TONE... > Repeater Tone)
uuCommunicate in the normal way.

*For the USA version, the Auto repeater function turns ON

the duplex operation only. To turn ON the repeater tone, you
[DIAL]
should manually set as step t, or select “ON (DUP, TONE)”
in the Auto Repeater item of the MENU screen. (p. 16-66)

NOTE:
• The Auto repeater function uses the preset repeat-
er tone frequency and frequency offset. Depending
on the frequency offset value, the off band indica-
tion, “OFF,” appears on the display when [PTT] is
pushed, and transmit is inhibited. (p. 15-5)
• See Section 8 for details on accessing a D-STAR
repeater.
15-2
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■ FM Repeater operation (Continued)

DDChecking the repeater input signal

You can check whether the other station’s transmit sig-
nal can be received directly or not, by listening on the
repeater input frequency.

➥➥Hold down [SQL] to listen on the repeater input fre- While monitoring
quency.
• While monitoring, the TX/RX indicator lights green, and Hold
an S/RF meter dot blinks. down
• While monitoring, the displayed frequency automatically
[SQL]
changes to the transmit frequency (repeater input fre-
quency).
• When the other station’s signal can be directly received,
move to a non-repeater frequency and use simplex. (du-
plex OFF)

Blinks

15-3
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■Duplex operation
The Duplex operation shifts the transmit frequency
up or down from the receive frequency by an offset
amount.

DDSetting the frequency offset

qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
wwPush [MENU] .
eePush D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/
TONE...”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

rrPush D-pad() to select the “Offset Freq,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
ttRotate [DIAL] to set the frequency offset to be-
tween 0.000.00 and 59.99500 MHz, and then push
D-pad(Ent). (Setting example: 1.000.00 MHz)
• The selected tuning step in the VFO mode is used when
setting the frequency offset. The current frequency
• Pushing [V/MHz] toggles the tuning digit, as shown offset
below.
TS* 1 MHz 10 MHz
Rotate [DIAL], then
*The frequency changes according to the preset tuning
push D-pad(Ent).
steps. (p. 5-6)
yyPush [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen.

[DIAL]

Push [QUICK]
To reset to the default value.
Push [QUICK] in step t as described above, then
push D-pad(Ent) to reset to the default value.

NOTE:
• The frequency offset cannot be changed in the DR Push D-pad(Ent)
mode.
• The Auto repeater function uses the preset fre-
quency offset. Depending on the frequency offset
value, the off band indication, “OFF,” appears on
the display when [PTT] is pushed. (p. 15-5)

The current frequency

offset
15-4
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■ Duplex operation (Continued)

DDSetting the duplex direction
qqPush [V/MHz] to select the VFO mode.
wwRotate [DIAL] to set the operating frequency.
eePush [QUICK] .
rrPush D-pad() to select “DUP,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)
Push D-pad() to
ttPush D-pad() to select “DUP–” (negative offset) or select, then push
“DUP+” (positive offset), and then push D-pad(Ent) D-pad(Ent).
to save, and exit the Quick Menu screen.
• OFF : For simplex operation (the receive and transmit
frequencies are the same).
• DUP– : The transmit frequency shifts down from the re-
ceive frequency by the offset amount.
• DUP+ : The transmit frequency shifts up from the receive
frequency by the offset amount.

[DIAL] Push D-pad() to

select, then push
D-pad(Ent).

DDDuplex operation While monitoring

qqPush [MODE] several times to select the FM
mode.
wwHold down [SQL] to listen on the repeater input fre-
quency.
• The transmit frequency (repeater input frequency) ap- [SQL]
pears on the function display.
eeCommunicate in the normal way.

NOTE:
When the Auto repeater is ON, and the operating
frequency is set out of the repeater output frequency
range, the duplex is automatically cancelled. Blinks

■■Off band indication

If the transmit frequency is out of the amateur band, the
off band indication, “OFF,” appears on the display when
[PTT] is pushed. Check the frequency offset (p. 15-4) or
duplex direction (see above) in this case.

15-5
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■Auto repeater function

When the operating frequency falls within the repeater DDFrequency range and offset direction
output frequency range, the Auto Repeater function • U.S.A. version
can automatically sets the repeater settings (duplex FREQUENCY RANGE SHIFT DIRECTION
ON/OFF, duplex direction, tone encoder ON/OFF).
145.200–145.495 MHz “DUP–” is set
The Auto repeater function uses the preset repeater
tone frequency and frequency offset. 146.610–146.995 MHz “DUP–” is set
See page 16-16 for details of the setting.
147.000–147.395 MHz “DUP+” is set
442.000–444.995 MHz “DUP+” is set
447.000–449.995 MHz “DUP–” is set
• Korean version
FREQUENCY RANGE SHIFT DIRECTION
439.000–440.000 MHz “DUP–” is set
DDAuto repeater setting
qqPush [MENU] to enter the MENU screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”), Push [MENU] .
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Auto Repeater,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrRotate [DIAL] to select the Auto repeater setting.
U.S.A. version:
• OFF : The Auto repeater function is OFF.
• ON (DUP) : Turns ON only the duplex operation. Push D-pad() to
(Default) select, then push
• ON (DUP, TONE) : Turns ON the duplex operation and D-pad(Ent).
tone encoder
Korean version:
• OFF : The Auto repeater function is OFF.
• ON : Turns ON the duplex operation and tone encoder.
(Default)
ttPush [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU screen.

NOTE: When turned ON, the Auto repeater function

uses the preset repeater tone frequency and frequen- Push D-pad() to
cy offset. See page 16-16 for details of the setting. select, then push
D-pad(Ent).
For the U.S.A. and Korean versions:
When turned ON, the Auto repeater function has pri-
ority over the manual duplex setting. If the transmit
frequency changes after setting, the Auto repeater
function may have changed the duplex setting.
[DIAL]

15-6
 Previous view

15 REPEATER AND DUPLEX OPERATIONS

■■1750 Hz tone
To access most European repeaters, the transceiver
must transmit a 1750 Hz tone. For such European re-
peaters, do the following procedures.
• This tone can also be used as a ‘Call signal.’ Push [MENU] .

For only the ID-51E:

Push [PTT] briefly, then hold down [PTT] to transmit
a 1750 Hz tone burst signal.

qqPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DTMF/T-

CALL”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)
Push D-pad() to
wwPush D-pad() to select “DTMF Memory,” and then select, then push
push D-pad(Ent). D-pad(Ent).
eeRotate [DIAL] to select “T-CALL,” and then push
D-pad(Ent) to set.
rrPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
ttRotate [DIAL] to set the receive frequency (repeater
output frequency). Push D-pad() to
yySet the duplex offset direction. (p. 15-5) select, then push
• “DUP–” or “DUP+” appears. D-pad(Ent).
uuWhile holding down [PTT], push [SQL] to transmit a
1750 Hz tone signal.
• If “OFF BAND” appears, check the frequency offset or
shift direction. (pp. 15-4, 15-5)
• While transmitting, the displayed frequency automati-
cally changes to the transmit frequency (repeater input
frequency). Rotate [DIAL] to set the
iiHold down [SQL] to check whether the other sta- receive frequency.
tion’s transmit signal can be received directly or not,
by listening on the repeater input frequency.
• While monitoring, the TX/RX indicator lights green, and
the S/RF meter dot blinks.
• While monitoring, the displayed frequency automatically
changes to the transmit frequency (repeater input fre-
quency).
Set the duplex offset di-
• If you can hear the other station, you may want to change
to the Simplex mode and contact directly. rection.
ooPush [PTT] to transmit.
!0 Release [PTT] to receive.

[DIAL]
While holding down
[PTT], push [SQL] to
[PTT] transmit a 1750 Hz
[SQL] tone signal.

15-7
Previous view

Section 16 menu screen

■■ Menu item selection.......................................................... 16-2
DD Entering the Menu screen............................................. 16-3
■■ Menu items and Default settings....................................... 16-4
■■ DUP/TONE items............................................................ 16-16
■■ Scan items. ..................................................................... 16-18
■■ Voice Memo items........................................................... 16-22
■■ Voice TX items. ............................................................... 16-28
■■ Broadcast (BC) Radio items. .......................................... 16-30
■■ GPS items....................................................................... 16-32
■■ Call sign items................................................................. 16-48
■■ RX History items............................................................. 16-50
■■ DV Memory items............................................................ 16-52
■■ My Station items. ............................................................ 16-54
■■ DV Set items. .................................................................. 16-55
■■ SPEECH items................................................................ 16-59
■■ DTMF/T-CALL items........................................................ 16-61
■■ QSO/RX Log items. ........................................................ 16-62
■■ Function items................................................................. 16-65
■■ Display items................................................................... 16-72
■■ Sounds items. ................................................................. 16-78
■■ Time set items................................................................. 16-82
■■ SD Card items................................................................. 16-84
■■ Others items.................................................................... 16-85

16-1
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Menu item selection

The MENU system is used to program infrequently
changed values or function settings.
In addition to this page, see pages 16-4 through 16-
15 for details of each item’s options and their default
value.

NOTE: The Menu system is constructed in a tree

structure. You may go to the next tree level, or go
back a level, depending on the selected item.

Enters/ Goes back

Exits the a level
Menu
screen.
Return to
the default
setting

Moves selector up
Set
Goes to the Goes to the
previous level next level

Moves selector down

16-2
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Menu item selection (Continued)

DDEntering the Menu screen
Example: Set the Auto Power OFF function to “30 min.”

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Time Set”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
• If D-pad(E) is continuously held down, the items are
quickly scrolled.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Auto Power OFF,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush
 D-pad() to select “30min.”
ttPush [MENU] to save, and exit the Menu
screen.

To return to the de-

fault setting, push
[QUICK] in step
r to display “De-
fault,” and then push
D-pad(Ent).

Appears

16-3
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Menu items and Default settings

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

DUP/TONE... In this item, set the repeater duplex offset and the channel tone or code options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Offset Freq 0.000~0.600.00*~59.995 Sets the frequency offset for duplex (re-
peater) operation.

Repeater Tone 67.0~88.5~254.1 Selects the tone frequency used to ac-

cess the repeaters.

TSQL Freq 67.0~88.5~254.1 Selects the tone frequency for the Tone
squelch or the pocket beep function.
Tone Burst OFF or ON Turns the Tone Burst function ON or OFF.
When this setting is ON and you transmit
a signal which superimposes the CTCSS
tone or subaudible tone, the squelch tail
noise of FM mode is suppressed on the
RX side.
DTCS Code 023~754 Selects DTCS (both encoder/decoder)
codes for DTCS squelch or the pocket
beep function.
DTCS Polarity Both N, TN-RR, TR-RN or Both R Selects the DTCS polarity for the DTCS
squelch or the pocket beep function.
Digital Code 00~99 Selects the digital code for the Digital
Code squelch function.

* The default value may differ, depending on the frequency band (selected as the Main band before
entering the Menu screen) and the transceiver version.

Scan In this item, set the scan options.

RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Pause Timer 2sec~10sec~20sec or HOLD Selects the scan pause time. When re-
ceiving signals, the scan pauses accord-
ing to the scan pause timer.

Resume Timer 0sec~2sec~5sec or HOLD Selects the scan resume time from a pause
after the received signal disappears.

Temporary Skip Timer 5min, 10min or 15 min Selects the Temporary Skip Time. When
the time is set, specified frequencies are
skipped for this period during a scan.

Program Skip OFF or ON Turns the Program Skip Scan function ON

or OFF for a VFO mode scan.

Bank Link A:□

✔~Z:□
✔ Selects banks to be scanned during a
Bank Link Scan.

Program Link* Sets the link function for the program scan
edge channels.

* See page 16-20 for details of the preset values.

16-4
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Voice Memo In this item, set the TX/RX voice recording options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

QSO Recorder <<REC Start>>* Starts recording the received signal audio.
Play Files* PLAY FILES Plays or deletes the recorded audio.

Recorder Set REC Mode TX&RX or RX Only Selects to record the TX audio or not.
RX REC Condition Always or Squelch Auto Selects whether or not the squelch status
affects the RX voice audio recording.

File Split OFF or ON Selects whether or not to automatically

create a new file if transmission and re-
ception, or squelch status (open and
close) is switched.

PTT Auto REC OFF or ON Turns the PTT Automatic Recording func-
tion ON or OFF.
Player Set Skip Time 3sec, 5sec, 10sec or 30sec Sets the Skip time to rewind or forward the
recorded audio when you push the fast-re-
wind or fast-forward key during playback.

Voice Recorder Record* Starts recording the microphone audio.

Play Files* PLAY FILES Plays or deletes the recorded audio.

Recorder Set MIC Gain 1, 2, 3 or 4 Sets the microphone sensitivity to suit

your needs.
Player Set Skip Time 3sec, 5sec, 10sec or 30sec Sets the Skip time to rewind or forward the
recorded audio when you push the fast-re-
wind or fast-forward key during playback.

Records a voice audio to use the Auto

DV Auto Reply*
Reply function in the DV mode.

* Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.

Voice TX In this item, set the microphone voice recording options.

RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Record* Starts recording the microphone audio.

TX Set Repeat Time 1sec~5sec~15sec Sets the repeat interval. The transceiver
repeatedly transmits the recorded voice
audio at this interval.
TX Monitor OFF or ON The TX Monitor function outputs the TX
voice audio from the speaker during voice
transmission.
The transceiver transmits the recorded
<<Single TX>>*
voice audio only one time.
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the
<<Repeat TX>>*
recorded voice audio for a maximum of
10 minutes.

* Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
16-5
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
BC Radio In this item, set the Broadcast (BC) Radio options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

BC Radio Memory Shows the BC Radio memory contents.

BC Radio Set Auto Mute OFF, 0sec~2sec~10sec Sets the timer to automatically mute the
BC Radio audio.
FM Antenna External or Earphone Selects the desired antenna for FM.

Power Save (BC Radio) OFF or ON Turns the Power Save (BC Radio) func-
tion ON (to save battery power) or OFF.

<<BC Radio ON>>/<<BC Radio OFF>> Turns the BC Radio ON or OFF.

<<BC Radio Mode>> Selects the BC Radio Mode with the

transceiver in the Sleep mode.

16-6
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
GPS In this item, set the GPS options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

GPS Set GPS Select OFF, Internal GPS, External GPS Selects the GPS receiver that the trans-
or Manual ceiver receives its position data from.
Power Save (Internal GPS) OFF, 1min, 2min, 4min, 8min or Auto Selects the internal GPS receiver power
save function.
Manual Position Manually enter your current position.

GPS Indicator OFF or ON Turns the GPS indicator ON or OFF.

Position Format ddd˚mm.mm' or ddd˚mm'ss" Selects position format to display the po-
sition.
Altitude/Distance Units m or ft/ml Selects units to display the distance and
altitude.
Speed Units km/h, mph or knots Selects units to display the speed.

GPS Out OFF or ON Turns the output of GPS information from

the internal GPS receiver to the [DATA]
jack ON or OFF.

GPS Information Displays the received GPS information.

GPS Position Displays your position, RX station, GPS
memory and Alarm positions.
GPS Memory Shows the GPS memory contents.
GPS Alarm Alarm Select OFF, RX, Group or Memory Select the target for the GPS alarm func-
tion.
Alarm Area (Group) 0’05”/0.08’~0’15”/0.25’~ Enter the GPS alarm active range.
59’59”/59.99’
Alarm Area (RX/Memory) Limited, Extended or Both Select the GPS alarm active range.

GPS Logger* GPS Logger OFF or ON Turns the GPS logger function ON or OFF,
to store your route as you move.
Record Interval 1sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec or 60sec Selects the GPS Logger function record
interval.
<<GPS Logger Only>> Turns ON the GPS logger function with
the transceiver in the Sleep mode.

*B
 e sure to insert the microSD card into the
transceiver before selecting these items.

(Continued on the next page.)

16-7
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
GPS (Continued) In this item, set the GPS options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

GPS TX Mode Select GPS or DPS-A as the data mode

when transmitting GPS data, or select OFF.
OFF Turns OFF the GPS TX function.

GPS(DV-G) GPS Sentence RMC, GGA, GLL, VTG, GSA or GSV Transmits position data in selected GPS
sentences.
GPS Message Enter a GPS message to be transmitted.

GPS-A(DV-A) Unproto Address API51,DSTAR* Enters an unproto address, or keep the

default.
Data Extension OFF or Course/Speed Selects whether to transmit the course
and speed data or not.
Time Stamp OFF, DHM or HMS Selects a format to transmit the current
UTC time as a time stamp.
Altitude OFF or ON Turns the altitude transmit option ON or
OFF.
GPS-A Symbol 1:Person, 2:Bicycle, 3:Car or 4:House QTH (VHF) Selects a desired GPS-A Symbol to
transmit.
SSID - - -, (-0), -1~-15 or -A~-Z Selects the APRS® call sign SSID.

Comment Enters a comment to transmit.

GPS Auto TX OFF, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec, 1min, 3min, 5min, 10min or 30min Selects a time option for the GPS auto-
matic transmission function.

16-8
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Call Sign In this item, set and display the call signs used in the DV mode. DESCRIPTIONS
Displays the operating call signs.
UR: CQCQCQ, R1: --------, R2: --------, MY: --------
Sets the operating call signs according to the
type of call you want to make.

RX History This item displays the received call history in the DV mode.
RX01: Displays the calls your transceiver received.

DV Memory This item stores Your Call signs or repeater information to use in the DV mode.

Your Call Sign Blank Stores station call signs.

Add or edit a call sign.
Repeater List* 01:~25: Stores repeater information.
Add or edit a repeater information.

* See page 9-44 for details of the preloaded data.

NOTE: The repeater list described on this manual may differ from your preloaded list.

My Station This item stores your own call sign to use in the DV mode.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

My Call Sign 1:~6: Stores your own call signs.

Select or edit a call sign to use in the DV mode.
TX Message 1:~5: or OFF Stores TX Messages.
Select or edit TX Message to use in the DV
mode.

16-9
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
DV Set In this item, set infrequently changed values or functions in the DV mode.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Tone Control RX Bass Cut, Normal or Boost Sets the DV mode received audio bass filter
level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
RX Treble Cut, Normal or Boost Sets the DV mode received audio treble filter
level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
RX Bass Boost OFF or ON Turns the DV mode received audio Bass Boost
function ON or OFF
TX Bass Cut, Normal or Boost Sets the DV mode transmit audio bass filter
level to Cut, Normal or Boost.

TX Treble Cut, Normal or Boost Sets the DV mode transmit audio treble filter
level to Cut, Normal or Boost.

Auto Reply OFF, ON, Voice or Position Selects the Automatic Reply function between
ON, OFF, Voice and Position.
DV Data TX PTT or Auto Selects manually or automatically to transmit
low speed data.
Digital Monitor Auto, Digital or Analog Selects the DV mode RX monitoring when
[SQL] is held down.
Digital Repeater Set OFF or ON Turns the digital repeater setting function ON
or OFF. This function is usable in any DV mode
except the DR mode.
RX Call Sign Write OFF or Auto Turns the RX call sign automatic write function
ON or OFF. This function is usable in any DV
mode except the DR mode.
RX Repeater Write OFF or Auto Turns the repeater call sign automatic write
function ON or OFF. This function is usable in
any DV mode except the DR mode.
DV Auto Detect OFF or ON Turns the DV mode automatic detect function
ON or OFF.
RX Record (RPT) ALL or Latest Only The transceiver can record the data of up to 50
individual calls.
BK OFF or ON Turns the BK (Break-in) function ON or OFF.
The BK function allows you to break into a con-
versation between two stations with call sign
squelch enabled.
EMR OFF or ON Turns the EMR (Enhanced Monitor Request)
communication mode ON or OFF.
After turning OFF the transceiver, the EMR
mode will be cancelled.
EMR AF Level 0~19~39 Sets the audio output level when an EMR mode
signal is received.

16-10
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

SPEECH In this item, set the Speech functions.

RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

RX Call Sign SPEECH OFF, ON (Kerchunk) or ON (All) Selects the RX call sign speech function op-
tion while ON, or turn it OFF.
RX>CS SPEECH OFF or ON Turns the RX>CS Speech function ON or
OFF.

DIAL SPEECH OFF or ON Turn the Dial Speech function ON or OFF.

MODE SPEECH OFF or ON Turn the Operating Mode Speech function ON

or OFF.

SPEECH Language English or Japanese Selects either English or Japanese as the de-
sired speech language.
Alphabet Normal or Phonetic Code Selects the alphabet character announcement
type.

SPEECH Speed Slow or Fast Selects Slow or Fast speech speed

SPEECH Level 0~7~9 Sets the volume level for the voice synthe-
sizer.

DTMF/T-CALL In this item, set the DTMF Memory functions.

DTMF Memory T-CALL, d0:~d9:, dA:~dD:, d*: or d#: Shows a list of the DTMF memory channels.
The DTMF memory can store up to 24-digit
DTMF code.
DTMF Speed 100ms, 200ms, 300ms or 500ms Selects the DTMF transfer speed.

QSO/RX Log In this item, set the QSO/RX History Log options.

QSO Log*1 OFF or ON Selects to make a communication log on the

microSD card, or not.

RX History Log*1 OFF or ON Selects to make a DV mode's receive history

log on the microSD card, or not.
CSV Format

Separator/Decimal Sep [,] Dec [.]*2, Sep [;] Dec [.] or Sep [;] Dec [,] Selects the separator and the decimal charac-
ter for the CSV format.

Date yyyy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yyyy*2 or dd/mm/yyyy Selects the date format.

*1 Be sure to insert the microSD card into the

transceiver before selecting these items.
*2 The default value may differ, depending on the
transceiver version.

16-11
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Function In this item, set other options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Power Save OFF, Auto (Short), Auto (Middle) or Auto Selects the Power Save options to re-
(Long) duce current drain and conserve bat-
tery power.
Monitor Push or Hold Selects the [SQL] monitor function
method.
Dial Speed-UP OFF or ON Turns the dial speed acceleration ON
or OFF.
Auto Repeater OFF or ON (DUP), ON (DUP,TONE) Turns the Auto Repeater function ON
or OFF.
Remote MIC Key

During RX/Standby [A]:BAND [B]:VFO/MR [J]:UP [K]:DOWN Selects the key function to be used
while receiving or in the standby mode.
During TX [A]:T-CALL [B]:– [J]:– [K]:– Selects the key functions to be used
while transmitting.
Key Lock Normal, No SQL, No VOL or ALL Selects the key lock type when the Key
Lock function is turned ON.
PTT Lock OFF or ON Turns the PTT Lock function ON or
OFF.
Busy Lockout OFF or ON Turns the Busy Lockout function ON or
OFF.
Time-Out Timer OFF, 1min, 3min, 5min, 10min, 15min or Selects the Time-Out Timer time op-
30min tions.

Active Band Single or All Allows continuous frequency selection

across all bands by rotating [DIAL].

MIC Gain (Internal) 1~2~4 Sets the internal microphone sensitiv-

ity to suit your preference.
MIC Gain (External) 1~2~4 Sets the external microphone sensitiv-
ity to suit your preference.
Data Speed 4800bps or 9600bps Selects the data transmission speed for
low-speed communication, or between
the [DATA] jack and external modules
like a GPS receiver, and so on.
VOX VOX OFF or ON Turns the VOX function ON or OFF.
VOX Level 1~5~10 or OFF Sets the VOX gain level.
VOX Delay 0.5sec, 1.0sec, 1.5sec, 2.0sec, 2.5sec or Sets the VOX Delay time.
3.0sec
VOX Time-Out Timer OFF, 1min, 2min, 3min, 4min, 5min, 10min Sets the VOX Time-Out Timer to pre-
or 15min vent an accidental prolonged transmis-
sion.
Headset Select HS-95 or Other Selects the headset type to be used for
the VOX function to limit the maximum
audio output level to protect the head-
set speaker.
CI-V CI-V Address 01~86~DF Sets the transceiver's unique CI-V
hexadecimal address code.
CI-V Baud Rate 300, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200 or Auto Sets the CI-V code transfer speed.
CI-V Transceive OFF or ON Turns the CI-V Transceive function ON
or OFF.
16-12
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Function (Continued) In this item, set other options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Heterodyne Normal or Reverse Sets the 1st Local Oscillator frequen-

cy.
Charging (Power ON) OFF or ON When the external DC power cable
is connected, this function enables
charging the battery even with the
power ON.

Display In this item, set the Display options.

RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Backlight OFF, ON, Auto or Auto (DC IN:ON) Selects the transceiver backlight option.
Backlight Timer 5sec or 10sec Selects the backlight ON time period.
LCD Dimmer Bright or Dark Selects the LCD backlight brightness level
LCD Contrast 1~8~16 Sets the contrast level of the LCD.
Busy LED OFF or ON Turns the TX/RX indicator ON or OFF.
RX Call Sign OFF, Auto or Auto (RX Hold) Selects the call sign display option when
receiving a call.
RX Message OFF or Auto Selects to display and scroll a received
message when receiving a call, or not.
Reply Position Display OFF or ON Selects to display the caller's position data
when the data is included in the Auto Re-
ply signal, or not.

DV RX Backlight OFF or ON Turns the DV RX Backlight function ON or

OFF.
TX Call Sign OFF, Your Call Sign or My Call Sign Selects whether or not to display My or
Your call sign while transmitting.
Scroll Speed Slow or Fast Selects the scrolling speed of the mes-
sage, call sign, or other text.
Opening Message OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the open-
ing message at power ON.
Voltage (Power ON) OFF or ON Selects whether or not to display the volt-
age of the battery or external DC power
source at power ON.

Display Language English or Japanese Selects the display language in the DR

mode or Menu mode. When "English" is
selected in System Language, this setting
will disappear.

System Language English or Japanese Selects English or Japanese as the sys-

tem language of the transceiver.

16-13
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Sounds In this item, set the Sound options.
RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Volume Select All, BC Radio Separate or Separate Selects to adjust the audio output level of
all bands together, all separately, or just
the BC Radio separately.
BC Radio Level –5~0~+5 Sets the initial audio output level difference
between the BC Radio and the A and B
bands when “All” is set in “Volume Select.”
Earphone Mode OFF or ON Turns the Earphone mode ON or OFF.
Beep Level 0~3~9 Sets the beep output level.
Beep/Vol Level Link OFF or ON Selects whether or not the beep output level
can be adjusted by the [VOL] control.
Key-Touch Beep OFF or ON Turns the confirmation beep tones when
key is pushed, ON or OFF.
Home CH Beep OFF or ON Turns the Home CH Beep ON or OFF.
Band Edge Beep OFF or ON Turns the Band edge beep ON or OFF.
Scan Stop Beep OFF or ON Turns the scan stop beep ON or OFF.
Standby Beep OFF, ON or ON (to me:High Tone) Turns the standby beep function in the DV
mode ON or OFF.
Sub Band Mute OFF, Mute, Beep or Mute & Beep Selects to mute the SUB band audio signal
while receiving on the MAIN band, and/or
sound a beep when a signal disappears
on the SUB band.
Scope AF Output OFF or ON Selects the audio output option during a
sweep.

Time Set In this item, set the Time options.

Date/Time Sets the current date and time.

GPS Time Correct OFF or Auto Sets to automatically correct the time us-
ing a GPS signal.
UTC Offset –14:00~±0:00~+14:00 Enters the time difference between UTC
and the local time.
Auto Power OFF OFF, 30min, 60min, 90min or 120min Turns the Auto power OFF function ON or
OFF.

SD Card* In this item, set the microSD card options.

RANGE OR VALUE (Default is shown in bold) DESCRIPTIONS

Load Setting File selection ALL, Except My Station, Loads the settings file to the transceiver.
Repeater List Only

Save Setting <<New File>> Saves the settings as a new file.

File selection Saves the settings in a selected file.

SD Card Info Displays the free space and remaining re-

cording time of the card.
Format Formats the card.
Unmount Unmounts the card.

* Be sure to insert the microSD card into the

transceiver before selecting these items.
16-14
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Menu items and Default settings (Continued)

NOTE: The default settings shown below are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Others In this item, set the
DESCRIPTIONS

Information Voltage Shows the battery voltage.

Version Shows the transceiver’s firmware version
number.
Clone Clone Mode Reads or writes the CS-51 data from or
to the PC, and/or to receive data from a
Master transceiver.
Clone Master Mode Writes your ID-51A/E (Master) data to an-
other ID-51A/E (Sub).
Reset Partial Reset Returns all settings to their defaults, with-
out clearing the memory contents, call
sign memories or repeater lists.
Clears all programming and memories,
All Reset
and return all settings to their defaults.

16-15
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■DUP/TONE items
Offset frequency (Default: 0.600.00*)
DUP/TONE... > Offset Freq (Offset Freq)
Set the frequency offset for duplex (repeater) operation to between 0 and
59.99500 MHz.

• The selected tuning step in the VFO mode is used when setting the offset.
• Push [V/MHz] to select 1 MHz or 10 MHz steps.
• The duplex shift direction (DUP-/DUP+) is set in the QUICK MENU screen.
(p. 15-5)

*The default value may differ, depending on the frequency band (selected
as the Main band before entering the Menu screen) and the transceiver
version.

Repeater Tone (Default: 88.5)

DUP/TONE... > Repeater Tone (Repeater Tone)
Select subaudible tone frequencies, for repeater access and other functions.
50 tone frequencies (67.0–254.1 Hz) are selectable.

TSQL Freq (Default: 88.5)

DUP/TONE... > TSQL Freq (TSQL Freq)
Select the tone frequency for the tone squelch or pocket beep. 50 frequen-
cies (67.0–254.1 Hz) are selectable.

• Selectable repeater tone/tone squelch frequencies (Unit: Hz)

67.0 085.4 107.2 136.5 165.5 186.2 210.7 254.1
69.3 088.5 110.9 141.3 167.9 189.9 218.1
71.9 091.5 114.8 146.2 171.3 192.8 225.7
74.4 094.8 118.8 151.4 173.8 196.6 229.1
77.0 097.4 123.0 156.7 177.3 199.5 233.6
79.7 100.0 127.3 159.8 179.9 203.5 241.8
82.5 103.5 131.8 162.2 183.5 206.5 250.3

The transceiver has 50 tone frequencies and consequently their spacing is

narrow compared with units having 38 tones. Therefore, some tone fre-
quencies may receive interference from adjacent tone frequencies.

16-16
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ DUP/TONE items (Continued)

Tone Burst (Default: OFF)

DUP/TONE... > Tone Burst (Tone Burst)
Turn the Tone Burst function ON or OFF in the FM mode when using tone
squelch.

• OFF : When you transmit a signal that superimposes the CTCSS tone, the
other station may hear a short burst of noise from their receiver, just
after you stop transmitting.
• ON : When you transmit a signal that superimposes the CTCSS tone, the func-
tion mutes the noise from being heard in the other station’s receiver.

DTCS Code (Default: 023)

DUP/TONE... > DTCS Code (DTCS Code)
Select a DTCS (both encoder/decoder) code for the DTCS squelch. A total of
104 codes (023–754) are selectable.
• Selectable DTCS codes
023 072 152 244 311 412 466 631
025 073 155 245 315 413 503 632
026 074 156 246 325 423 506 654
031 114 162 251 331 431 516 662
032 115 165 252 332 432 523 664
036 116 172 255 343 445 526 703
043 122 174 261 346 446 532 712
047 125 205 263 351 452 546 723
051 131 212 265 356 454 565 731
053 132 223 266 364 455 606 732
054 134 225 271 365 462 612 734
065 143 226 274 371 464 624 743
071 145 243 306 411 465 627 754

DTCS Polarity (Default: Both N)

DUP/TONE... > DTCS Polarity (DTCS Polarity)
Select the DTCS polarity to use for transmitting and receiving.

• Both N : Normal polarity is used for both TX and RX.

• TN-RR : Normal polarity is used for TX; Reverse polarity for RX.
• TR-RN : Reverse polarity is used for TX; Normal polarity for RX.
• Both R : Reverse polarity is used for both TX and RX.

DTCS code’s polarity for transmitting or receiving can be independently set

with this item.

Digital Code (Default: 00)

DUP/TONE... > Digital Code (Digital Code)
Select the desired digital code for digital code squelch.
A total of 100 codes (00–99) are selectable.

16-17
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Scan items
Pause Timer (Default: 10sec)
Scan > Pause Timer (Pause Timer)
Select the scan Pause time. When receiving a signal, the scan pauses for the
scan Pause timer Time.

• 2 to 20sec : When a signal is received, the scan pauses for 2 to 20 seconds

(set in 2 seconds steps).
• HOLD : When receiving a signal, the scan pauses until it disappears.

Resume Timer (Default: 2sec)

Scan > Resume Timer (Resume Timer)
Select the scan Resume Timer time.
When a received signal disappears, the scan resumes according to the scan
Resume Timer setting.

• 0sec : The scan resumes immediately after the signal disappears.

• 1 to 5sec : The scan resumes 1 to 5 seconds after the signal disappears.
• HOLD : The scan remains paused for the Pause Timer setting, even if
the signal disappears.

NOTE: Rotate [DIAL] to resume the scan.

The Resume Timer must be set shorter than the Pause Timer, otherwise
this timer does not work properly.

Temporary Skip Timer (Default: 5min)

Scan > Temporary Skip Timer (Temporary Skip Timer)
Set the Temporary Skip Timer to 5, 10 or 15 minutes.
When the time is set, the specified frequencies are skipped for this set period
during a scan.

16-18
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Scan items (Continued)

Program Skip (Default: ON)

Scan > Program Skip (Program Skip)
Turn the Program Skip Scan function ON or OFF for a VFO mode scan.
This function enables the transceiver to skip the unwanted frequencies or
channels that inconveniently stop scanning.
Set the unwanted frequencies or channels to “PSKIP” in the Memory Chan-
nel screen.

• OFF : The transceiver scans all frequencies without skipping.

• ON : The transceiver does not scan frequencies set as “PSKIP” frequen-
cies.

When the skip setting is ON “PSKIP” appears on the channel number.

Bank Link (Default: A:

✔ – Z:
✔)
Scan > Bank Link (Bank Link)
Select banks to be scanned during a Bank Link Scan.
The Bank Link function scans all channels in the selected banks.
Select a desired bank, A to Z, and then push D-pad(Ent) to turn the link ON
or OFF.

Set Bank A to OFF.

16-19
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Scan items (Continued)

Program Link (Default: Refer to the diagram below)

Scan > Program Link (Program Link)
This item sets the link function for more than two pair of Program Scan Edge
channels to be sequentially scanned during the Program Link Scan.
The link function scans all frequencies in the scan range.

Default settings of the Program Link

The Program Scan Edge channels “01” and “02” are set in the Program Link
number “0” as the Default.
Program Link 0 01144.000−148.000
Edit Name 02420.000−450.000

1
Blank

...
9

Program Link number (09) Program Scan Edge channel

• The Program Link number screen shows the frequency range. (The scan edge fre-
quency may differ, depending on the transceiver version.)
•A  link setting can be added when more than two pairs of Program Scan Edge chan-
nels are programmed. (p. 13-2)

Push

Program Link number screen

NOTE: The “Add” item will not be displayed when only one pair of pro-
grammed scan edge channels are programmed, or no programmed scan
channel (00 to 24) is left to add to the selected link channel.

Adding a Scan Edge channel to the Program Link

qqPush
 D-pad() to select a Program Link number between 0 and 9, where you
wish to add a Scan Edge channel, and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

wwPush [QUICK] .
eePush D-pad() to select “Add,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

rrPush D-pad() to select a programmed scan number you wish to assign

to the selected link channel, and then push D-pad(Ent).
 (For example: 00: 144.000-450.000)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen.

16-20
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Scan items (Continued)

Deleting the link channel

qqPush D-pad() to select the programmed scan link number that the chan-
nel you wish to delete is assigned to, and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

wwPush D-pad() to select programmed scan number you wish to delete.

 (For example: 01: 144.000-450.000)
eePush [QUICK] .
rrPush D-pad() to select “Delete,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• The channel is deleted.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the Menu screen.

Program scan link name programming

qqPush D-pad() to select a program scan link number between 0 and 9.
wwPush [QUICK] .

eePush D-pad(Ent) to enter the name edit mode.

rrRotate [DIAL] to select the first character of the name you wish to program.
 (For example: A)
• The selected digit blinks.
•P  ush D-pad() to move the cursor backward or for-
ward.
• While selecting a character, push [QUICK] to
change the character to an upper case or lower case
letter.
• While selecting a digit, push [QUICK] to open
the input mode selection window.
• A space can be selected in any input mode selected.
•R  otate [DIAL] counter clockwise to enter a space. Selected character type
•P  ush [CLR] to delete the selected character,
or hold down [CLR] to continuously delete the
characters, first to the right, and then to the left of the
cursor.
•S  ee page 2-7 for programming details.
ttPush
 D-pad() to move the cursor to the second digit.

yyRepeat steps r and t to enter a name of up to 16 characters, including

spaces. (For example: Area 5 D-Star )

uuAfter entering the name, push D-pad(Ent) to save.

iiPush [MENU] to exit the [MENU] screen.

16-21
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Voice Memo items

<<REC Start>>
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > <<REC Start>>
Push D-pad() to select “<<REC Start>>,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• “Recording started. ” appears and voice recording starts.
“<<REC Stop>>” item is displayed while recording. To stop recording, push
D-pad(Ent).
• Be sure to insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting
these items.
•O nce recording has started, the recording will continue, even the trans-
ceiver is rebooted.
To stop the recording, select “<<REC Stop>> ” and then push D-pad(Ent).

Play Files
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files (PLAY FILES)
Performs the following steps to play back the recorded audio on the microSD
card.
Push D-pad(Ent), and folders on the microSD card are displayed.
• These folders contain the stored files.

Be sure to insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting

these items.

Playing back
qqPush D-pad() to select the folder that includes the desired file to play
back, and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

wwPush D-pad() to select the file to play back, and then push D-pad(Ent).

• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed and the selected file is played back.
• See “Operation while playing back” for forwording or rewinding. (p. 11-6)
eePush [MENU] or [CLR] to stop the playback.
• Return to the file list screen.
16-22
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

NOTE:
• The folder name is automatically created, as shown in the example be-
low: Recording date : 2012/9/1
Folder name : 20120901
• The file name is automatically created, as shown in the example below:
Recording date : 2012/9/1 15:30:00
File name : 20120901_153000
• The voice audio is recorded onto a microSD card, and saved in the “wav”
format.
The recorded voice audio can also be played back with a PC.
The extension, “wav,” is not displayed on the transceiver’s screen.

REC Mode (Default: TX&RX)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > REC Mode (REC Mode)
Records both the transmitted and received audio as the default setting.
• TX&RX : Records both the transmitted and received voice audio.
• RX Only : Records only the received voice audio.

When transmitted while recording

When “OFF” is selected in File Split, the recording is paused. After finishing
the transmission, the recording resumes.
When “ON” is selected in File Split, a new file is automatically created, and
the transmitted voice audio is recorded into the new one.

RX REC Condition (Default: Squelch Auto)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > RX REC Condition (RX REC
Condition)
Select whether or not the squelch status affects the RX voice audio record-
ing.
• Always : The transceiver always records the RX voice audio regard-
less of the squelch status.
• Squelch Auto : The transceiver records the RX voice audio only when a
signal is received (the squelch is opened).
When the squelch closes while recording, the recording will
continue for 2 seconds, and then pause.

When “ON” is selected in File Split, and if the squelch either opens or
closes while recording, a new file is automatically created.

16-23
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

File Split (Default: ON)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > File Split (File Split)
Turn the File Split function ON or OFF.
• OFF : When the recording starts, a new file is automatically created in the
folder of the microSD card. The voice audio is continuously recorded
into the file, even if transmission and reception, or the squelch status
(open and close) is switched.
If the file size exceeds 2 GB, a new file is automatically created in the
same folder, and the voice audio is recorded there.
• ON : When the recording starts, a new file is automatically created in the
folder of the microSD card. During recording, and if transmission and
reception, or squelch status (open and close) is switched, a new file
is automatically created in the same folder, and the voice audio is
saved into the new one.

PTT Auto REC (Default: OFF)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > PTT Auto REC (PTT Auto
REC)
Turn the PTT Automatic Recording function ON or OFF.
The transmission from the external speaker microphone, VOX function and
CI-V command also starts recording.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : The recording automatically starts when [PTT] is pushed.
The recording will stop when:
• No signal is transmitted for 10 seconds after releasing [PTT].
• No signal is received for 10 seconds after releasing [PTT].
• Frequency or operating mode is changed after releasing [PTT].

Skip Time (Default: 10sec)

Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Player Set > Skip Time (Skip Time)
Select the SkipTimer to 3, 5, 10 or 30 seconds to rewind or skip forward for
this set period when you push the fast-rewind or fast-forward key while play-
ing the recorded voice audio.
•S
 ee “Operation while playing back” for forwording or rewinding operation. (p. 11-6)

Record
Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Record (VOICE RECORDER)
The microphone audio can be recorded onto a microSD card, and saved in
the “wav” format.
While recording a QSO voice audio, this function is disabled.
The QSO voice audio (p. 11-2) and BC radio audio cannot be recorded.

Be sure to insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting

these items.

16-24
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

Record (Continued)
qqPush [PTT] to start recording.
• “Recording” appears and the microphone audio recording starts.

wwPush [PTT] again to stop.

Play Files
Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Play Files (PLAY FILES)
➥➥Push D-pad(Ent), and folders on the microSD card are displayed.
• These folders contain the stored files.
Be sure to insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting
these items.

Do the following steps to play back the recorded audio onto the microSD
card.
Playing back
qqPush D-pad() to select the folder that includes the desired file to play
back, and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

wwPush D-pad() to select the file to play back, and then push D-pad(Ent).

• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed and the selected file is played back.
• See “Operation while playing back” for forwording or rewinding. (p. 11-6)
eePush [MENU] or [CLR] to stop the playback.
• Return to the file list screen.

16-25
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

MIC Gain (Default: 3)

Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Recorder Set > MIC Gain (MIC Gain)
Set the internal microphone sensitivity to between 1 (minimum sensitivity)
and 4 (maximum sensitivity), to suit your needs.
Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to your voice.

Skip Time (Default: 10sec)

Voice Memo > Voice Recorder > Player Set > Skip Time (Skip Time)
Set the Skip Time to 3, 5, 10 or 30 seconds to rewind or skip forward for this
set period when you push the fast-rewind or fast-forward key while playing
the recorded voice audio.
•S
 ee “Operation while playing back” for forwording or rewinding operation. (p. 11-6)

16-26
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Voice Memo items (Continued)

DV Auto Reply
Voice Memo > DV Auto Reply (DV AUTO REPLY)
Up to 10 seconds of audio can be recorded for the automatic reply function
(p. 9-11).

Be sure to insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting this
item.

qqWhile pushing and holding [PTT], speak into the microphone at a normal
voice level.
• DO NOT hold the transceiver too close to your mouth or speak too loudly. This
may distort your speech.

wwThe recording stops after 10 second or when [PTT] is released.

NOTE: The time display is different, as shown below.

No audio was recorded (No au- While recording (Recording

dio file is saved.) time/Recordable time)

Recorded time While playing back (Playback

(Recording stopped) time/Recorded time)

16-27
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Voice TX items
Record
Voice TX > Record (VOICE TX RECORD)
Up to 1 minute of audio can be recorded onto a microSD card for voice trans-
mission. (p. 17-3)
While recording a QSO voice audio, this function is disabled.

Be sure to insert a microSD card into the transceiver before selecting

these items.

qqWhile holding down [PTT], speak at a normal voice level.

• DO NOT hold the transceiver too close to your mouth or speak too loudly. This
may distort your speech.

wwThe recording stops after 10 second or when [PTT] is released.

NOTE: The time display is different, as shown below.

No audio was recorded (No au- While recording (Recording

dio file is saved.) time/Recordable time)

Recorded time While playing back (Playback

(Recording stopped) time/Recorded time)

16-28
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Voice TX items (Continued)

Repeat Time (Default: 5sec)

Voice TX > TX Set > Repeat Time (Repeat Time)
Set the repeat interval to between 1 and 15 seconds (in 1 second steps).
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded voice audio at this inter-
val.

NOTE:
The recorded voice audio is repeatedly transmitted for up to 10 minutes.
Even if 10 minutes passes while transmitting, the complete voice audio is
transmitted.

TX Monitor (Default: ON)

Voice TX > TX Set > TX Monitor (TX Monitor)
Turn the TX Monitor function ON or OFF.

• OFF : The TX voice audio is not heard from the speaker.

• ON : The TX voice audio is heard from the speaker.

<<Single TX>>
Voice TX > TX Set > <<Single TX>>
The transceiver transmits the recorded voice audio once.
• To cancel the voice transmission, push [CLR] .

✓✓ Convenient!
You can transmit the recorded voice audio also from the QUICK MENU
screen. (p. 17-3)

<<Repeat TX>>
Voice TX > TX Set > <<Repeat TX>>
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded voice audio for up to 10
minutes at the specified interval in the Repeat Time item.
• To cancel the voice transmission, push [CLR] .

✓✓ Convenient!
You can transmit the recorded voice audio also from the QUICK MENU
screen. (p. 17-3)

NOTE:
• The recorded voice audio is repeatedly transmitted for up to 10 minutes.
Even if 10 minutes passes while transmitting, the complete voice audio
is transmitted.
• One of the following steps will cancel the transmission.
- Push [PTT].
- Turn OFF the power, then turn it ON again.
- Push any key (except for [POWER]).
- Rotate [DIAL].

16-29
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Broadcast (BC) Radio items

BC Radio Memory
BC Radio > BC Radio Memory (BC RADIO MEMORY)
A total of 26 banks are selectable for BC Radio Memory.
You can assign up to 50 BC Radio memory channels (combined FM and AM)
to each bank, for easy memory management. (A maximum of 500 memories
can be assigned to the BC Radio Memory.)

The display of the BC Radio memory

A to Z : Bank Name Shows the banks in the BC Radio memory.
➥ FM BC Radio memories for FM.
➥ AM BC Radio memories for AM.
In the BC radio bank list, push [QUICK] to edit the selected bank name.
(p. 6-9)

BC Radio memory channels

The name of a BC Radio memory channel
NAME Enter a name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters for each
BC Radio memory channel.
BANK The bank letter and the name of the bank
Programmed frequency
For FM: Between 76.0* and 108.0 MHz
FREQUENCY For AM: Between 520 and 1710 kHz
*The programmable frequency range differs, according to
the transceiver's version.
Shows the skip status. The Skip channel does not appear
SKIP
in the BC Radio memory.

Auto Mute (Default: 2sec)

BC Radio > BC Radio Set > Auto Mute (Auto Mute)
Set the Auto Mute timer to between 0 and 10 seconds (in 1 second steps),
or OFF.

• OFF : Even if the transceiver receives a signal on the A band or B

band while listening to the BC Radio, the BC Radio audio is
not muted.
When the transceiver transmits on the A band or B band while
listening to the BC Radio, the BC Radio audio is muted.
• 0 to 10sec : When the transceiver transmits or receives on the A band or
B band while listening to the BC Radio, the BC Radio audio is
automatically muted. After transmitting or receiving, the Auto
Mute timer starts. After the timer period ends, you can listen to
the BC Radio.
16-30
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ BC Radio items (Continued)

FM Antenna (Default: External)

BC Radio > BC Radio Set > FM Antenna (FM Antenna)
Select the desired antenna for FM radio.

• External : The connected antenna is used as the antenna.

• Earphone : The earphone cable antenna is used as the antenna.

Power Save (BC Radio) (Default: ON)

BC Radio > BC Radio Set > Power Save (BC Radio) (Power Save (BC Ra-
dio))
Set the power save function to reduce current drain and conserve battery
power when no radio signal is received.

• OFF : The power save function is OFF.

• ON : When the BC Radio is ON, and when no signal is received for 5 sec-
onds, this function is activated in a 1:3 ratio (300 milliseconds: 900
milliseconds) during FM mode, or 1:1 ratio (2000 milliseconds: 2000
milliseconds) during AM mode.

NOTE: This function is disabled when the external power supply is used.

<<BC Radio ON>>

BC Radio > <<BC Radio ON>>
Turn ON the BC Radio.
When the transceiver receives 2 amateur bands on the MAIN band and SUB
band, you can still listen to the Broadcast (BC) Radio.
When the BC Radio is ON, <<BC Radio OFF>> appears on the BC RADIO
screen. To turn OFF the BC Radio, select <<BC Radio OFF>>.
• In the QUICK MENU screen, selecting <<BC Radio OFF>> also turns OFF the BC
Radio.

<<BC Radio Mode>>

BC Radio > <<BC Radio Mode>>
The transceiver switches into an exclusive BC Radio mode where only the
BC Radio functions.
While in the BC Radio Mode, <<Normal Mode>> appears on the BC RADIO
screen. To exit from the BC Radio mode, select <<Normal Mode>>.
• In the QUICK MENU screen, selecting <<Normal Mode>> also exits from the BC
Radio mode.

16-31
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■GPS items
GPS Select (Default: OFF)
GPS > GPS Set > GPS Select (GPS Select)
Select either an internal or external GPS receiver that the transceiver re-
ceives its position data from.
• OFF : A GPS receiver is not used.
• Internal GPS : Position data from the internal GPS data is used for the
GPS functions.
• External GPS : Position data from the external GPS data is used for the
GPS functions.
• Manual : Manually enter the current Latitude, Longitude and Altitude
in Manual Position.

 low-speed data communication is disabled when “External GPS” is selected.

S
(p. 9-14)

Power Save (Internal GPS) (Default: Auto)

GPS > GPS Set > Power Save (Internal GPS)(Power Save (Int GPS))
Select whether or not to use the internal GPS receiver power save function.
The power save function turns OFF power to the GPS receiver to conserve
battery power.
When this function is ON, and if the GPS receiver does not receive signals
from a satellite for 5 minutes, the power save function will turn OFF the GPS
receiver for this set period of time.

• OFF : The receiver is continuously ON.

• 1, 2, 4, 8 min : When the receiver cannot receive signals from a satellite
for 5 minutes, the GPS receiver power is turned OFF for the
selected periods (1, 2, 4 or 8 minutes). After this period, the
receiver resumes receiving.
• Auto : When the receiver cannot receive signals from a satellite
for 5 minutes, the GPS receiver power is turned OFF for 1
minute. After this period, the receiver resumes receiving.
The power save interval time extends to 2, 4 and then 8
minutes when receiving no signals for another 5 minutes,
respectively.
Once the GPS receiver receives initial position data, the
power save interval is set back to 1 minute, if it receives no
signals for 5 minutes.

Manual Position (Default: LATITUDE : 0°00’00”N LONGITUDE :

0°00’00”E ALTITUDE : ------ft)
GPS > GPS Set > Manual Position (MANUAL POSITION)
Manually enter the latitude, longitude and Altitude of your current position.

The received position data can be captured by selecting “Capture From GPS”
when position data is received from either the internal or an external GPS.
(p. 10-2)

16-32
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Indicator (Default: ON)

GPS > GPS Set > GPS Indicator (GPS Indicator)
Select whether or not to display the GPS icon( ).
• OFF : The GPS icon is not displayed.
• ON : The GPS icon appears* when valid position data is received, and
blinks when no position data is received.
Selected GPS Connected/ Connected/
Not connected
receiver Searching Received
Internal GPS – Blinks Appears
External GPS Not displayed Blinks Appears
*No icon appears when “Manual” is selected in the GPS select item.

Position Format (Default: ddd°mm.mm')

GPS > GPS Set > Position Format (Position Format)
Select either the ddd°mm.mm’ or ddd°mm’ss" format to display position in-
formation.

Altitude/Distance Units (Default: ft/ml*)

GPS > GPS Set > Altitude/Distance Units (Altitude/Distance Units)
Select either the meter or feet/mile format to display the distance and alti-
tude.
*The default setting may differ, depending on the transceiver’s version.

Speed Units (Default: mph*)

GPS > GPS Set > Speed Units (Speed Units)
Select either the km/h, mph or knots format to display the speed.
*The default setting may differ, depending on the transceiver’s version.

GPS Out (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS Set > GPS Out (GPS Out)
Select whether or not GPS information from either the internal or external
GPS receiver is output at the [DATA] jack.

✓✓ For your information

No data is output when “OFF” or “Manual” is selected in the GPS Select
item.
Select “OFF” when you want to operate slow-speed data communication.

16-33
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Information
GPS > GPS Information (GPS INFO)
Displays the GPS satellite direction, altitude, satellite number and receiving
status.

Example: tracking 5 satellites

 Non tracking satellites

Regular characters
Tracking satellites (weak signal)
(Example: 01)
Reversed characters
Tracking satellites (strong signal)
(Example: 01 )
SAT Number of tracking satellite (between 0 and 12)
------ft (Non-positioning / 2D (Tracking three satellite) /
Altitude
Positioning results (4 or more satellite tracking)
Latitude --°--.--'-(Non-positioning)/Positioning results
Longitude ---°--.--'-(Non-positioning)/Positioning results

GPS Position
GPS > GPS Position (GPS POSITION)
Your current position, received position or GPS memory alarm position infor-
mation is displayed. (p. 10-3)
Push D-pad() to select the screen to see the “MY,” “RX,” “MEM” and “ALM”
screens.

NOTE: The default settings shown on the next page are for the USA ver-
[MY] screen sion.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.

16-34
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Position (Continued)

[MY] screen (MY Position)
Compass* Your direction
Latitude Your latitude
Longitude Your longitude
Shows the grid locator based on the latitude and longitude
GL
of your position.
ALT Your own altitude
SPEED Your speed over ground
TIME Current time received from the GPS
COURSE Your direction heading
When “Manual” is selected in the GPS Select item, the screen shows only latitude,
longitude, altitude, GL (Grid locator), and time (internal clock).

[RX] screen (Received position of the other station)

Compass* The caller’s direction from your position
Latitude The caller’s latitude
Longitude The caller’s longitude
Shows the grid locator based on the latitude and longitude
GL
of the caller’s position.
ALT The caller’s altitude
DST The caller’s distance from your position
Call sign The caller’s call sign
SSID The caller’s SSID (GPS-A only)
COURSE The caller’s direction over ground
SPEED The caller’s speed
GPS Time Stamp The time data that the caller acquires the position data.
GPS-A Symbol The caller’s GPS-A Symbol
Nothing is displayed when No position data is received on your transceiver.

[MEM] screen (GPS memory alarm position)

Compass* GPS Memory channel’s direction from your position
Latitude GPS Memory channel’s latitude
Longitude GPS Memory channel’s longitude
Shows the grid locator based on the latitude and longitude
GL
of GPS Memory channel’s.
DST GPS Memory channel’s distance from your position
GPS memory name* Shows the selected GPS memory name

[ALM] screen (GPS alarm position)

Compass* GPS Alarm area’s direction from your position
Latitude GPS Alarm area’s latitude
Longitude GPS Alarm area’s longitude
Shows the grid locator based on the latitude and longitude
GL
of GPS Alarm area’s.
DST GPS Alarm area’s distance from your position
Shows “OFF,” “RX,” GPS memory group name or GPS
GPS Alarm*
memory name specified for the GPS alarm function.

*These items can be selected in the QUICK MENU screen.

16-35
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Memory
GPS > GPS Memory (GPS MEMORY)
The transceiver has 200 GPS memory channels to store the received posi-
tion data, or often-used position data, along with an alphanumeric channel
name.

The channels can be divided into the “(No Group)” group and each memory
group for easy memory management.

The display of the GPS memory

(No Group) GPS memories not assigned to any group.

A to Z : Group Name GPS memories assigned to the selected group.

GPS memory groups (A-Z)

The name of a GPS memory group
GROUP NAME Enter a name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters for each
GPS group.

 he GPS memory group name can be edited in the QUICK MENU screen.
T
(p. 10-11)

GPS memory channels

The name of a GPS memory channel
NAME Enter a name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters for each
GPS memory channel.
DATE Stored date
TIME Stored time
LATITUDE Stored location (latitude)
LONGITUDE Stored location (longitude)
GROUP The group letter and the name of the group

 When the received position data is stored using the “GPS Positon” screen, the re-
ceived station’s call sign is used as using the GPS memory name.
GPS memory contents, such as GPS memory name, can be edited in the QUICK
MENU screen. (pp. 10-7 to 10-10)

16-36
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Alarm Select (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS Alarm> Alarm Select (Alarm Select)
Select the target position(s) for the GPS alarm function.

• OFF : Turns the function OFF.

• RX : The last position data received from a station is stored in a tem-
porary memory, and is used for the GPS alarm function.
When the target enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds.
The active alarm range is specified in Alarm Area (RX/Memory).
(p. 16-38)
• Group : All memories in the GPS memory, or in the selected GPS memo-
ry group, are used for the GPS alarm function.
When the target enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds.
The active alarm range is specified in Alarm Area (Group).
• Memory : Only one memory in the GPS memory is used for the GPS alarm
function.
When the target enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds.
When “Group” is selected The active alarm range is specified in Alarm Area (RX/Memory).
(p. 16-38)

Alarm Area (Group) (Default: 0.25')

GPS > GPS Alarm> Alarm Area (Group) (Alarm Area (Group))
When the Alarm Select is set to “Group” or one of the memory groups, set
the GPS alarm active range.
When a target enters in the specified active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds and the GPS alarm icon blinks.
The programmable values depend on the setting in Position Format.

• Position Format = dddmm.mm' 00.08' to 59.99' (0.01' steps)

• Position Format = dddmm'ss'' 00'05'' to 59'59'' (0’01" steps)

Example:
When a target enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm sounds.

Point A N
0.25’ 0.25’
0.25’

Your
position
0.25’

Point B

Point C
(Beeps three times)

16-37
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Alarm Area (RX/Memory) (Default: Both)

GPS > GPS Alarm> Alarm Area (RX/Memory) (Alarm Area (RX/Mem))
Select the GPS active alarm range.
When the Alarm Select is set to “RX” or “Memory,” set the GPS alarm active
range to “Both,” “Extended” or “Limited”.
When a target position enters in the active alarm range, the GPS alarm
sounds and the GPS alarm icon blinks.

• Limited : The transceiver sounds 3 beeps and the GPS alarm icon blinks
when the target enters the 500 meter range.
• Extended : The transceiver sounds 3 beeps and the GPS alarm icon blinks
when the target enters the 1 kilometer range.
• Both : The transceiver sounds a beep and the GPS alarm icon blinks
when the target enters the 1 kilometer range, and sounds 3
beeps and the icon blinks when it enters the 500 meter range.
When the target exits the 500 meter range, but is still in the 1 ki-
lometer range, the icon continues to blink, but no beeps sound.

Example:
When a target enters in the active alarm range (500 meter or 1 kilometer
range, depending on the setting), the GPS alarm sounds.

Extended range
(Approximately 1 km/1094 Y)
Your
position

Limited range
(Approximately 500 m/547 Y)

Beeps one times Beeps three times

16-38
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Logger (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS Logger > GPS Logger (GPS Logger)
Turn the GPS Logger function ON or OFF.
This function logs the position, altitude, course, speed and number of satel-
lites being used.

• OFF : Turns the function OFF.

• ON : The transceiver automatically logs GPS data.
Once this function is turned ON, the GPS data will be continuously
logged until turning it OFF, even if the transceiver power is turned
OFF, then ON again.

To use this function:

1. You must first insert a microSD card into the transceiver.
2. You must select either Internal GPS or External GPS in GPS select.

NOTE:
The log data will be saved on the microSD card.
The file name is automatically created, as shown in the example below:
Log start date and time: 2012/9/1 15:30:00
File name: 20120901_153000.log

Record Interval (Default: 5sec)

GPS > GPS Logger > Record Interval (Record Interval)
Select the GPS Logger function record interval of 1, 5, 10, 30 or 60 sec-
onds.

16-39
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

<<GPS Logger Only>>

GPS > GPS Logger > <<GPS Logger Only>>
The transceiver switches into an exclusive GPS logger mode where only the
logger is functioning.

• Select “Internal GPS” or “External GPS” in GPS Select screen and insert
a microSD card.
• During the exclusive GPS logger mode, the transceiver's transmission
and reception are disabled.
To cancel the exclusive GPS logger mode, reboot the transceiver.

qqPush D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

wwPush D-pad()) to select “YES,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

• When the GPS logger function is set to “ON,” the GPS logger mode is started im-
mediately after pushing D-pad(Ent).

GPS TX Mode (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS TX Mode (GPS TX Mode)
Select a GPS transmission mode to send position data received from a GPS
receiver while in the DV mode.
• OFF : Position data is not transmitted.
• GPS (DV-G) : Transmits position data in NMEA format. (the TX GPS mode
is “GPS”)
• GPS-A (DV-A) : Transmits position data in the format corresponding to D-
PRS. (the TX GPS mode is “GPS-A”)
In the GPS-A mode, the normal GPS-A codes are transmit-
ted to the PC connected to the transceiver.
GPS-A code is based on APRS® code. (APRS® : Automatic
Packet Reporting System)

When “GPS” or “GPS-A” is selected, the slow-speed data communication

is disabled. (p. 9-14)
16-40
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Sentence (Default: GGA)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS(DV-G) > GPS Sentence (GPS Sentence)
Select sentences to be transmitted in the GPS mode to transmit position
data.
•S  elect up to 4 of the 6 GPS sentences to transmit at the same time. RMC, GGA,
GLL, VTG, GSA and GSV sentences are selectable.
Even if the GPS Auto TX Timer is set to “5 sec.,” when 4 sentences are selected in
this setting, the time the GPS Auto TX Timer will automatically be changed to “10
sec.”
• “VTG," “GSA” and “GSV” sentences will not be transmitted when your position has
been set manually.
This GPS Sentence item will be hidden when “GPS-A(DV-A)” or “OFF” is selected
in “GPS TX Mode."

• Contents of GPS sentence

The Time Stamp is shown based on the UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
GPS Time
Date COG SOG
Sentence Lat/Lon Alt Stamp Status 2D/3D
(UTC) (True) (knot)
(UTC)
RMC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
GGA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
GLL ✔ ✔ ✔
VTG ✔ ✔
GSA ✔ ✔
GSV

Sentence Others

RMC Mode Indicator

Number of satellites in use, HDOP, Geoidal separation, Age of
GGA
Differential GPS data
GLL Mode Indicator
VTG COG (Magnetic north), SOG (km/h), Mode Indicator
GSA ID numbers of satellites used in solution, PDOP, HDOP, VDOP
Total number of sentences, Sentence number, Total number of sat-
GSV
ellites in view, Satellite information (ID, Altitude, Azimuth, S/N)

NOTE:
Set the GSV sentence to OFF when sending the GPS message to con-
ventional digital transceivers (IC-2820H, IC-E2820, ID-800H, IC-91AD, IC-
E91, IC-V82, IC-U82, IC-2200H, ID-1).
The GSV sentence is incompatible with them. Those transceivers will not
display GPS messages properly if sent as a GSV sentence from the ID-
51A/E.

16-41
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS Message
GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS(DV-G) > GPS Message (GPS Message)
Enter a GPS message of up to 20 alphanumeric characters. (p. 10-17)

GPS Message edit screen

This GPS Message item will be hidden when “GPS-A(DV-A)” or “OFF” is

selected in “GPS TX Mode.”

NOTE: When no message transmission is desired, delete the programmed

message in the QUICK MENU screen.

Unproto Address (Default: API51,DSTAR*)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS-A(DV-A) > Unproto Address (Unproto Ad-
dress)
Enter an unproto address of up to 56 alphanumeric characters.

Unproto address edit screen

This Unproto Address item will be hidden when “GPS(DV-G)” or “OFF” is

selected in “GPS TX Mode.”

16-42
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Data Extension (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS-A(DV-A) > Data Extension (Data Extension)
Select whether or not to transmit the course and speed data in addition to
the position data.

• OFF : Transmits only the position data.

• Course/Speed : Transmits the course and speed data in addition to the posi-
tion data.

The course and speed data will not be transmitted even if “Course/Speed” is
selected, when your position is set manually.
This Data Extension item will be hidden when “GPS(DV-G)” or “OFF” is se-
lected in “GPS TX Mode.”

NOTE:
When “Course/Speed” is selected, the number of Comment characters is
limited to 36.
When “Course/Speed” is selected, and Altitude option is set to “ON,” the
number of Comment characters is limited to 28.

Time Stamp (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS-A(DV-A) > Time Stamp (Time Stamp)
Sets the transmitting time stamp type to DHM, HMS or OFF. The time stamp
is transmitted with the position data in the GPS-A mode, and UTC (Universal
Time Coordinated) time is used.

• OFF : No time stamp is transmitted.

• DHM : T ransmits the time stamp in the Day, Hour, and Minute format.
• HMS : Transmits the time stamp in the Hour, Minute, and Second format.

When your position is set manually, the time stamp data will not be transmit-
ted, even if “DHM” or “HMS” is selected.
This Time Stamp item will be hidden when “GPS(DV-G)” or “OFF” is selected
in “GPS TX Mode.”

Altitude (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS-A(DV-A) > Altitude (Altitude)
Select whether or not to transmit altitude data, in addition to position data.

• OFF : No altitude data is transmitted.

• ON : T ransmits altitude data in addition to position data.

 his Altitude item will be hidden when “GPS(DV-G)” or “OFF” is selected in

T
“GPS TX Mode.”

NOTE:
When “ON” is selected, and Data Extension option is set to “OFF,” the
number of Comment characters is limited to 35.
When “ON” is selected, and Data Extension option is set to “Course/
Speed,” the number of Comment characters is limited to 28.

16-43
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

GPS-A Symbol (Default: Person)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS-A(DV-A) > GPS-A Symbol (GPS-A Symbol)
The GPS-A symbol is an icon which represents your means of transportation
or location. The stored GPS-A symbol in the selected GPS-A channel (1 to 4)
is transmitted with position data while in the GPS-A mode.
To change the GPS-A symbol channel, push D-pad() to select, and then
push D-pad(Ent) to set.
This GPS-A Symbol item will be hidden when “GPS(DV-G)” or “OFF” is se-
lected in “GPS TX Mode.”

GPS-A Symbol channel

A GPS-A symbol can be set to GPS symbol channels 1 to 4.
You can select a desired GPS-A symbol different than the preprogrammed
one or other symbol by entering a 2 character GPS-A code.

Selecting a GPS-A symbol with a 2 character symbol code

qqPush D-pad() to select a desired GPS-A Symbol channel between 1 and 4.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

wwPush [QUICK] to select “Edit Symbol,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eePush [QUICK] again.
rrPush D-pad() to select “Direct Input,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
ttRotate [DIAL] to select the first digit.
• Usable characters: /, \, 0 to 9, A to Z
yyPush to select the second digit.

Second digit is selected

uuRotate [DIAL] to select the second digit, and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Usable characters: Alphanumeric characters and symbols
iiPush D-pad(Ent) to set the GPS-A Symbol into the channel selected in
step q.
• Returns to the GPS-A SYMBOL screen.

ooPushing D-pad(Ent) again to set the GPS-A symbol channel, selected in

step q, which is used for GPS-A operation.
16-44
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Selecting a preprogrammed GPS-A symbol

qqPush D-pad() to select a desired GPS-A Symbol channel between 1
and 4.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

wwPush to select “Edit Symbol,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eePush D-pad() to select a desired GPS-A
Symbol.

rrPush D-pad(Ent) to set the GPS-A Symbol

into the channel selected in step q.
• Returns to the GPS-A SYMBOL screen.
ttPushing D-pad(Ent) again to set the GPS-
A symbol channel, selected in step q,
which is used for GPS-A operation.

Selecting “1: Railroad Engine”

GPS-A Symbol list

Sheriff Police Glider Satellite

Small Aircraft Recreational Vehicle Hospital Sunny

Red Cross Shuttle Jeep Radio

House QTH (VHF) SSTV Truck Aircraft

X Bus Node RACES

Red Dot ATV Rover Gale Flags

Fire WX Service Ship(powerboat) Ham Store

Campground Helicopter Truck(18-wheeler) Work Zone

Motorcycle Yacht Van Speedpost(Value Signpost)

Railroad Engine Person Yagi @ QTH Triangle

Car DF station House (HF) Small Circle

Canoe Large Aircraft Big Question Mark Overlayed Ship

Eyeball Dish Antenna Circle Tornado

School Ambulance Park/Picnic Area Overlayed Truck

PC User Bicycle Overlayed Car Overlayed Van

Balloon Fire Truck Lighthouse Wreck

16-45
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

SSID (Default: ---)

GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS-A(DV-A) > SSID (SSID)
Select an SSID based on APRS® to add to your call sign, to show your op-
erating style to other stations.
The addition methods of the SSID may differ, depending on whether the call sign
includes a space or not.

• --- : The space in the call sign is converted to “-.”

Text after the space will be used as the SSID.
But if no text is programmed after the space, the space will be
deleted, and no SSID is added.
Example : “JA3YUA” ➡ “JA3YUA”
(no SSID is added)
“JA3YUA A” ➡ “JA3YUA-A”
(“A” is changed to “-A”, and it is used as the SSID)
• (-0) : No SSID is added.
If a call sign includes a space, any text or digit after the space will
be deleted.
Example : “JA3YUA” ➡ “JA3YUA”
(no SSID is added)
“JA3YUA A” ➡ “JA3YUA”
(no SSID is added)
• -1 to -15 : Adds an SSID of -1 to -15 to the call sign.
Even if a call sign includes a space and text, it will be automati-
cally changed to this set numeric ID.
Example(SSID [-9]):
“JA3YUA” ➡ “JA3YUA-9”
(“-9” is added, and used as the SSID)
“JA3YUA A” ➡ “JA3YUA-9”
(“A” is changed to “-9”, and it is used as the SSID)
• -A to -Z : Adds an SSID of -A to -Z to your call sign.
Even if a call sign includes a space and a text, it will be automati-
cally changed to this set letter ID.
Example(SSID [-Z]):
“JA3YUA” ➡ “JA3YUA-Z”
(“-Z” is added, and used as the SSID)
“JA3YUA A” ➡ “JA3YUA-Z”
(“A” is changed to “-Z”, and it is used as the SSID)

 his SSID item will be hidden when “GPS(DV-G)” or “OFF” is selected in

T
“GPS TX Mode.”

About SSID
To assist in identifying a station’s type, designated call sign SSIDs are used
in D-PRS (APRS®), according to the common guideline.
The guideline may be changed when the infrastructure environment, such
as a product or network, is changed.
Please check the latest guideline in the web site related on the D-PRS or
APRS®, and correctly set.

16-46
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ GPS items (Continued)

Comment
GPS > GPS TX Mode > GPS-A(DV-A) > Comment (Comment)
Enter a comment of up to 43 characters to transmit with the position data.

Comment edit screen

(In case of up to 43 characters)
The number of characters to enter will differ, depending on the Data Extension
and Altitude settings. (p. 16-43)

Data Extension Altitude The number of characters

OFF OFF Up to 43 characters (Default)
OFF ON Up to 35 characters
Course/Speed OFF Up to 36 characters
Course/Speed ON Up to 28 characters
The symbol “ ” shows the transmittable comment range. Please note that the
characters that exceed the range from the symbol will not be transmitted.

Transmittable comment range display

(In case of up to 36 characters)

This comment item will be hidden when “GPS(DV-G)” or “OFF” is selected in

“GPS TX Mode.”

GPS Auto TX (Default: OFF)

GPS > GPS Auto TX (GPS Auto TX)
Select an option for the GPS automatic transmission function.
This function automatically transmits the current position data received from
a GPS receiver, as well as any programmed GPS message, at the selected
interval.

• OFF : Turns the function OFF. However, you can transmit the po-
sition data manually by pushing [PTT].
• 5 sec to 30 min : Transmits the current position data at the selected interval
(5*, 10, or 30 seconds, or 1, 3, 5, 10, or 30 minutes).
*When four GPS sentences are selected at the same time
in GPS Sentence Mode, “5sec” cannot be selected.

NOTE: When “Manual” is selected in GPS Select, the current position data
will not be automatically transmitted.

16-47
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Call sign items

Call Sign
Call Sign (CALL SIGN)
Sets or displays the “UR,” “R1,” “R2” and “MY” call signs to be used for DV
operation.
Except for the DR mode, sets the desired call signs to be used for DV opera-
tion in this screen.

For Simplex operation (DV mode)

“UR” (p. 16-49) and “MY” call signs can be set.

For Duplex (repeater) operation (DV/DR mode)

While in the DR mode, the only “MY” call sign can be set.

<To set Duplex (repeater) operation>

Example : While in the DV mode, Making a Gateway call
Making a gateway CQ call to Hamacho repeater (JP1YIU B) from
the Hirano repeater (JP3YHH B)*, while in the DV mode.
*Before starting to set the call sign, set the frequency of your access repeater or du-
plex direction. (See pages 5-6 and 15-5.)

NOTE:When the Digital Repeater Setting function is ON, the repeater call
sign can be automatically set. (p. 16-57)

1. Call sign (“R1”) setting

qqWhile in the DV mode, push D-pad() to select “R1,” and then push
[QUICK] .
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

wwPush D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eeRotate [DIAL] to select the first character.
• Alphanumeric characters and symbol (“/”) can be entered.
rrPush to move the cursor backward, or push to move the cursor
forward.
ttRepeat steps e and r to enter a name of up to 8 characters, including
a spaces.
yyAfter entering, push D-pad(Ent) to set.

 (Continued on the next page.)

16-48
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Call sign items (Continued)

2. Gateway (“R2”) setting

qqPush D-pad() to select “R2,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

wwPush D-pad() to select “GW,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

• When you manually enter the call sign, push in step q.

About the RPT2 SELECT screen

NOT USED* For local area call
GW To select the gateway call sign from the repeater list.
To select the repeater that has the same gateway as the “R1”
Repeater name
repeater.

3. Destination (“UR”) setting

qqPush D-pad() to select “UR,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

wwPush D-pad() to select “Gateway CQ,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eePush D-pad() to select “11:Japan”(repeater group where your destina-
tion repeater is listed), and then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Hamacho430,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• When you manually enter the call sign, push in step q.

About the YOUR SELECT screen

CQCQCQ To select “CQCQCQ” to make a non-call sign specific call.
Gateway CQ† To select “Gateway CQ” using the repeater list.
To select the destination (“UR”) call sign using the Your Call Sign
Your Call Sign
memory.
RX History To select the destination (“UR”) call sign using the RX History.
TX History To select the destination (“UR”) call sign using the TX History.
†Not displayed in the Simplex mode.
16-49
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■RX History items

RX History
RX History (RX HISTORY)
When a call is received in the DV mode, the call information such as the
caller station call sign, used repeater call sign, and so on, are stored in this
screen.
Up to 50 records can be stored.
• Even if the transceiver power is turned OFF, the stored records are not
deleted.

You can confirm the RX record contents with D-pad(Ent).

Appears when the Gate-
way call is received.
Appears when the po-
sition data is included.

RX History number “(UP)” appears when the

(01 to 50) uplink signal is received.
Caller station (upper)
Called station (lower)
Message included in
the received call
Repeater call sign
When you receive a
Received date
simplex call, this item
shows the frequency.

Contents of the RX history Top screen

RX01–RX50 RX history number
Shows the call sign of the caller station and any note pro-
CALLER*
grammed after the call sign.
CALLED* Shows the call sign of the called station.
Shows any message included in the received call, if pro-
MESSAGE
grammed.
Shows the call sign of the repeater you received the call
RXRPT2*
from.
FREQUENCY Shows the simplex frequency.
RX TIME Shows the date and time the call was received.
GW Appears when a Gateway call is received.
GPS Appears when position data is included.
(UP) Appears when an uplink signal is received.
* These items can be switched to the Name display.

16-50
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ RX History items (Continued)

To display the RX record contents

qqPush D-pad() to select the desired RX History number “RX01” to “RX50,”
and then push D-pad(Ent).

wwPush D-pad() to switch the RX History contents screen.

• When the received call includes GPS position data, it is displayed after RX
TIME.
• To register the caller station call sign, GPS information, or repeater call sign, push
D-pad() to show the desired contents, and then push [QUICK] .
eePush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

Contents of the RX history

Shows the call sign of the caller station and any note programmed
CALLER*1
after the call sign.
CALLED*1 Shows the call sign of the called station.
Shows the call sign of the repeater that was accessed by the
caller station.
RXRPT1*1, *2
If it was a call through a gateway and the internet, this item dis-
plays the gateway repeater call sign of your local area repeater.
RXRPT2*1, *2 Shows the call sign of the repeater you received the call from.
MESSAGE Shows any message included in the received call, if programmed.
RX TIME Shows the date and time the call was received.
COMPASS*3 Shows the direction from your position to the caller station.
LATITUDE Shows the Latitude position of the caller station.
LONGITUDE Shows the Longitude position of the caller station.
Shows the latitude and longitude position data in a short string
GL(Grid Locator)
of characters.
Shows the altitude of the caller station,
ALTITUDE The altitude unit can be set to either the meter or feet/mile format
in the GPS menu.
DISTANCE*3 Shows the distance between you and the caller station.
GPS-A SYMBOL Shows a GPS-A symbol of the caller station. (GPS TX mode: GPS-A)
Shows the APRS® based SSID (Secondary Station Identifier:
“-0,” “-1” to“ -15,” “-A" to “ -Z”)
SSID
when the caller station's GPS TX mode is set to “GPS-A” to assist
identifying the caller station.
COURSE Shows the course of the caller station.
Shows the speed the caller station is moving at.
SPEED The speed unit can be set to the km/h, mph or knots format in
the GPS menu.
GPS Time Stamp The time data that the caller acquires the position data.
Shows the GPS message or GPS-A comment included in the
GPS MESSAGE
position data of the received call.
*1 These items show the name under the call sign, if programmed.
*2 “FREQUENCY” appears instead of these items when the call was not through a
repeater (Simplex call), to show the frequency that was used.
*3 If you have no position data, these items are not displayed.
16-51
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■DV Memory items

Your Call Sign
DV Memory > Your Call Sign (YOUR CALL SIGN)
The transceiver has a total of 200 memories to store an individual station
destination call sign.
The stored call sign and name are displayed on the YOUR CALL SIGN or RX
Record screen.

Your (UR) Call Sign

Memory list

The call sign of the selected station

• The Your (UR) Call Sign can be programmed to the memory using the RX
History. (p. 21 of the Ba­sic Instruction)
• See pages 9-40 to 9-43 about how to add, edit or move the Your Call Sign
in the memory.

Repeater List
DV Memory > Repeater List (REPEATER GROUP)
You can store repeater information for quick and simple communication when
using repeaters.
The transceiver has a total of 750 repeater memory channels, storable in 25
groups (01 to 25).
Repeater group where the selected repeater is listed

Skip setting “ON”

Repeater list

The call sign of the selected repeater

The sub name (regional name) of the selected repeater

NOTE:
For easy operation, a repeater list is preloaded into your transceiver. How-
ever, if the CPU clears all programmed contents (All Reset), the repeater
list is also cleared.
We recommend that memory data be backed up using a microSD card, or
be saved to a PC using the supplied CS-51 cloning software.

About the repeater list:

The repeater list can be downloaded from the Icom website.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/firm/index.html
16-52
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ DV Memory items (Continued)

Repeater Group (01 to 25)

Repeater group name of up to 16 alphanumeric charac-
Group name
ters
The Skip setting can be turned ON or OFF in the QUICK MENU screen.

Repeater List
NAME Repeater name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters
SUB NAME Repeater sub name of up to 8 alphanumeric characters
CALL SIGN Repeater call sign
GW CALL SIGN Gateway call sign
GROUP Repeater group where the repeater is assigned
Select whether or not to use the repeater as an access
USE(FROM)
repeater (FROM) in the DR mode
FREQUENCY*1 Operating frequency of the access repeater
DUP*1 Duplex setting to use the access repeater
OFFSET FREQ*1 Frequency offset to use the access repeater
Position data accuracy level (“None,” “Approximate” or “Ex-
POSITION
act”)
LATITUDE*2 Latitude position of the repeater
LONGITUDE*2 Longitude position of the repeater
Time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinat-
UTC OFFSET
ed) and the local time
*1 Appears only when USE(FROM) is set to “YES.”
*2 Appears only when POSITION is set to “Approximate” or “Exact.”

NOTE: When the repeater is used for a simplex communication, refer to

the list below to set the settings.

Enter the desired name of up to 16 alphanumeric charac-

NAME
ters
Enter the desired sub name of up to 8 alphanumeric char-
SUB NAME
acters
CALL SIGN Blank
GW CALL SIGN —
GROUP Set the desired repeater group
USE(FROM) YES
FREQUENCY Frequency for the Simplex operation
DUP OFF
OFFSET FREQ —
POSITION —
UTC OFFSET —

16-53
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■My Station items

My Call Sign
My Station > My Call Sign (MY CALL SIGN)
The transceiver has a total of 6 memories to store your own call signs.
A call sign of up to 8 digits can be entered.
Also, a note of up to 4 characters, for operating radio type, area, and so on,
can be entered.
Number (MY1 to MY6)

Call Sign
4 character note

• See page 2 of the Ba­sic Instruction for MY call sign programming.

• To select a different My Call Sign, push D-pad() to select, and then
push D-pad(Ent) to set.

TX Message
My Station > TX Message (TX MESSAGE)
The transceiver has a total of 5 memories to store short messages for simul-
taneous transmission in the DV mode.
Enter a message of up to 20 alphanumeric characters for each memory.

TX Message edit screen

• See page 9-2 for TX message programming.

• To changing the TX Message, push D-pad() to select, and then push
D-pad(Ent) to set.
• When no message transmission is necessary, select “OFF.”

16-54
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■DV Set items

RX Bass (Default: Normal)
DV Set > Tone Control > RX Bass (RX Bass)
Set the DV mode received audio bass filter level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
• Cut : Cuts the bass tone
• Normal : Normal tone level
• Boost : Boosts the bass tone

RX Treble (Default: Normal)

DV Set > Tone Control > RX Treble (RX Treble)
Set the DV mode received audio treble filter level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
• Cut : Cuts the treble tone
• Normal : Normal tone level
• Boost : Boosts the treble tone

RX Bass Boost (Default: OFF)

DV Set > Tone Control > RX Bass Boost (RX Bass Boost)
Turn the DV mode received audio Bass Boost function ON or OFF.
This function is separate from the “Boost” setting of the RX Bass.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : This function boosts the received audio bass to output it from a
speaker, even if the speaker is small.

TX Bass (Default: Normal)

DV Set > Tone Control > TX Bass (TX Bass)
Set the DV mode transmit audio bass filter level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
• Cut : Cuts the bass tone
• Normal : Normal tone level
• Boost : Boosts the bass tone

TX Treble (Default: Normal)

DV Set > Tone Control > TX Treble (TX Treble)
Set the DV mode transmit audio treble filter level to Cut, Normal or Boost.
• Cut : Cuts the treble tone
• Normal : Normal tone level
• Boost : Boosts the treble tone

16-55
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ DV Set items (Continued)

Auto Reply (Default: OFF)

DV Set > Auto Reply (Auto Reply)
Set the automatic reply function to ON, OFF, Voice or Position.
This function automatically replies to a call addressed to your own call sign,
even if you are away from the transceiver.
When “ON” or “Voice” is selected, the automatic reply function is automati-
cally turned OFF when you push [PTT].
When “Position” is selected, the automatic reply function is kept to ON, even
if you push [PTT].
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Replies with your own call sign. (No audio reply is sent)
• Voice : Replies with your call sign and any Auto Reply message recorded
on the microSD (up to 10 seconds).
If no microSD card is inserted or no message is recorded, only
your call sign is transmitted. The transmitted audio can be moni-
tored.
• Position : Replies with your own call sign and transmits your position using
the internal GPS receiver.
It may take a few seconds to receive your position, and may be
late to send the call.
- When “OFF” or “Manual” is set in “GPS Select,” the internal GPS re-
ceiver is temporarily turned ON.
- When “External GPS” is set in “GPS Select,” the transceiver transmits
your position. But if the external GPS receiver is not connected, the
internal GPS receiver will be activated.

NOTE:
The Power Save function is disabled when “ON” or “Voice” is selected.
The Power Save function is enabled when “Position” is selected.

DV Data TX (Default: Auto)

DV Set > DV Data TX (DV Data TX)
Select whether to manually or automatically transmit slow-speed data.
• PTT : Push [PTT] to manually transmit the input data.
• Auto : When data is input from a PC through the [DATA] jack, the trans-
ceiver automatically transmits it.

Digital Monitor (Default: Auto)

DV Set > Digital Monitor (Digital Monitor)
Select the receive mode when [SQL] is held down in the DV operation mode.
• Auto : Receives in the DV mode or the FM mode, depending on the re-
ceived signal.
• Digital : Monitors in the DV mode.
• Analog : Monitors in the FM mode.

16-56
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ DV Set items (Continued)

Digital Repeater Set (Default: ON)

DV Set > Digital Repeater Set (Digital Repeater Set)
Turn the digital repeater setting function ON or OFF.
In any DV mode except for the DR mode, and when accessing a repeater
that has a call sign that is different than the transceiver’s setting, this function
reads the repeater’s signal and automatically sets the repeater call sign in
R1 and R2.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Automatically sets the repeater call sign.

RX Call Sign Write (Default: OFF)

DV Set > RX Call Sign Write (RX Call Sign Write)
Set the RX call sign automatic write function to Auto or OFF.
When receiving a call addressed to your own call sign in any DV mode ex-
cept for the DR mode, this function automatically sets the caller station call
sign into “UR.”
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• Auto : Automatically sets the call sign of the caller station into “UR

RX Repeater Write (Default: OFF)

DV Set > RX Repeater Write (RX Repeater Write)
Set the repeater call sign automatic write function to Auto or OFF.
When receiving a call addressed to your own call sign through a repeater in
any DV mode except for the DR mode, this function automatically sets the
call sign of the repeater into “R1” or “R2.”
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• Auto : Automatically sets the call sign of the repeater into “R1” and/or
“R2.”

DV Auto Detect (Default: OFF)

DV Set > DV Auto Detect (DV Auto Detect)
Turn the DV mode automatic detect function ON or OFF.
If you receive a non-digital signal during DV mode operation, this function
automatically switches to the FM mode.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF. The operating mode is fixed to the DV
mode.
• ON : Automatically selects the FM mode for temporary operation.

16-57
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ DV Set items (Continued)

RX Record (RPT) (Default: ALL)

DV Set > RX Record (RPT) (RX Record (RPT))
The transceiver can record the data of up to 50 individual calls.
When the received signal includes a status message (“UR?” or “RPT?”) that
is sent back from the access repeater, you can record up to 50 messages or
only the latest one, in the Received Call Record.
• ALL : Records up to 50 calls.
• Latest Only : Records only the latest call.

BK (Default: OFF)
DV Set > BK (BK)
The BK (Break-in) function allows you to break into a conversation, where
the two other stations are communicating with call sign squelch enabled.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Turns the function ON.
“BK” appears on the display.
 OTE: The BK function is automatically turned OFF when transceiver is
N
turned OFF.

EMR (Default: OFF)

DV Set > EMR (EMR)
The EMR communication mode can be used in the digital mode. In the EMR
mode, no call sign setting is necessary.
When an EMR mode signal is received, the audio (voice) will be heard at
the specified level even if the volume setting level is set to minimum level, or
digital call sign/digital code squelch is in use.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Turns the function ON.
“EMR ” appears on the display.
NOTE: The EMR function is automatically turned OFF when transceiver is
turned OFF.

EMR AF Level (Default: 19)

DV Set > EMR AF Level (EMR AF Level)
Set the audio output level to between 0 and 39 for when an EMR communi-
cation mode signal is received.
When an EMR signal is received, the audio will be heard at the set level, or
the [VOL] control level, whichever is higher.
To disable the setting, set it to “0.”

NOTE: After an EMR signal disappears, the audio level will remain at the
EMR level. In this case, rotate [VOL] to adjust the audio level.

16-58
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■SPEECH items
RX Call Sign SPEECH (Default: ON (Kerchunk))
SPEECH > RX Call Sign SPEECH (RX Call Sign SPEECH)
Turn the RX call sign speech function ON or OFF for calls received in the DV
mode.
• OFF : No announcement is made even when a call is received.
• ON (Kerchunk) : The caller station’s call sign is announced only when it
makes a short transmission.
• ON (All) : The caller station’s call sign is always announced.

NOTE: When a call is received during an announcement, the received

audio is heard after cancelling the announcement.

RX>CS SPEECH (Default: ON)

SPEECH > RX>CS SPEECH (RX>CS SPEECH)
Turn the RX>CS Speech function ON or OFF.
The RX>CS Speech function enables the transceiver to announce the sta-
tion call sign that is selected from a Received Call Record by pushing
and then rotating [DIAL]. (p. 9-16)
• OFF : The station call sign is not announced.
• ON : The station call sign is announced.

NOTE:
• When a call is received during an announcement, the received audio will
be muted, and no audio is recorded onto the microSD card.
• If the call sign is announced while recording, the recorded contents are
silent during the announcement.

DIAL SPEECH (Default: OFF)

SPEECH > DIAL SPEECH (DIAL SPEECH)
Turn the Dial Speech function ON or OFF.
The Dial Speech function enables the transceiver to announce the frequency
or repeater call sign that is selected by rotating [DIAL].
• OFF : The Dial Speech function is OFF.
• ON : The frequency or repeater call sign is announced, 1 second after
[DIAL] selection.
- In the VFO, Memory and Call channel modes, the frequency is
announced.
- In the DR mode, the repeater call sign is announced. If Simplex
is selected, the frequency is announced.

NOTE: When a call is received during an announcement, the received

audio is heard after cancelling the announcement.

16-59
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ SPEECH items (Continued)

MODE SPEECH (Default: OFF)

SPEECH > MODE SPEECH (MODE SPEECH)
Turn the Operating Mode Speech function ON or OFF.
When this function is ON, the selected operating mode is announced when
the mode switch is pushed.
• OFF : The selected operating mode is not announced.
• ON : The selected operating mode is announced.

NOTE:
• While in the DV mode, the recorded contents are silent during the an-
nouncement, if the operating mode is announced while recording,
• While in the AM, FM or FM-N mode, the received contents are recorded
onto the microSD card, if a call is received during an announcement.
• Even if the VFO scan is running, the operating mode is announced when
[MODE] is pushed.

SPEECH Language (Default: English)

SPEECH > SPEECH Language (SPEECH Language)
Set the desired speech pronunciation to English or Japanese.

Alphabet (Default: Normal)

SPEECH > Alphabet (Alphabet)
Select either “Normal” or “Phonetic Code” to announce the alphabet charac-
ter.
• Normal : Normal code is used. (for example: A as eh, B as bee)
• Phonetic Code : Phonetic code is used. (for example: A as Alfa, B as Bra-
vo)

SPEECH Speed (Default: Fast)

SPEECH > SPEECH Speed (SPEECH Speed)
Set the speech speed to Low (slow) or High (fast).

SPEECH Level (Default: 7)

SPEECH > SPEECH Level (SPEECH Level)
Enter a volume level number between 0 (OFF), 1 (minimum) and 9 (maxi-
mum) for the voice synthesizer.
The voice synthesizer audio output level from the speaker is linked with [VOL]
setting from the minimum audio volume up to the set level.

16-60
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■DTMF/T-CALL items
Programs and sets the DTMF tone code and DTMF memory channel for DTMF tone operation.
See pages 17-8 to 17-12 for details.

DTMF Memory (Default: d0)

DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Memory (DTMF MEMORY)
Shows a list of the DTMF memory channels.
• T-CALL : 1750 Hz tone burst signal
• d0 to d# : DTMF memory channel list

DTMF Speed (Default: 100ms)

DTMF/T-CALL > DTMF Speed (DTMF Speed)
Select the DTMF transfer speed.
• 100ms : Transfer the DTMF codes at about 100 milliseconds per code.
5 characters per second.
• 200ms : Transfer the DTMF codes at about 200 milliseconds per code.
2.5 characters per second.
• 300ms : Transfer the DTMF codes at about 300 milliseconds per code.
1.6 characters per second.
• 500ms : Transfer the DTMF codes at about 500 milliseconds per code.
1 character per second.

16-61
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■QSO/RX Log items

QSO Log (Default: OFF)
QSO/RX Log > QSO Log (QSO Log)
Select whether or not to make a communication log on the microSD card.
The communication log can be made on a microSD card, and saved in the
“csv” format.
Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before making a com-
munication log.
• OFF : The QSO Log function is OFF.
• ON : The transceiver makes a communication log on the microSD
card.
The transceiver starts making a log with your send contents.

NOTE:
• The folder name is automatically created, as [ID-51\QsoLog].
• The file name is automatically created, as shown in the example below:
Log start date and time: 2012/9/1 15:30:00
File name: 20120901_153000.csv
• The log contents cannot be displayed on the transceiver.
• You can see the log contents on a microSD card on a PC.

The log contents are shown below:

Contents Example Descriptions
TX/RX TX RX Transmission and reception
Date 12/23/2012 12/23/2012 Date and time the call was started.
13:51:48 13:51:48
Frequency 438.010000 438.010000 Operating frequencies
(When Duplex is set, the frequencies of
the called are displayed.)
Mode DV DV Operating mode (FM/FM-N/DV)
My Latitude 34.764667 34.764667 Your latitude (unit: degree)
(+: North latitude, –: South latitude)
My Longitude 135.375333 135.375333 Your longitude (unit: degree)
(+: East longitude, –: West longitude)
My Altitude 50.5 50.5 Your altitude (unit: ft)
Records to one decimal place.
RF Power Mid (Blank) TX output power level
S-meter Level (Blank) S0 The relative signal strength of the re-
ceive signal (in twelve levels)
RPT Call Sign JP3YHJ A JP3YHJ A Repeater call sign (DV mode only)
TX Call Sign CQCQCQ (Blank) TX Call sign (DV mode only)
RX Call Sign (Blank) JA3YUA A RX Call sign (DV mode only)
RX Latitude (Blank) 34.764667 Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degree)
(+: North latitude, –: South latitude)
Records only when you receive in the
DV mode.
RX Longitude (Blank) 135.375333 Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degree)
(+: East longitude, –: West longitude)
Records only when you receive in the
DV mode.
RX Altitude (Blank) 30.5 Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: ft)
Records only when you receive in the
DV mode.

16-62
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ QSO/RX items (Continued)

RX History Log (Default: OFF)

QSO/RX Log > RX History Log (RX History Log)
Select whether or not to make a DV mode’s receive history log on the mi-
croSD card.
The receive history log can be made on a microSD card, and saved in the
“csv” format. Be sure to insert the microSD card into the transceiver before
making a communication log.
• OFF : The RX History Log function is OFF.
• ON : The transceiver makes a DV mode’s receive history log on the mi-
croSD card.
The transceiver starts making a receive history log when you finish to
talk.
NOTE:
• The folder name is automatically created, as [ID-51\RxLog].
• The file name is automatically created, as shown in the example below:
Log start date and time: 2012/9/1 15:30:00
File name: 20120901_153000.csv
• The log contents cannot be displayed on the transceiver.
• You can see the log contents on a microSD card on a PC.

The log contents are shown below:

Contents Example Descriptions
Frequency 438.010000 RX Frequency
Mode DV Operating mode (DV is fixed)
Caller JA3YUA A Call sign of the caller station
/ ID51 Note after the call sign
Called CQCQCQ Call sign of the called station
Rx RPT1 JP3YHH G Access repeater call sign of the caller station or the
gateway repeater call sign of your local area repeater.
Rx RPT2 JP3YHJ A Access repeater call sign of the called station
Message Hello CQ D-STAR! Message included in the received call (up to 20 char-
acters)
Status (Blank) Normal: blank, Uplink: UPLINK,
Access repeater reply: “UR?” or “RPT?”
Received 12/23/2012 Date and time the call was received
date 13:51:48 Depending on the setting, the format may differ.
BK * BK call: “*”, Normal call: Blank
EMR * EMR call: “*”, Normal call: Blank
Latitude 34.764667 Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degree)
(+: North latitude, –: South latitude)
Longitude 135.375333 Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degree)
(+: East longitude, –: West longitude)
Altitude 30.5 Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: ft)
SSID -A Records one of 0, -1 to -15 and -A to -Z.
GPS-A Car Icon: Converts to text
Symbol None: Code
Course 123 Caller’s course (unit: degree)
Speed 23.5 Caller’s speed (unit: mph)
GPS Time Time data that the caller station acquires the posi-
Stamp tion data
GPS Osaka City/ID-51 Caller is “DV-G”: Records the GPS message
Message Caller is “DV-A: Records the GPS-A comment
16-63
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ QSO/RX items (Continued)

Separator/Decimal (Default: Sep [,] Dec [.]*)

QSO/RX Log > CSV Format > Separator/Decimal (Separator/Decimal)
Select the separator and the decimal character for the CSV format.
• Sep [,] Dec [.] : Separator is “,” and Decimal is “.” for the CSV format.
• Sep [;] Dec [.] : Separator is “;” and Decimal is “.” for the CSV format.
• Sep [;] Dec [;] : Separator is “;” and Decimal is “;” for the CSV format.

*The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

Date (Default: mm/dd/yyyy*)

QSO/RX Log > CSV Format > Date (Date)
Select the date format between “yyyy/mm/dd,” “mm/dd/yyyy” and “dd/mm/
yyyy.” (y: year, m: month, d: day)

*The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.

16-64
Previous view

16 menu screen 30 milliseconds

Stand-by

Reception is
disabled
60 milliseconds

■■Function items No signal is received

for 5 seconds

Power Save (Default: Auto (Short))

50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Function
Stand-by> Power Save (Power Save)

Set the power

Reception
disabled
is save function to reduce current drain and conserve battery
30 milliseconds
100 milliseconds 300 milliseconds 300 milliseconds
power.Stand-by
No signal is received 60 seconds 60 seconds
When the
Reception
for is power save function is activated, the call sign or the beginning of
5 seconds
the signal may not be
disabled received correctly.
60 milliseconds

No signal is received
• for
OFF5 seconds : Turns the function OFF.
30 milliseconds 30 milliseconds
• Auto (Short)
Stand-by
: Sets the Power saving time to “Short”
30 milliseconds
Reception is 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Stand-by
Stand-by
disabled
60 milliseconds 120 milliseconds
Reception is
Reception
No signal isisreceived 60 seconds
disabled
disabled
for 5 seconds 60 milliseconds
100 milliseconds 300 milliseconds 300 milliseconds
No
No signal
signal is
is received
received 60 seconds 60 seconds
for
for 55 seconds
seconds

50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds

• Auto (Middle) : Sets the Power saving time to “Middle”
Stand-by
50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Stand-by
Reception is 30 milliseconds 30 milliseconds
Stand-by
disabled
Reception is 100 milliseconds 300 milliseconds 600 milliseconds
disabled
signal isisreceived10060
Reception
No seconds 60 seconds
milliseconds 300 milliseconds 300 milliseconds
disabled
for 5 seconds
No signal is received 60 milliseconds 60 seconds
60 seconds 120 milliseconds
for 5 seconds 60 seconds
No signal is received
for 5 seconds

• Auto (Long) : 
30Smilliseconds
ets the Power
30 saving time to “Long”
milliseconds
Stand-by 50 30
milliseconds
milliseconds 50 milliseconds
30 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Stand-by
Stand-by
Reception is
disabled
Reception
Reception isis 60 milliseconds 120 milliseconds
disabled
disabled 100 milliseconds
No signal is received milliseconds 300 milliseconds 240 milliseconds
60seconds
60
600 milliseconds
No 5signal
for is received
seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds
No signal is received 60 seconds
for 5 seconds
for 5 seconds

NOTE: The50Power Save function

milliseconds is disabled when50using
50 milliseconds an external power
milliseconds
Stand-by
supply, or if the Auto Reply function in the DV mode ismilliseconds
50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 set to “ON” or “Voice.”
Stand-by
Reception is
disabled 30 milliseconds
100 milliseconds 30 milliseconds
300 milliseconds 600 milliseconds
Reception is
Stand-by
disabled 60 seconds
No signal is received 100 milliseconds 60 seconds
300 milliseconds 900 milliseconds
for 5 seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds
Reception
No signal isisreceived
disabled
for 5 seconds 60 milliseconds 240 milliseconds

No signal is received 60 seconds

for 5 seconds

30 milliseconds 30 milliseconds
Stand-by 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds
Stand-by
Reception is
disabled
Reception is 60 milliseconds 240 milliseconds
disabled
100 milliseconds
60 seconds 300 milliseconds 900 milliseconds
No signal is received
for
No 5signal
seconds
is received 60 seconds 60 seconds
for 5 seconds

50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds 50 milliseconds

Stand-by

Reception is
disabled
100 milliseconds 300 milliseconds 900 milliseconds
No signal is received 16-65
60 seconds 60 seconds
for 5 seconds
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Function items (Continued)

Monitor (Default: Push)

Function > Monitor (Monitor)
Select the [SQL] monitor function method.
• Push : Hold down [SQL] to monitor the frequency. Release to stop monitor-
ing.
• Hold : Push [SQL] momentarily to monitor the frequency and push mo-
mentarily again to cancel it.

Dial Speed-UP (Default: ON)

Function > Dial Speed-UP (Dial Speed-UP)
Turn the dial speed acceleration ON or OFF.
The dial speed acceleration automatically speeds up the tuning dial speed
when you rapidly rotate [DIAL].
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Turns the function ON.

Auto Repeater
Function > Auto Repeater (Auto Repeater)
This item appears only in the Korean and U.S.A. version transceivers
The auto repeater function automatically turns the duplex operation and tone
encoder* ON or OFF.
The offset and repeater tone* are not changed by the auto repeater function.
Reset these setting values, if necessary.

For Korean versions

• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Turns ON the duplex operation and tone encoder*. (Default)

For U.S.A. version

• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON (DUP) : Turns ON the duplex operation only. (Default)
• ON (DUP, TONE) : Turns ON the duplex operation and tone encoder*.

*The tone encoder will not be turned ON in the DV mode.

16-66
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Function items (Continued)

Remote MIC Key

Function > Remote MIC Key (Remote MIC key)
The function assignments for keys on the optional HM-75LS SPEAKER-MI-
CROPHONE can be changed for simple remote control operation.

• During RX/Standby:
Function Description
--- No function
Push to increase the frequency, Memory channel, repeater or
UP
station call sign.
Push to decrease the frequency, Memory channel, repeater or
DOWN
station call sign.
VOL UP Push to turn up the volume level.
VOL DOWN Push to turn down the volume level.
Hold down [SQL] to monitor the frequency. Release to stop moni-
Monitor (Push)
toring.
Push [SQL] momentarily to monitor the frequency and push mo-
Monitor (Hold)
mentarily again to cancel it.
Default for “During RX/Standby” CALL Push to select a call channel.
MR (000 CH) In the Memory mode, push to select memory channel 000.

Volume level adjustment while MR (001 CH) In the Memory mode, push to select memory channel 001.
monitoring: VFO/MR Push to toggle between the VFO mode and the Memory mode.
DR Push to select the DR mode.
• When [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] FROM (DR) In the DR mode, push to select “FROM.”
are assigned, push these keys to TO (DR) In the DR mode, push to select “TO.”
adjust. Push to directly select the Home CH that is set to the selected
• When [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] are mode (VFO/Memory/DR).
Home CH
not assigned, but [UP]/[DOWN] While in the CALL CH or weather channel mode, or when no
are assigned, push these keys to Home CH is set, an error beep sounds.
adjust. BAND Push to select an operating band.
• When [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN]/ Hold down for 1 second to start a scan.
SCAN
[UP]/[DOWN] are not assigned, Push to stop the scan.
Push to set the frequency to be skipped during scanning.
push []/[] to adjust, if [Moni- Temporary
The selected frequencies are temporarily skipped during scan-
tor (Push)] or [Monitor (Hold)] is Skip
ning for faster scanning.
not assigned to []/[]. Hold down for 1 second to set the last calling station call sign to
RX>CS
“TO” (destination).
Hold down for 1 second to announce the frequency, operating
mode or call sign.
- In the VFO, Memory and Call channel mode, the frequency and
SPEECH
the operating mode are announced.
- In the DR mode, the call sign is announced. If Simplex is se-
lected, the frequency is announced.
Push to transmit the voice audio recorded on the microSD.
Voice TX
Hold down for 1 second to repeatedly transmit the voice audio.

• During TX:
Function Description
--- No function
VOL UP Push to turn up the volume level.
VOL DOWN Push to turn down the volume level.
Push to transmit the voice audio recorded on the microSD.
Voice TX Hold down for 1 second to repeatedly transmit the voice audio.
- To make a repeat transmission, [PTT] must be released.
T-CALL Push to transmit a 1750 Hz tone.
Default for “During TX”
16-67
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Function items (Continued)

Key Lock (Default: Normal)

Function > Key Lock (Key Lock)
Select the key lock type when the Key Lock function is activated.
• Normal : All keys and dials except [SQL] and [VOL] are locked.
• No SQL : All keys and dials except [SQL] is locked.
• No VOL : All keys and dials except [VOL] is locked.
• ALL : All keys and dials are locked.

NOTE: Regardless of the setting, the [PWR], [PTT] and [MENU] (lock
function only) are still accessible when the lock function is activated.

PTT Lock (Default: OFF)

Function > PTT Lock (PTT Lock)
Turn the PTT lock function ON and OFF.
To prevent accidental transmissions, this function disables [PTT].
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Turns the function ON.

Busy Lockout (Default: OFF)

Function > Busy Lockout (Busy Lockout)
Turn the busy lockout function ON or OFF.
This function inhibits transmission while receiving a signal, or when the
squelch is open.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Turns the function ON.

Time-Out Timer (Default: 5min)

Function > Time-Out Timer (Time-Out Timer)
To prevent accidental prolonged transmission, the transceiver has a time-out
timer.
The function inhibits continuous transmissions longer than the set time pe-
riod.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• 1 to 30 min : The transmission is cut OFF after the set time period ends (1,
3, 5, 10, 15 or 30 minutes).

Active band (Default: All)

Function > Active Band (Active Band)
Allows continuous frequency selection of the operating frequency across all
bands using [DIAL].
• Single : The operating frequency can be selected within the current band.
• ALL : The operating frequency can be continuously selected.

NOTE:
When “Single” is selected, push [QUICK] to show the quick menu, and
then select “BAND” for another band selection.
This setting is for the [DIAL] operation, so all frequencies will be scanned.
16-68
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Function items (Continued)

MIC Gain (Internal) (Default: 2)

Function > MIC Gain (Internal) (MIC Gain (Internal))
Set the internal microphone sensitivity to between 1 (minimum sensitivity)
and 4 (maximum sensitivity), to suit your preference.
Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to your voice.

MIC Gain (External) (Default: 2)

Function > MIC Gain (External) (MIC Gain (External))
Set the external microphone sensitivity to between 1 (minimum sensitivity)
and 4 (maximum sensitivity), to suit your preference.
Higher values make the microphone more sensitive to your voice.
The external microphone is connected to the [MIC/SP] jack.

Data Speed (Default: 9600bps)

Function > Data Speed (Data Speed)
Select the data transmission speed for low-speed data communication, or
between the [DATA] jack and external modules like a GPS receiver, and so
on, to 4800 bps or 9600 bps.

VOX (Default: OFF)

Function > VOX > VOX (VOX)
Turn the VOX function ON or OFF.
The VOX (Voice Operated Transmission) function starts transmission without
pushing [PTT] when you speak into the microphone; then, automatically re-
turns to receive when you stop speaking.
The VOX function requires an optional headset. (p. 18-3)
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Starts transmission without pushing [PTT] when you speak into the
microphone; then automatically returns to receive when you stop
speaking.

VOX Level (Default: 5)

Function > VOX > VOX Level (VOX Level)
Set the VOX gain level to between 1 and 10 or OFF.
Higher values make the VOX function more sensitive to your voice.
To turn the VOX function OFF, select “OFF.”
• OFF : Turns the VOX function OFF.
• 1 to 10 : 1:The minimum sensitivity.
10: The maximum sensitivity.

16-69
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Function items (Continued)

VOX Delay (Default: 0.5sec)

Function > VOX > VOX Delay (VOX Delay)
Set the VOX Delay to 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 or 3.0 seconds.
The VOX Delay is the amount of time the transmitter stays ON after you stop
speaking before the VOX switches to receive.

VOX Time-Out Timer (Default: 3min)

Function > VOX > VOX Time-Out Timer (VOX Time-Out Timer)
Set the VOX Time-Out Timer to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10 or 15 minutes to prevent an
accidental prolonged transmission.
To disable the function, set it to “OFF.”
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10 or 15 min : If a continuous transmission exceeds the set pe-
riod, the transmission will be cut off.

Headset Select (Default: Other)

Function > VOX > Headset Select (Headset Select)
Select the headset type to be connected.
• HS-95 : Select when the HS-95 is connected.
• Other : Select when the HS-94 or HS-97 is connected.

CI-V Address (Default: 86)

Function > CI-V > CI-V Address (CI-V Address)
To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has its own Icom standard
address in hexadecimal code.
The ID-51A/E’s default address is 86.
When 2 or more ID-51A/Es are controlled through a PC at the same time, set
a different address for each device between 01h and DFh (hexadecimal).

CI-V Baud Rate (Default: Auto)

Function > CI-V > CI-V Baud Rate (CI-V Baud Rate)
Set the CI-V data transfer speed to 300, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps or
Auto.
When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automatically set according to the
data rate of the controller.

16-70
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Function items (Continued)

CI-V Transceive (Default: OFF)

Function > CI-V > CI-V Transceive (CI-V Transceive)
Turn the CI-V Transceive function ON or OFF.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : When you change a setting on the transceiver, the same change is
automatically set on other connected transceivers or receivers, and
vice versa.

Heterodyne (Default: Normal)

Function > Heterodyne (Heterodyne)
Set the 1st Local Oscillator frequency.
Depending on a combination of the two operating frequencies in the VHF/
UHF Dualwatch mode, the transceiver might generate a spurious signal on
a specific receive frequency. This may cause the S-meter to fluctuate, even
when no signal is received, for example.
If this occurs, the Heterodyne function may help. The Heterodyne function
shifts the 1st Local Oscillator frequency to the opposite side of the signal to
change the frequency combination.

Charging (Power ON) (Default: OFF)

Function > Charging (Power ON) (Charging (Power ON))
When the battery pack is attached, and the optional CP-12L, CP-19R or
OPC-254L external DC power cable is connected, this function enables
charging the transceiver's battery even if the power is ON.

• OFF : The transceiver's battery cannot be charged when the power is ON.
• ON : The transceiver's battery can be charged even if the power is ON.

16-71
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Display items
Backlight (Default: Auto (DC IN:ON))
Display > Backlight (Backlight)
Select the transceiver backlight option.
• OFF : The backlight does not light.
• ON : The backlight lights continuously.
• Auto : The backlight lights when an operation is performed, and
goes out after the time period set in the Backlight Timer.
• Auto (DC IN:ON) : The backlight lights when an operation is performed, and
goes out after the time period set in the Backlight Timer,
but lights continuously while operating with an external
DC power source.

NOTE:
While in the exclusive GPS logger mode, the transceiver uses the “Auto”
setting even if “ON” or “Auto (DC IN:ON)” is selected.
When [PWR] is pushed, the backlight lights for the set period of time (set
in “Backlight Timer”) when “Auto” or “Auto (DC-IN:ON)” is selected.

Backlight Timer (Default: 5sec)

Display > Backlight Timer (Backlight Timer)
Select the backlight lighting time period to between 5 and 10 seconds.
Depending on the Backlight option, the backlight lights for this set period,
and then automatically goes out.

LCD Dimmer (Default: Bright)

Display > LCD Dimmer (LCD Dimmer)
Select the LCD backlight brightness level between Bright and Dark.
• Bright : The LCD backlight brightness level is bright.
• Dark : The LCD backlight brightness level is dim.

LCD Contrast (Default: 8)

Display > LCD Contrast (LCD Contrast)
Set the contrast of the LCD.
Set the level between 1, the lowest contrast, and 16, the highest.

16-72
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Display items (Continued)

Busy LED (Default: ON)

Display > Busy LED (Busy LED)
The TX/RX indicator lights green while receiving a signal, or the squelch is
open. It can be turned OFF to conserve battery power, if desired.
• OFF : The indicator does not light, even if a signal is received.
• ON : The indicator lights green while receiving a signal, or the squelch is
open.

NOTE: The indicator lights red while transmitting, regardless of the setting.

RX Call Sign (Default: Auto)

Display > RX Call Sign (RX Call Sign)
When a call is received, select whether or not to display the call sign of the
caller station.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• Auto : The caller station’s call sign automatically scrolls once,
and then disappears.
• Auto (RX Hold) : The caller station’s call sign automatically scrolls once,
and then remains on the LCD until the signal disappears.

(Example : When receiving a call from “JM1ZLK”)

NOTE: When “Auto” or “Auto (RX Hold)” is selected, and if the call sign and
name of the caller station is programmed in Your Call Sign screen, the
programmed name is displayed after showing the call sign.

16-73
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Display items (Continued)

RX Message (Default: Auto)

Display > RX Message (RX Message)
Select whether or not to display and scroll a received message.
• OFF : Does not display the message.
To check the message, hold down [CD] for 1 second to display the
call record.
• Auto : Automatically displays and scrolls the message.
The message is automatically displayed every 30 seconds until
the signal disappears.
When “Auto” or “Auto (RX Hold)” is selected in RX Call Sign Dis-
play, the message is displayed after displaying the caller station’s
call sign.

(Example : When receiving a message “HELLO CQ”)

Reply Position Display (Default: ON)

Display > Reply Position Display (Reply Position Display)
Select whether or not to display the caller's position data when the data is
included in the Auto Reply signal.
• OFF : Does not display the caller's position data.
• ON : Automatically displays the caller's position data.

16-74
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Display items (Continued)

DV RX Backlight (Default: ON)

Display > DV RX Backlight (DV RX Backlight)
Turn the DV RX Backlight function ON or OFF.
In the DV mode, this function turns ON the LCD backlight while displaying the
calling station’s call sign or a received message on the LCD.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : The LCD backlight automatically lights while displaying the calling
station’s call sign or a received message on the LCD.
The backlight stays on while the call sign or message is scrolling.

TX Call Sign (Default: Your Call Sign)

Display > TX Call Sign (TX Call Sign)
Select whether or not to display your own or the destination station's call sign
while transmitting.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• Your Call Sign: Displays and scrolls the destination’s call sign.
When the called station’s call sign and name are pro-
grammed in your memory, the transceiver shows the
name after the call sign in any DV mode except for the DR
mode.
• My Call Sign : Displays and scrolls your own call sign.

(Example : Shows the destination’s call sign)

Scroll Speed (Default: Fast)

Display > Scroll Speed (Scroll Speed)
This item sets the scrolling speed of the message, call sign, or other text, that
is displayed on the transceiver's LCD.
• Slow : The speed is set to slow.
• Fast : The speed is set to fast.

16-75
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Display items (Continued)

Opening Message (Default: ON)

Display > Opening Message (Opening Message)
Select the opening message that is displayed on the LCD at power ON.
• OFF : Opening message display is skipped.
• ON : Icom logo, MY call sign and the product model (“ID-51A” or “ID-
51E”)* are displayed at power ON.
*Depending on the version.

Voltage (Power ON) (Default: ON)

Display > Voltage (Power ON) (Voltage (Power ON))
Select whether or not to display the voltage of the battery or external DC
power source on the LCD at power ON.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : When the transceiver is turned ON, displays the voltage of the bat-
tery or external DC power source, on the LCD.

(Example : When the voltage of 8.0 V)

NOTE: When the voltage is above 15.6V external DC power source, “HI
Voltage” is displayed.

Display Language (Default: English)

Display > Display Language (Display Language)
This item will appear only when “Japanese” is selected in System
Language. See page 16-77 “Choose your language carefully” about
setting cautions.

Set the screen display language type in the DR mode or Menu mode to Eng-
lish or Japanese.

16-76
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Display items (Continued)

System Language (Default: English)

Display > System Language (System Language)
Set the system language of the transceiver to English or Japanese.
• English : The system language of the transceiver is English.
- Only alphabetical characters (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9) and sym-
bols (! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~)
can be displayed. If Japanese characters (Kanji, Hiragana and
Katakana) are included, the LCD shows “=” or “_” instead of
that character. In this case, you can only delete “=” or “_” in the
transceiver's edit mode.
- The Display Language item will be hidden.
• Japanese : The system language of the transceiver is Japanese.
Kanji, Hiragana and Katakana characters, and the 2-bytes sym-
bols can be displayed on the LCD.
To display such characters in the DR mode or Menu mode, Dis-
play Language must be set to “Japanese.”

Choose your language carefully

When the system language of the transceiver is set to Japanese, the ID-
51A/E has the capability to display both English and Japanese characters.
HOWEVER, if you select Japanese as the display language (p. 16-76), all
menu items throughout the ID-51A/E system will be displayed in only Japa-
nese characters. There will be no English item names. Unless you are fluent
in reading Japanese characters, use this feature with extreme caution.
If you change the ID-51A/E’s language to Japanese, and can’t understand
the menu system in the new setting, you will have to change the language
back to English in “Display Language” or “System Language” (this item), or
by doing a partial reset of the ID-51A/E CPU. A partial reset will not clear
your call sign databases.

To do a partial reset of the CPU, do the following steps:

1. Push [MENU] .
2. P
 ush D-pad() to select the bottom item, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

3. Push D-pad() to select the bottom item, and

then push D-pad(Ent).

4. Push D-pad() to select the upper item, and

then push D-pad(Ent).

5. The dialog appears. Push D-pad() to select

the upper option, and then push D-pad(Ent).
- The transceiver displays “PARTIAL RESET,”
then the partial reset is completed.

16-77
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Sounds items
Volume Select (Default: All)
Sounds > Volume Select (Volume Select)
Selects to adjust the audio output level of all bands together, all separately,
or just the BC Radio separately.
• All : The audio output level of the BC Radio, A band and B
band are adjusted together.
• BC Radio Separate : The audio output level of the BC Radio is separately
adjusted.
The audio output level of A band and B band are ad-
justed together.
• Separate : The audio output level of the BC Radio, A band and B
band are separately adjusted.

NOTE: When an EMR signal is received, the audio output level for A band
and/or B band may be set to the preprogrammed level in the EMR AF
Level, depending on this setting.
• The audio output level for the BC Radio is not changed, because the EMR func-
tion is for the DV mode operation.

When “All” or “BC Radio Separate” is selected:

The audio output level for A band and B band is set to the programmed
level in EMR AF Level.
When “Separate” is selected:
Either the audio output level for A band or B band that the signal is re-
ceived on, is set to the programmed level in EMR AF Level.

BC Radio Level (Default: 0)

Sounds > BC Radio Level (BC Radio Level)
Sets the initial audio output level difference between the BC Radio and the A
and B bands when “All” is set in Volume Select.
The adjustable range is +5 higher to –5 lower.
• +5 to +1 : The BC Radio audio output level is higher than the VFO mode
audio.
• 0 : The BC Radio audio output level is same as the VFO mode au-
dio.
• –5 to –1 : The BC Radio audio output level is lower than the VFO mode
audio.

Earphone Mode (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Earphone Mode (Earphone Mode)
Turn the earphone mode ON or OFF.
• OFF : Turn OFF the earphone mode.
• ON : Turn ON the earphone mode.
While in the earphone mode, the audio volume level is automatically
adjusted to the comfortable level when the optional earphone is con-
nected to the [MIC/SP] jack.

16-78
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Sounds items (Continued)

Beep Level (Default: 3)

Sounds > Beep Level (Beep Level)
Select a beep audio output level between 0 (OFF), 1 (minimum) and 9 (maxi-
mum).

Beep/Vol Level Link (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Beep/Vol Level Link (Beep/Vol Level Link)
Select whether or not the beep output level can be adjusted by the [VOL]
control.
• OFF : The output level is fixed to the level set in Beep Level.
• ON : The output level can be adjusted by rotating [VOL].

Key-Touch Beep (Default: ON)

Sounds > Key-Touch Beep (Key-Touch Beep)
Turn the confirmation beep tones ON or OFF.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF for silent operation.
• ON : A beep sounds when a key is pushed.

NOTE: The beep tone sounds regardless of this setting when:

- the power is turned ON
- a matched tone signal is received if the pocket beep is activated.
- the transceiver is automatically turned OFF. (The beep sounds before
powering OFF.)
- TOT (Time-Out Timer) function is activated. (Approximately 10 seconds
before the Time-Out Timer cuts off transmission.)
- the cloning read or write operation starts or finishes.
- a received signal stops the scan. (Scan Stop Beep)
- the communicating station finishes transmitting or the receive signal dis-
appears while in the digital mode operation. (Standby Beep)

Home CH Beep (Default: ON)

Sounds > Home CH beep (Home CH Beep)
Turn the Home CH Beep ON or OFF.
• OFF : No beep.
• ON : When the specified Home CH is selected by rotating [DIAL], a beep
sounds.

NOTE: The Home CH frequency, memory or repeater can be respectively

selected. (p. 17-5)

16-79
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Sounds items (Continued)

Band Edge Beep (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Band Edge Beep (Band Edge Beep)
Turn the Band edge beep ON or OFF.
• OFF : Band edge beep is OFF.
• ON : When you tune into or out of the AIR, VHF and UHF band’s fre-
quency range with [DIAL], a beep sounds.

Scan Stop Beep (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Scan Stop Beep (Scan Stop Beep)
Turn the scan stop beep ON or OFF.
• OFF : No beep sounds.
• ON : A beep sounds when a received signal stops the scan.

Standby Beep (Default: ON)

Sounds > Standby Beep (Standby Beep)
Turn the standby beep function ON or OFF.
This function sounds a beep after a received signal disappears.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• ON : Turns the function ON to sound a beep.
• ON (to me: High Tone) : Turns the function ON to sound a beep. If the sig-
nal is addressed to your call sign, a high beep
sounds.

• The standby beep sounds even when “OFF” is selected in Key-touch

beep.
• The standby beep output level follows the Beep level setting.

16-80
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Sounds items (Continued)

Sub Band Mute (Default: OFF)

Sounds > Sub Band Mute (Sub Band Mute)
Select whether or not to mute the SUB band audio signal while receiving on
the MAIN band, and/or sound a beep when a signal disappears on the SUB
band.
• OFF : Disables the SUB band mute function.
• Mute : While receiving on the MAIN band, the SUB band audio sig-
nal is muted.
• Beep :W  hen a signal disappears on the SUB band, a beep
sounds.
The beep sounds even if no signal is received on the MAIN
band.
• Mute & Beep : While receiving on the MAIN band, the SUB band audio sig-
nal is muted.
While receiving on the SUB band, and a signal disappears,
a beep sounds.
- The beep sounds even if no signal is received on the MAIN band.

Scope AF Output (Default: ON)

Sounds > Scope AF Output (Scope AF Output)
Select the audio output option during a sweep by the Band Scope function.

• OFF : No audio is heard during the sweep.

• ON : The audio is heard during the sweep.

16-81
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Time set items

Date/Time
Time Set > Date/Time (DATE/TIME)
Manually set the date and time that is displayed on the right hand corner of
the screen. The time is displayed in the 24 hour format.

Setting the date

qqPush D-pad(), and then push D-pad(Ent) to select “DATE”.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

wwPush and to move the cursor, and then select between year, month
and day to change.

Cursor

eeRotate [DIAL] to select each number.

rrRepeat steps w and e to enter the year, month and day, and then push
D-pad(Ent).

Setting the time

qqPush D-pad(), and then push D-pad(Ent) to select “TIME”.
wwPush and to move the cursor, and then select between hour and
minute to change.

Cursor

eeRotate [DIAL] to select each number.

rrRepeat steps w and e to enter the hour and minute, and then push D-
pad(Ent).

16-82
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Time set items (Continued)

GPS time correct (Default: Auto)

Time Set > GPS Time Correct (GPS Time Correct)
This function can correct its time by using the time information that a GPS
sentence contains.
It is corrected by calculating the received UTC (Universal Time of Coordi-
nated) time and the set [UTC Offset].
• OFF : The function is OFF.
• Auto : The function is ON.

UTC Offset (Default: ±0:00)

Time Set > UTC Offset (UTC Offset)
Set the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) and the
local time to between –14:00 and +14:00 in 00:05 steps.

Auto Power OFF (Default: OFF)

Time Set > Auto Power OFF (Auto Power OFF)
This function automatically turns OFF the power after no operation has not
been performed for the preprogrammed time.
• OFF : Turns the function OFF.
• 30 – 120 min : Select the desired Auto Power OFF time between 30, 60, 90
and 120 minutes.

16-83
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■SD Card items

Settings and functions for microSD card.
See Section 2 for details.
Load Setting
SD Card > Load Setting (LOAD SETTING)
Select from the list when you load the setting file.

Save Setting
SD Card > Save Setting (SAVE SETTING)
Save the setting file.

SD Card Info
SD Card > SD Card Info (SD CARD INFO)
Displays the SD card’s free space and its remaining recording time.

Format
SD Card > Format
Formats the microSD care, deleting all data.

Unmount
SD Card > Unmount
Electrically unmounts the microSD card while the power is ON.

16-84
Previous view

16 menu screen

■■Others items
Voltage
Others > Information > Voltage (VOLTAGE)
Shows the battery voltage of the attached Li-ion battery pack or external
power supply.
When the Li-ion battery pack is attached, the remaining battery voltage is
shown in eleven level steps.
When the optional battery case is attached, the battery voltage is shown.

Version
Others > Information > Version (VERSION)
Shows the transceiver firmware’s version number.

Clone Mode
Others > Clone > Clone Mode
Select to read or write the CS-51 data from or to the PC, and/or to receive
data from a Master transceiver.
See page 17-21 for details.

Clone Master Mode

Others > Clone > Clone Master Mode
Select to write your ID-51A/E (Master) data to another ID-51A/E (Sub).
See page 17-21 for details.

16-85
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Other items (Continued)

Partial Reset
Others > Reset > Partial Reset
A Partial reset resets operating settings to their default values (VFO frequen-
cy, VFO settings, menu contents) without clearing the items below:
• Memory channel contents
• Scan Edge contents
• Call channel contents
• Call sign memories
• Message data
• DTMF memory contents
• GPS Memory contents
• Repeater list
• BC Radio Memory

qqAfter selecting “Partial Reset,” the “Partial Reset?” dialog appears. Push
D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

wwThe transceiver displays "PARTIAL RESET," then the partial reset is com-
pleted.

16-86
 Previous view

16 menu screen

■■ Other items (Continued)

All Reset
Others > Reset > All Reset
Reset the CPU, if the internal CPU malfunctions due to static electricity, and
so on. All reset clears all programming and returns all settings to their factory
defaults (including the programmed data you purchased).
Therefore, after the All resetting, you cannot use the transceiver in the DR
mode until reprogramming the repeater list.

✓✓ Recommend!
Before the All resetting, we recommend you save the programmed data you
purchased onto a micro SD card.
See page 2-5 for details.

qqAfter selecting “All Reset,” the “All Reset?” dialog appears.

Push D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
wwThe “Clears all settings and memories. Disables the DR mode.” dialog ap-
pears. Push D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-pad(Ent).

eeThe transceiver displays "ALL RESET," then the partial reset is complet-
ed.

16-87
Previous view

Section 17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Voice TX function. .............................................. 17-2
DD Recording....................................................... 17-2
DD The recorded voice audio playing back.......... 17-2
DD To transmit the recorded voice audio............. 17-3
DD Repeat Time setting....................................... 17-4
DD TX Monitor function........................................ 17-4
■■ Home CH Beep function. ................................... 17-5
DD Home CH setting............................................ 17-5
DD Home CH operation....................................... 17-5
■■ Speech function. ................................................ 17-6
DD [DIAL] speech function setting....................... 17-6
DD Mode speech function setting........................ 17-7
■■ Using the DTMF memory................................... 17-8
DD DTMF code programming.............................. 17-8
DD Monitoring the stored DTMF code. ................ 17-9
DD DTMF code transmission............................. 17-10
DD DTMF code transmission (Direct Input). ...... 17-11
DD Setting DTMF transfer speed....................... 17-12
■■ Tone squelch operation.................................... 17-13
DD Tone squelch frequency setting and
operation...................................................... 17-13
■■ DTCS squelch operation.................................. 17-15
DD DTCS code setting and operation................ 17-15
■■ Cloning function. .............................................. 17-17
DD Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using
a microSD card............................................. 17-17
DD Cloning from a PC using a microSD card.... 17-20
DD Cloning from a PC using an optional data
cable............................................................. 17-20
DD Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a
cable............................................................. 17-21
■■ CI-V information............................................... 17-22
DD CI-V data setting.......................................... 17-22
DD CI-V connection example............................. 17-22
DD Data format.................................................. 17-22
DD Command table............................................ 17-23

17-1
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Voice TX function
The Voice TX function transmits the recorded audio on
a microSD card once, or repeatedly, for up to 10 min-
utes at the specified interval.

✓✓ Convenient!
When the key function [Voice TX] is assigned to the key
on the optional HM-75LS speaker-microphone, the
voice audio recorded onto the microSD can be trans-
mitted when the key is pushed.

NOTE: Be sure to insert a microSD card to the [mi-

cro SD] slot of the transceiver before starting to re-
cord a voice audio.

DDRecording
qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice TX”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Record,” and then push D-

pad(Ent).
While recording
rrPush [PTT] to start recording.
• After releasing [PTT], the recording is cancelled.
• Maximum record period is 1 minute.
• Hold the microphone 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches) from your Audio level is displayed
mouth, then speak at a normal voice level.
• Only one announcement can be recorded. The current
contents will be overwritten if you record again.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

DDThe recorded voice audio playing back

The recorded voice audio for the Voice TX function can
be played back.
Recording time
qqPush [MENU] . is displayed
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice TX”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
eePush D-pad() to select “Record,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad(Ent) to start the playback. While playing back
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

When no microSD card is inserted: ✓✓ Information

When no microSD card is in- You can delete the recorded audio.
serted, this error message is ➥➥On the DV AUTO REPLY screen, push [QUICK] ,
displayed. and then push D-pad(Ent).

17-2
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Voice TX function (Continued)

DDTo transmit the recorded voice audio
qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Voice TX”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “<<Single TX>>” or “<<Re-

peat TX>>,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
<<Single TX>>
The transceiver transmits the recorded voice audio
once.
<<Repeat TX>>
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded
voice audio for up to 10 minutes at the interval speci-
fied in “Repeat Time.”
• The recorded voice audio is repeatedly transmitted for up
to 10 minutes. Even if 10 minutes pass while transmitting,
the voice audio is completely transmitted.
• One of the following steps will cancel the transmission.
Blinks while
- Push [PTT].
transmitting.
- Turn OFF the power, then turn it ON again.
- Push any key (except for [POWER]).
- Rotate [DIAL].
• Once the Repeat TX is made, the transceiver pauses
until the end of the “Repeat Time,” then transmits again.
After the second transmission, the Repeat TX continues
pausing, if receiving a signal, even if the Busy Lockout is
ON.
B
 ut if the squelch is manually opened in the FM mode,
the voice audio is repeatedly transmitted, according to • Voice TX Waiting screen for <<Repeat TX>>
the repeat time setting.
rrPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

The Voice TX can be selected on the QUICK Menu

screen.

➥➥Push [QUICK] , and then push D-pad() to se-

lect “Voice TX.”

17-3
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Voice TX function (Continued)

DDRepeat Time setting
Set the repeat interval to between 1 and 15 seconds (in
1 second steps) for the voice repeat transmittion.
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded
voice audio at this interval.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice TX),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice TX > TX Set> Repeat Time)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the repeat interval to be-
tween 1 and 15 seconds (in 1 second steps).
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

DDTX Monitor function

Turn the TX Monitor function ON or OFF. (Default: ON)

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (Voice TX),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Voice TX > TX Set> TX Monitor)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above and
push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent) to enter,
one or more times until the last screen is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to turn the TX Monitor function ON
or OFF.
• OFF : The TX voice audio is not output from the speaker.
• ON : The TX voice audio is output from the speaker.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

17-4
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Home CH Beep function

When the specified Home CH is selected by rotating
[DIAL], a beep sounds.
The Home CH is set in each of the VFO mode, Memory
mode and DR mode of the transceiver.
You will know the Home CH selection without looking Example: Set “146.010 MHz” frequency in the VFO as
at the display. the Home CH.

DDHome CH setting
qqSelect a frequency to be set as the Home CH.
• While in the DR mode, select “FROM.” Select a
wwPush [QUICK] . frequency
eePush D-pad() to select “Home CH Set,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “Set Frequency,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to set the Home CH, and exit the
QUICK Menu.
• While in the DR mode, select “Set Repeater,” or while in
the Memory mode, select “Set Channel.”

DDHome CH operation
After setting the Home CH, rotate [DIAL] in the speci-
fied mode.
When the Home CH is selected, a beep sounds.

Push D-pad(Ent) to
set the Home CH.
Beep

✓✓ Convenient!
When the key function [Home CH] is assigned to the
key on the optional HM-75LS speaker-microphone,
the specified Home CH can be selected when the key
is pushed.

✓✓ Information
You can clear the Home CH setting.
➥➥Push D-pad() to select “Clear” in the step r as
described above, and then push D-pad(Ent)

17-5
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Speech function Example: When “Dallas” (K5TIT B) is selected

in “FROM,” hold down [SPCH]
The Speech function audibly announces the displayed
frequency and operating mode in the VFO, Memory or
Call channel modes, or call sign in the DR mode, when
holding down [SPCH] .
Also, other speech functions, [DIAL] speech function
and Mode speech function can be used.

NOTE: When a call is received during an announce-

ment in the DV mode, the received audio will be mut-
ed, and no audio is recorded onto the microSD card.
IT B
Except in the DV mode, the received audio will be K5T
recorded, even during an announcement.

DD[DIAL] speech function setting

The Dial Speech function enables the transceiver to
announce the frequency or repeater call sign that is se-
lected by rotating [DIAL].

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “DIAL SPEECH,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

NOTE: If a call is received during an announcement,

the announcement is cancelled, and the received
audio is heard.

The detail settings for the Speech functions

You can set the details settings for the Speech func-
tions in the Menu screen.
When rotating [DIAL] after setting
• SPEECH Language (p. 16-60) the Dial Speech function.
Set the speech language to English or Japanese.
(MENU > SPEECH > SPEECH Language) [DIAL]

• Alphabet (p. 16-60)

Select either “Normal” or “Phonetic Code” to announce
the alphabet character.
(MENU > SPEECH > Alphabet)

• SPEECH Speed (p. 16-60)

Set the speech speed to Low (slow) or High (fast).
IT B
(MENU > SPEECH > SPEECH Speed) K5T

• SPEECH Level (p. 16-60)

Enter a volume level number between 0 (minimum)
and 9 (maximum) for the voice synthesizer.
(MENU > SPEECH > SPEECH Level)

17-6
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Speech function (Continued)

DDMode speech function setting

The Mode Speech function enables the transceiver to
announce the selected operating mode when the mode
switch is pushed.

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SPEECH”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “MODE SPEECH,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

When pushing [MODE] after setting the

Mode Speech function.

FM

17-7
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Using the DTMF memory

The transceiver can stores up to 16 channels of DTMF Example: Stores the DTMF code, “012345” into the
memory with 24-digit DTMF code. DTMF memory channel “d0.”

DDDTMF code programming

qqPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DTMF/T-
CALL”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “DTMF Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• DTMF memory channel list (d0 to d#) is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired DTMF memory
channel, then push [QUICK] .
ttPush D-pad() to select “Edit,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to enter DTMF memory edit mode.
yyRotate [DIAL] to select the desired code, the push
D-pad(Ent) to set the code.
Repeat the above step to enter the desired DTMF
codes.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
When the cursor is on the 24th digit, the cursor can be
moved to backward.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
uuWhen all digits are set, push D-pad(Ent).
• The entered DTMF codes are stored into the DTMF mem-
ory channel, and automatically return to DTMF memory
screen.
iiPush
 [MENU] to exit the DTMF memory edit
mode.
DTMF memory edit mode

✓✓ Information
You can clear the prorammed DTMF code.
➥➥Push D-pad() to select “Clear” in the step r as
described above, and then push D-pad(Ent)
Cursor

Stored DTMF code

17-8
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Using the DTMF memory

DDMonitoring the stored DTMF code

Select the desired DTMF memory channel to be moni-
tored in DTMF memory screen, then push [SQL].
The stored DTMF code sounds.
• DTMF code can also be monitored with the following
steps; Select the desired DTMF memory channel to
be monitored, then push [QUICK] .
Push D-pad() to select “DTMF Monitor,” and then
push D-pad(Ent) to monitor the selected DTMF code.

[SQL]

DTMF code sounds

17-9
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Using the DTMF memory (Continued)

DDDTMF code transmission
qqPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen. Example: Set the DTMF code “012345” stored in DTMF
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DTMF/T- memory channel “d1” for transmission.
CALL”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “DTMF Memory,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• DTMF memory channel list (d0 to d#) is displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select the desired DTMF memory
channel, then push D-pad(Ent).
• Beeps sound, and the selected DTMF channel is set for
transmission.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
yyWhile holding down [PTT], push [SQL] to transmit
the selected DTMF code.
• The transceiver keeps transmission until the all pro-
grammed DTMF code is transmitted even [PTT] is re-
leased.

About 1750 Hz tone

DTMF code to be
When “T-CALL” is selected in the DTMF MEMORY transmitted.
screen, 1750 Hz tone can be transmitted.
• While holding down [PTT], push [SQL] to transmit 1750 Hz
tone is transmitted.
The tone is transmitted while holding down [SQL].
• The 1750 Hz tone can be heard from a speaker.

The DTMF code transmission can be made on the

QUICK Menu screen.

q Push [QUICK] , and then push D-pad() to se-

lect “DTMF TX,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
w Push D-pad() to select the desired DTMF mem-
ory channel, and then push D-pad(Ent).

DTMF code scrolls

during transmission.

17-10
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Using the DTMF memory (Continued)

DDDTMF code transmission (Direct Input) Example: Directly input the DTMF code “013579AB”
qqPush [QUICK] . for transmission.
wwPush D-pad() to select “Direct Input,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• DTMF code direct input screen is displayed.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eeRotate [DIAL] to select the desired code, the push

D-pad(Ent) to set the code.
Repeat the above step to enter the desired DTMF
codes.
• Push D-pad() to move the cursor backward or forward.
When the cursor is on the 24th digit, the cursor can be
Select
moved to backward.
• Push [CLR] to delete the selected character, or hold
down [CLR] to continuously delete the characters,
first to the right, and then to the left of the cursor.
rrWhen all digits are set, push D-pad(Ent).
• The transceiver automatically transmits the programmed
DTMF code.

DTMF code direct

input screen

DTMF code scrolls

during transmission.

17-11
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Using the DTMF memory (Continued)

DDSetting DTMF transfer speed
The DTMF transfer speed can be selected. Example: Set the DTMF transfer speed to 300 milli-
seconds.
qqPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen.
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DTMF/T-
CALL”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “DTMF Speed,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select a desired transfer speed,
then push D-pad(Ent)
• 100ms : Transfer the DTMF tones at about 100 millisec-
onds per code.
5 characters per second.
• 200ms : Transfer the DTMF tones at about 200 millisec-
onds per code.
2.5 characters per second.
• 300ms : Transfer the DTMF tones at about 300 millisec-
onds per code.
1.6 characters per second.
• 500ms : Transfer the DTMF tones at about 500 millisec-
onds per code.
1 character per second.
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

o, P
a a-
Pi, P -, Po-, P
Pi

When “100ms” is se- When “500ms” is se-

lected, the DTMF trans- lected, the DTMF trans-
fer speed is fast. fer speed is slow.

17-12
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Tone squelch operation

The tone squelch opens only when you receive a signal
containing a matching subaudible tone during FM or Select FM or
FM narrow mode. You can silently wait for calls from FM-N mode.
others using the same tone. Set a desired op-
Also, reversed tone squelch function is ready to mutes erating frequency.
the squelch when a signal containing a matched sub-
audible tone.

DDTone
 squelch frequency setting and op-
eration
qqPush [V/MHz] once or more times to select the
VFO mode.
wwPush [MODE] once or more times to select FM
or FM-N (FM narrow) mode.
eeRotate [DIAL] to select a desired operating frequency.
rrPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen.
ttPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/
TONE…”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

yyPush D-pad() to select “TSQL Freq,” and then push

D-pad(Ent).
• The selected tone squelch frequency is displayed.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired tone squelch fre-
quency, then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: 100.0 Hz)
• Select a tone squelch frequency within 67.0 to 254.1 Hz.

✓✓ Information
To return to the default tone squelcy frequency, push
[QUICK] in the step y as described above, and
then push D-pad(Ent)

☞ Continued to the step i on the next page

17-13
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Tone squelch operation

DD Tone squelch frequency setting and operation (Continued)
Continued from step u on the previous page.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
ooPush [QUICK] .
!0Push D-pad() to select “TONE,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!1 Push D-pad() to select either “TSQLS" or

“TSQL.”
• TSQLS : The tone squelch with pocket beep
function ON.
• TSQL : The tone squelch function ON.
• When stands by the reversed tone squelch function, se-
lect “TSQL-R.”
!2 Push D-pad(Ent) to set the tone squelch function,
and then close the QUICK Menu screen.
!3 Holding down [PTT] and call a desired station.
Operate as the normal way.

For your information: Sounds beep when a call is

received.
If “TSQLS” is selected in step !1, beeps sound
for 30 seconds and the icon “S” blinks when a call
with the matched tone signal is received.
➥➥After receiving a call, hold down [PTT] within
30 seconds then start conversation, or push D-
pad(Ent) to cancel the pocket beep function (“S”
icon disappears).After that, the transceiver selects
regular tone squelch operation.
• When receiving a call with “TSQLS”

Appears.
• When reversed tone
squelch is selected
in step !,1 “TSQL-R”
icon appears.
...
,Beep
eep
p, B
Bee

17-14
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■DTCS squelch operation

The tone squelch opens only when you receive a signal
containing a matching DTCS code during FM or FM
narrow mode. You can silently wait for calls from others
using the same tone. Select FM or
Also, reversed tone squelch function is ready to mutes FM-N mode.
the squelch when a signal containing a matched DTCS Set a desired op-
code. erating frequency.

DDDTCS code setting and operation

qqPush [V/MHz] once or more times to select the
VFO mode.
wwPush [MODE] once or more times to select FM
or FM-N (FM narrow) mode.
eeRotate [DIAL] to select a desired operating frequency.
rrPush [MENU] to select the MENU list screen.
ttPush D-pad() to select the root item (“DUP/
TONE…”), and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

yyPush D-pad() to select “DTCS Code,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
• The selected tone squelch frequency is displayed.
uuRotate [DIAL] to select a desired DTCS code, and
then push D-pad(Ent).
(Example: 125)
• Select a DTCS code within 023 to 754.

✓✓ Information
To return to the default code, push [QUICK] in the
step y as described above, and then push D-pad(Ent)

☞ Continued to the step i on the next page

17-15
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Tone squelch operation

DD DTCS code setting and operation (Continued)
Continued from step u on the previous page.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
ooPush [QUICK] .
!0Push D-pad() to select “TONE,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!1 Push D-pad() to select either “DTCSS" or

“DTCS" option.
• DTCSS : The DTCS squelch with pocket beep
function ON.
• DTCS : The DTCS squelch function ON.
• When stands by the reversed tone squelch function, se-
lect “DTCS-R.”
!2 Push D-pad(Ent) to set the DTCS squelch function,
and then close the QUICK Menu screen.
!3 Holding down [PTT] and call a desired station.
Operate as the normal way.

For your information: Sounds beep when a call is

received.
If “DTCSS” is selected in step !1, beeps sound
for 30 seconds and the icon “S” blinks when a call
with the matched DTCS code signal is received.
➥➥After receiving a call, hold down [PTT] within
30 seconds then start conversation, or push
D-pad(Ent) to cancel the pocket beep function
(“S” icon disappears). After that, the transceiver
selects regular DTCS squelch operation.
If no operation is performed within 30 seconds,
beeps stop sounding and the “S” icon blinking
remained.
• When receiving a call with “DTCSS” Appears.
• When reversed tone
squelch is selected
in step !,1 “DTCS-R”
icon appears.

p...
p, Bee
p, Bee
Bee

17-16
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■Cloning function
The ID-51A/E has data cloning capability. This function
is useful when you want to copy all of the programmed
contents from one ID-51A/E to another.
And PC cloning is also possible.

• Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a mi- • Cloning from a PC using a microSD card

croSD card (described on this page) (see page 17-20)

• Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a cable • Cloning from a PC using an optional data cable
(see page 17-21) (see page 17-20)

DDTransceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a microSD card

In this caption, describes cloning method using the
microSD card. Memory channel contents, MENU item
settings and repeater list can be stored onto a microSD
card.
Recorded voice memories are not included in the clon-
ing data. To play back the master transceiver’s voice
memory, attach the microSD card to sub transceiver, or
make a copy onto the sub transceiver’s microSD card
using a PC.
*Describes the case of the microSD card has already been
attached.

1. S
 aving the master transceiver’s setting data
onto the microSD card.
qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“SD card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)
SAVE SETTING screen
eePush D-pad() to select “Save Setting,” and then Select “<<New File>>”
push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “<<New File>>,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The FILE NAME screen is displayed.
ttThe file name is automatically named in the following
manner;
• “Setyyyymmdd_xx” (yyyy:Year, mm:month, dd:day, xx:
serial number)
• Example: When the 2nd file is saved on 3rd
December, 2012, the file is named
“Set20121203_02.”
• If you want to change the file name, see “Save with a dif-
ferent file name” (p. 2-7). ☞☞Continued on the next page
17-17
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Cloning function
DD Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a microSD
card (Continued)
yyPush D-pad(Ent) to set the file name.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

The confirmation screen “Save file?” appears.

uuPush D-pad() to select “YES,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to save.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.
iiPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

2. R
 emove the microSD card from the master trans-
ceiver, and then attach it to the sub transceiver. • Removing the microSD card
ooHold down the master transceiver’s [ ] to turn OFF
the power.
!0 Remove the microSD card from the master trans-
ceiver as shown at right.
!1 Attach the removed microSD card to the sub trans-
ceiver, then hold down the sub transceiver’s [ ] to
turn ON the power.

NEVER forcibly or inversely insert the card.

It will damage the card and/or the slot.

Slot cover Slot cover

Push the microSD card Pull the microSD
until a click sounds. card out.

17-18
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Cloning function
DD Transceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a microSD
card (Continued)
3. Loads the setting data into the sub transceiver.
!2 Push [MENU] .
!3 Push D-pad() to select the root item (“SD card”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

!4 Push D-pad() to select “Load Setting,” and then

push D-pad(Ent).
!5 Push D-pad() to select the desired setting file, and
then push D-pad(Ent). Selecting the file which
!6 Push D-pad() to select the desired loading content, is saved by the master
as shown below. transceiver.
• ALL: Loads all memory channels, item
settings in the menu list and the
Select “ALL” when all
repeater list into the transceiver.
memory channels,
• Except My Station: Loads all memory channels, item
MENU item settings
settings in the menu list except
and repeater list to
MY call signs and the repeater list
be copied.
into the transceiver.
• Repeater List Only: Loads only the repeater list into
the transceiver.
!7 Push D-pad(Ent).
• The “Keep ‘SKIP’ setting in Repeater List?” appears.
!8 Push D-pad() to select “YES” or “No.”
• When “Yes” is selected, the skip setting of the repeater
list is retained. (p. 9-36)
!9 Push D-pad(Ent).
• “Load file?” appears.
@0 Push D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-
pad(Ent) to start the file check.
• While checking the file, “FILE CHECKING” and a prog-
ress bar are displayed.
@1 After checking, settings data loading starts.
• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are dis-
played.
@2 After loading, “COMPLETED!” appears.
To complete the loaded, reboot the transceiver.

Reboot the transceiver

to complete the clon-
ing/data loading.

17-19
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Cloning function (Continued)

DDCloning from a PC using a microSD card
The cloning can be performed from a PC using a mi- • Connections
croSD card.

Set a desired memory channels, MENU item settings

and repeater list by the CS-51 cloning software (con-
tained in the CD), and save them in an “icf” file format.
Copy the “icf” file into the “Setting” folder in the “ID-51” to the Card
reader
folder of the microSD card.

• microSD card configuration

Attach the microSD card that includes the “icf” file, then
load it to complete the cloning.
Click
Gps

QsoLog
ID-51
Reply

RxLog

Setting
Click
Voice yyyymmdd

yyyymmdd

VoiceRec yyyymmdd

yyyymmdd
Click
VoiceTx

Copy the
“icf” file.

DDCloning from a PC using an optional data cable

Cloning can be performed using the CS-51 (contained • Connections
in the CD) and the optional OPC-2218LU.

See the CS-51 instruction manual (contained in the CD)

and the OPC-2218LU instruction manual (downloaded
from the Icom WEB site; http://www.icom.co.jp/world/)

NOTE: When using the optional OPC-2218LU

Before cloning, select “PTT” option in DV Data TX to [DATA] jack
item.
If “Auto” is selected, the transceiver may transmit with
the cloning data. OPC-2218LU to USB
(DV Set > DV Data TX) (optional) port PC

17-20
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ Cloning function (Continued)

DDTransceiver-to-Transceiver cloning using a cable
Connects two ID-51A/E (master and sub transceiver) • Connections
using a stereo audio cable (purchase locally). Master transceiver Sub transceiver
Use the stereo audio cable (3.5 (d) mm; 1⁄8″), purchase (sends a cloning data) (receives a cloning data)
locally.
*According to a stereo audio cable may not be used for clon-
3.5 mm (d); 1⁄8″
ing. Stereo plug

1. Transceivers connection
qqHold down [ ] to turn OFF the both master and sub to [SP] jack to [SP] jack
transceivers.
wwConnect a stereo audio cable between master and
sub transceiver at right.
eeHold down [ ] to turn ON the both master and sub • Stereo plug (purchase locally)
transceivers.

2. Setting on the Sub transceiver Less than 4.5 mm; 0.17″

rrOn the sub transceiver, push [MENU] .

ttPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Others”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen. • Screen of the master transceiver
yyPush D-pad() to select “Clone,” and then push D-
pad(Ent). “CLONE” screen
uuPush D-pad() to select “Clone Mode,” and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• The “Go to the Clone Mode?” appears.
iiPush D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The clone mode screen appears.

3. Setting on the Master transceiver

ooOn the master transceiver, push [MENU] .
!0 Push D-pad() to select the root item (“Others”), “CLONE-OUT” screen
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen. (While sending data)
!1 Push D-pad() to select “Clone,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
!2 Push D-pad() to select “Clone Master Mode,” and
then push D-pad(Ent).
• The “Go to the Clone Master Mode?” appears.
!3 Push D-pad() to select “Yes,” and then push D-
pad(Ent).
• The clone master mode screen appears.
!4 Push [PTT] on the master transceiver.
• On the sub transceiver, “CLONE-IN” screen appears.
Return to the
• On the master transceiver, “CLONE-OUT” screen ap-
pears.
“CLONE” screen
!5 When cloning is completed, the master transceiver
returns to the clone master mode screen.
• The sub transceiver displays “CLONE End” screen.
• If you have another ID-51A/E to clone, replace the sub
transceiver and then push [PTT] of the master transceiv-
er.
!6 Reboot the sub transceiver to enable the cloned set-
ting.

17-21
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■CI-V information
DDCI-V data setting
Set the ID-51A/E’s address, data transferring speed 9V15VDC
and transceive function. See page 16-70 for setting the
CI-V condition using the MENU list screen.
Function > CI-V

DDCI-V connection example

The transceiver can be connected through an optional RS-232C personal
computer
CT-17 ci-v level converter to a PC equipped with an cable
RS-232C port. CT-17
The Icom Communications Interface-V (CI-V) controls
the transceiver.
Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be con-
nected to the PC. 2-conductor 3.5(d) mm
plug must be used.
See the CT-17 instruction manual for details of remotely 3-conductor 3.5(d) mm
control a transceiver or receiver. plug must be used.
ID-51A/E

*Use the cable described at right. No received audio is heard

when the supplied control cable, coming with CT-17, is used
¡Connections (ID-51A/E side)
for the connection. SP
SP GND
GND
3.5(d)mm SP
I/O
I/O Less than 4.5(d)mm
*No speaker is necessary for the CT-17 side.

DDData format
The CI-V system can be operated using the following
data formats. Data formats differ depending on com-
mand numbers. A data area or sub command is added
to some commands.
Controller to ID-51A/E
q w e r t y u

FE FE 86 E0 Cn Sc Data area FD
(see the data content description)
BCD code data such as
Sub command number

for frequency, memory

(see the command table)

(see the command table)

Command number

End of message
default address

default address

number entry
Transceiver’s

Controller’s
code (fixed)

code (fixed)
Preamble

FE FE E0 86 Cn Sc Data area FD
q w e r* t y u
ID-51A/E to controller
*The reply messages from the transceiver are the command “FB” (OK)
or “FA” (NG).

17-22
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ CI-V information (Continued)

DDCommand table
Cmd. Sub Data Cmd. Sub Data
Description Description
cmd. cmd.
00 see p. 17-24 Send operating frequency for transceive 1B 00 see p. 17-24 Send/read Repeater tone frequency
01 see p. 17-24 Send operating mode for transceive 01 see p. 17-24 Send/read Tone squelch frequency
03 see p. 17-24 Read operating frequency 02 see p. 17-24 Send/read DTCS code and polarity
04 see p. 17-24 Read operating mode 07 see p. 17-25 Send/read CSQL code (DV mode)
05 see p. 17-24 Send operating frequency 1C 00 00 Send/read Transceiver’s status (RX)
06 see p. 17-24 Send operating mode 01 Send/read Transceiver’s status (TX)
07 D0 Select A band 1F 00 see p. 17-25 Send/read DV MY call sign
Dualwatch: Set the Main band as the A band 01 see p. 17-25 Send/read DV TX call signs
Single watch: Select the A band
02 see p. 17-25 Send/read DV TX message
D1 Select B band
Dualwatch: Set the Main band as the B band 20 00 00 00*3 Send/read Auto DV RX Call signs output OFF
Single watch: Select the B band 01*3 Send/read Auto DV RX Call signs output ON
0C see p. 17-24 Read frequency offset*1 01 see p. 17-26 Output DV RX Call signs
0D see p. 17-24 Send frequency offset 02 see p. 17-26 Read DV RX Call signs
0F Read duplex setting 01 00 00*3 Send/read Auto DV RX message output OFF
(10=simplex, 11=DUP–, 12=DUP+) 01*3 Send/read Auto DV RX message output ON
10 Set simplex operation 01 see p. 17-26 Output DV RX message
11 Set DUP– operation 02 see p. 17-26 Read DV RX message
12 Set DUP+ operation 02 00 00*3 Send/read Auto DV RX status output OFF
11 00 Send/read attenuator OFF (AIR band) 01*3 Send/read Auto DV RX status output ON
30 Send/read 30 dB attenuator (AIR band) 01 see p. 17-25 Output DV RX status
14 01 see p. 17-24 Send/read audio output level 02 see p. 17-25 Read DV RX status
03 see p. 17-24 Send/read squelch level
0A see p. 17-24 Send/read RF power setting
0B see p. 17-24 Send/read external microphone gain.
16 see p. 17-24 Send/read VOX gain.
15 01 00 Read noise/S-meter squelch status (squelch
close) *1: Less than 100 Hz is omitted.
01 Read noise/S-meter squelch status (squelch *2: When sending the power ON command (18 01), the com-
open)
mand “FE” must be sent before the basic format.
02 0000 to
0255
Read S-meter level (0000=S0, 0170=S9) • 19200bps ：50
05 00 Read tone squelch and RF squelch status • 9600bps ：26
(squelch close) • 4800bps ：14
01 Read tone squelch and RF squelch status • 1200bps ：5
(squelch open) • 300bps ：3
11 Read RF power meter e.g.: When operating with 4800 bps
0000 to
(0005=S-LOW, 0026=LOW1, 0051=LOW2,
0255 q w e r t u
0128=MID, 0255=HIGH)
16 42 00 Send/read Repeater tone OFF
01 Send/read Repeater tone ON F E F E F E 8 6 E O 1 8 0 1 F D
43 00 Send/read Tone squelch OFF ×14
01 Send/read Tone squelch ON
q Preamble code (fixed)
02 Send/read Reversed Tone squelch ON
w Transceiver’s default address
46 00 Send/read VOX function OFF
01 Send/read VOX function ON
e Controller’s default address
4B 00 Send/read DTCS OFF r Command number
01 Send/read DTCS ON t Sub command number
02 Send/read Reversed DTCS ON u End of message code (fixed)
59 00 Send/read Sub band OFF *3: O
 utput setting is automatically turned OFF after turning
01 Send/read Sub band ON the power OFF, then ON.
5B 00 Send/read DSQL/CSQL OFF (DV mode only)
01 Send/read DSQL ON (DV mode only)
02 Send/read CSQL ON (DV mode only)
18 00 Turning the transceiver power OFF
01 Turning the transceiver power ON*2
19 00 Read transceiver ID.

17-23
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ CI-V information (Continued)

• Receive frequency setting
Command: 00, 03, 05 • Squelch level setting
q w e r t Command: 1403
X 0 X X X X X X 0 4 OPEN AUTO LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3
0000–0022 0023–0046 0047–0069 0070–0092 0093–0115
(according to the 100 Hz digit)

LEVEL4 LEVEL5 LEVEL6 LEVEL7 LEVEL8

0116–0139 0140–0162 0163–0185 0186–0208 0209–0232
LEVEL9
0233–0255
100 Hz digit0,2 , 5, 7

10 MHz digit 0−9

100 kHz digit0−9

1 MHz digit 0−9

1000 MHz digit0

10 kHz digit0−9

100 MHz digit4

10H zdigit0, 5

1 kHz digit0−9

• RF power level setting

1 Hz digit0

Command: 140A
(Fixed)

(Fixed)

(Fixed)

S-LOW LOW1 LOW2 MID HIGH

0000–0050 0051–0101 0102–0153 0154–0204 0205–0255

*10 Hz digit is fixed to “5” when 100 Hz digit is either “2” or “7,” q w e r t
and fixed to “0” when 100 Hz digit is other than “2” and “7.” • External microphone gain setting
X 0 X X X X X X 0 4
Command: 140B

(according to the 100 Hz digit)

1 2 3 4
• Operating mode 0000–0063 0064–0127 0128–0191 0192–0255
qCommand:01,
w e 04, 06
q w

100 Hz digit0,2 , 5, 7
X X X X • VOX gain setting

10 MHz digit 0−9

100 kHz digit0−9

1 MHz digit 0−9

1000 MHz digit0

10 kHz digit0−9

100 MHz digit4

Command: 1416
10H zdigit0, 5

1 kHz digit0−9
Operating mode q Mode w Filter setting
OFF
1 Hz digit0 1 2 3 4
FM 05 01
(Fixed)

(Fixed)

(Fixed)
0000–0022 0023–0046 0047–0069 0070–0092 0093–0115
FM-N 05 02 5 6 7 8 9
0116–0139 0140–0162 0163–0185 0186–0208 0209–0232
DV 17 01
10
0233–0255

• Duplex Frequency offset setting

Command: 0C, 0D • Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting
q w e Command: 1B 00, 1B 01
q w e
X X X X X X q* w e
0 0 X X X X
100 kHz digit

q* w e
10 MHz digit
100 Hz digit

10 kHz digit

1 MHz digit
First digit: 0–7 1 kHz digit

X X 0 X X X
100 Hz digit

0.1 Hz digit
10 Hz digit

1 Hz digit
Fixed: 0

Fixed: 0
Second digit: 0–7
Third digit: 0–7

• Audio output level setting *Not necessary when setting a frequency.

0 (fixed)

Command: 1401
See page 16-16 for tone frequency list.
VOL0 VOL1 VOL2 VOL3 VOL4
0000–0005 0006–0012 0013–0018 0019–0025 0026–0031
Receive polarity: 0: Normal
VOL5 VOL6 VOL7 VOL8 VOL9
1: Reverse • DTCS code and polarity setting
0032–0037 0038–0044 0045–0050 0051–0057 0058–0063
VOL10 Transmit
VOL11 polarity:
VOL12 0: Normal VOL13 VOL14 Command : 1B 02
0064–0069 0070–0076 1: Reverse
0077–0082 0083–0089 0090–0095 q* w e
VOL15 VOL16 VOL17 VOL18 VOL19
0096–0101 0102–0108 0109–0114 0115–0121 0122–0127 X X 0 X X X
VOL20 VOL21 VOL22 VOL23 VOL24
0128–0133 0134–0140 0141–0146 0147–0153 0154–0159
VOL25 VOL26 VOL27 VOL28 VOL29
Second digit: 0–7
Third digit: 0–7

0160–0165 0166–0172 0173–0178 0179–0185 0186–0191

First digit: 0–7

VOL30 VOL31 VOL32 VOL33 VOL34

q
0192–0197
w 0198–0204 0205–0210 0211–0217 0218–0223
0 (fixed)

VOL35 VOL36 VOL37 VOL38 VOL39

0224–0229 0230–0236 0237–0242 0243–0249 0250–0255

Receive polarity: 0: Normal

1: Reverse
Transmit polarity: 0: Normal
1: Reverse

*See page 16-17 for DTCS code list.

17-24
q w
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ CI-V information (Continued)

• Digital code squelch setting • DV TX message setting
Command : 1B 07 Command : 1F 02
q Set the transmit message of up to 20 characters.
X X “FF” stops sending or reading messages.

Character ASCII code Character ASCII code

A–Z 41–5A a–z 61–7A
Second digit: 0–9

0–9 30–39 Space 20

First digit: 0–9

! 21 # 23
$ 24 % 25
& 26 \ 5C
? 3F " 22
’ 27 ` 60
• DV MY call sign setting ^ 5E + 2B
Command : 1F 00
– 2D ✱ 2A
Set your own call sign and note of up to 12 characters.
⁄ 2F . 2E
q–i o–!2
, 2C : 3A
X X ••• X X X X X X X X X X ; 3B = 3D
q–i : Your own call sign setting (8 characters) < 3C > 3E
o–!2 : Note setting (4 characters) ( 28 ) 29
[ 5B ] 5D
• DV TX call signs setting (24 characters) { 7B } 7D
Command : 1F 01 ¦ 7C _ 5F
Set “UR,” “R1” and “R2” call signs of 8 characters (fixed). ¯ 7E @ 40
q–i o–!6 !7–@4
X X ••• X X X X ••• X X X X ••• X X • DV RX Status setting
q–i: UR (Destination) call sign setting (8 characters) Command : 20 0201, 20 0202
o–!6: R1 (Access/Area repeater) call sign setting (8 char- Data Function Description
acters) bit7 0 (Fixed) —
!7–@4: R2 (Link/Gateway repeater) call sign setting (8 bit6 0/1 Receiving a During receiving a digital voice
characters) voice call signal, select “1.” (Regardless of
• Character’s code of the call sign DSQL and CSQL setting)
bit5 0/1 Last call finisher When the last call was finished
Character ASCII code
by you, select “1.”
0–9 30–39
bit4 0/1 Receiving a When the audio tone can be
A–Z 41–5A signal heard, select “1.”
(Space) 20 bit3 0/1 Receiving a BK During receiving a BK call, select
/ 2F call “1.”
bit2 0/1 Receiving a During receiving a EMR call,
EMR call select “1.”
bit1 0/1 Receiving a When “DV” and “FM” are blinking,
signal other than select “1.”
DV
bit0 0/1 Packet loss During displaying a packet loss
status

17-25
 Previous view

17 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■■ CI-V information (Continued)

• DV RX call sign setting • DV RX message
Command : 20 0001, 20 0002 Command: 20 0101, 20 0102
q Header flag data (First byte) q–@0 @1–@8 @9–#2
Data Description
X X ••• X X X X ••• X X X X X X
bit7 (0: Fixed) —
bit6 (0: Fixed) — q–@0: Message (20 characters)
bit5 (0: Fixed) — @1–@8: Call sign of the caller station (8 characters)
bit4 0/1 0= Voice, 1= Data @9–#2: Note of the caller station (4 characters)
bit3 0/1 0= Direct, 1= Through repeater
bit2 0/1 0= No Break-in, 1= Break-in • FF: When no call sign is received since the transceiver pow-
bit1 0/1 0= Data, 1= Control er ON.
bit0 0/1 0= Normal, 1= EMR

w Header flag data (Second byte)

Data
Description
bit2 bit1 bit0
1 1 1 Repeater control
1 1 0 Send auto acknowledge
1 0 1 (Not used)
1 0 0 Request to re-transmit
0 1 1 Send acknowledge
0 1 0 Receive no reply
0 0 1 Repeater disabled
0 0 0 NULL
e–!0: Call sign of the caller station (8 characters; fixed)
!1–!4: Note of the caller station (4 characters; fixed)
!5–@2: Call sign of the called station (8 characters; fixed)
@3–#0: Call sign of the access/area repeater (R1) (8 charac-
ters; fixed)
#1–#8: Call sign of the link/gateway repeater (R2) (8 charac-
ters; fixed)

• FF” stands for no call sign receiving after turning ON the

transceiver.

17-26
Previous view

Section 18 OPTIONS
■■ Option list........................................................... 18-2
■■ Optional HM-75LS
remote control speaker microphone. ........... 18-4
DD Remote control function setting. .................... 18-4
■■ VOX function...................................................... 18-5
DD Optional unit connection. ............................... 18-5
DD Selecting the headset type............................. 18-5
DD Turning the VOX function ON or OFF............. 18-6
DD VOX Level setting........................................... 18-7
DD VOX-related settings...................................... 18-8
■■ SJ-1 silicone jacket. ........................................ 18-8

18-1
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■Option list
• HM-186LS • HM-75LS • OPC-254L
speaker-microphone remote control dc power cable
For operation while con- speaker microphone For operation and charging using an external power
veniently hanging the Allows you to remotely supply.
transceiver from your select operating chan-
belt, and so on. nels, and other functions.

Fuse: 4 A

•H M-153LS/HM-166LS • BC-202 desktop charger+BC-123SA/SE ac adapter

earphone-microphone Rapidly charges the BP-271 li-ion battery pack in
Ideal for hands-free operation: clip the HM-153LS/ approximately 2 hours.
HM-166LS (with integrated PTT switch) to your lapel Rapidly charges the BP-272 li-ion battery pack in
or breast pocket. approximately 3.5 hours.
Allows you to operate in rainy condition.

HM-153LS HM-166LS
AC adapter Desktop charger

• CP-12L cigarette lighter cable with noise filter

• CP-19R cigarette lighter cable with dc-dc converter
Allows you to operate the transceiver through a 12 V cigarette lighter socket.
You can also charge the attached battery pack.
(By default, the battery pack cannot be charged during power ON.)
CP-19R: A built-in DC-DC converter provides an 11 V DC output.

CP-12L CP-19R

Fuse: 5 A
Fuse: 4 A

18-2
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■ Option list (Continued)

DD BATTERY PACK/CASE DD OTHER OPTIONS
• BP-271 li-ion battery pack • SP-13 earphone
7.4 V/1150 mAh (Min.) Lithium ion battery pack. Provides clear audio in noisy environments.
Battery life : Approximately 4.5 hours* (FM/DV) • HM-75A/HM-153/HM-166/HM-186 microphone or
• BP-272 li-ion battery pack SP-13 earphone +OPC-2144 plug adapter cable
7.4 V/1880 mAh (Min.) Lithium ion battery pack. HM-75A : Remote control Speaker microphone
Battery life : Approximately 7.5 hours* (FM) HM-153 : Earphone microphone
Approximately 6 hours* (DV) HM-166 : Earphone microphone
• BP-273 battery case HM-186 : Speaker microphone
Battery case for three LR6 (AA) alkaline batteries. SP-13 : Earphone
OPC-2144 : Allows you to connect the HM-75A/
*At High power, TX : RX: Standby = 1:1:8 HM-153/HM-166/HM-186/SP-13 to the
transceiver.
DD CHARGERS • HS-94/HS-95/HS-97 headset
• BC-167SA/SD/SV battery charger +OPC-2006LS plug adapter cable
For regular charging of the BP-271 or BP-272 Lithium HS-94 : Ear hook type
ion battery pack. HS-95 : Neck & arm type
Same as the supplied one. (Not supplied with some HS-97 : Throat microphone
transceiver version.) OPC-2006LS : Allows you to connect the HS-94/HS-
95/HS-97 to the transceiver. After con-
DD CLONING SOFTWARE necting, the VOX function can be used.
• CS-51 cloning software (free download) • LC-179 carrying case
Use this software to program settings such as mem- Helps protect the transceiver from scratches, and so
ory channels and Menu mode contents quickly and on.
easily through your USB port (OPC-2218LU). • SJ-1 silicone jacket
• OPC-2218LU data communication cable • AD-92SMA antenna connector adapter
Allows low-speed data communication in the DV mode, Allows you to connect an antenna or antenna cable
or data cloning with CS-51 (free download software). with a BNC connector.
• CT-17 ci-v level converter unit
For remote transceiver control using a personal com-
puter equipped with an RS-232C port. You can change
frequencies, operating mode, memory channels, and
so on, using your computer.

Approved Icom optional equipment is designed for

optimal performance when used with an Icom trans-
ceiver.
Icom is not responsible for the destruction or damage
to an Icom transceiver in the event the Icom transceiv-
er is used with equipment that is not manufactured or
approved by Icom.

18-3
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■Optional HM-75LS remote control speaker microphone

The optional HM-75LS allows you to remotely select Microphone
Transmit LED
operating frequencies, memory channels, and others.
The function assignments for keys can be changed in PTT switch A
B

the MENU screen for simple remote control operation.

(p. 16-67)
(MENU > Function > Remote MIC Key) OFF ON
Speaker
LOCK

 he HM-75LS has a lock switch on the backside to pre-

T
vent accidental frequency changes, and so on.
Earphone jack

Be sure to turn OFF power when plugging or unplug-

ging the HM-75LS into or from the [MIC/SP] jack. Example: To change the remote control function as-
signed to [A] from “BAND” to “TO(DR).”

DDRemote control function setting

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”),
and then push D-pad(Ent).
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

eePush D-pad() to select “Remote MIC Key,” and

then push D-pad(Ent).
rrPush D-pad() to select “During RX/Standby” or
“During TX,” and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: During RX/Standby
ttPush D-pad() to select the desired key, and then
push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: [A]
yyPush D-pad() to select the desired key function,
and then push D-pad(Ent).
• Example: “TO (DR)”
uuPush [MENU] to save, and exit the MENU
screen.

✓✓ Information— Returning to default

All key functions:
Push [QUICK] in the “Dur-
ing RX/Standby” or “During TX” Key function
screen, then push D-pad(Ent) list for [A] key
to return all key functions to
their default setting.

Each key function:

Push [QUICK] in the key
function list screen of each
key, and then push D-pad(Ent)
to return to the key’s default
setting.

18-4
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■VOX function
The transceiver has a VOX function, which allows
hands-free operation.
An optional HS-94, HS-95 or HS-97 headset and the
OPC-2006LS plug adapter cable are also required.
• The VOX (voice operated transmission) function starts trans-
mission when you speak into the microphone, without need-
ing to push [PTT]. It then automatically returns to reception
when you stop speaking.

Transceiver OPC-2006LS
 NOTE: Set the external microphone gain before set-
ting the VOX gain in the MENU screen. We recom-
mend you set the microphone gain level to 3.
(MENU > Function > MIC Gain (External))
HS-94
DDOptional unit connection
qqTurn OFF the transceiver.
wwLift up the jack cover.
eeConnect the HS-94, HS-95 or HS-97 and the OPC- Be sure to turn OFF power when plugging in or un-
2006LS, as illustrated to the right. plugging the OPC-2006LS into or from the [MIC/SP]
jack.

DDSelecting the headset type

Before using the VOX function, select the headset
type.

qqTurn ON the transceiver.

wwPush [MENU] .
eePush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Function > VOX > Headset Select)

rrRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
ttPush
 D-pad() to select the option.
HS-95 : Select when using the HS-95.
Other : Select when using the HS-94 or HS-97.
yyPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

18-5
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■ VOX function (Cntinued)

DDTurning the VOX function ON or OFF
qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrPush D-pad() to select “ON.”
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.
• “ VOX” appears.

Appears

18-6
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■ VOX function (Cntinued)

DDVOX Level setting
 NOTE: Set the external microphone gain before set-
ting the VOX gain in the MENU screen. We recom-
mend you set the microphone gain level to 3.
(MENU > Function > MIC Gain (External))

qqPush [MENU] .
wwPush D-pad() to select the root item (“Function”),
and then push D-pad(Ent) to go to the next screen.
D-pad
(Ent)
(�)

(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX Level)

eeRefer to the menu sequence shown directly above
and push D-pad() to select, and then D-pad(Ent)
to enter, one or more times until the last screen is
displayed.
rrWhile speaking into the headset microphone, rotate
[DIAL] to adjust the VOX Level until “VOX” continu-
ously appears.
• The VOX Level can be adjusted between 1 (minimum)
and 10 (maximum), or turned OFF. Higher values make
the VOX function more sensitive to your voice.
(Default: 5)
ttPush [MENU] to exit the MENU screen.

• If the TX/RX indicator blinks, set the VOX Delay in

the MENU screen. (p. 16-70)
(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX Delay)
• When the VOX function is ON, you can adjust the
VOX level by rotating [DIAL] while transmitting.

Appears when speaking.

Appears if you rotate [DIAL]

while transmitting.

18-7
 Previous view

18 OPTIONS

■■ VOX function (Cntinued)

DDVOX-related settings
The VOX Delay and the VOX time-out timer can be set
in the MENU screen.

• VOX delay
Sets the VOX delay to between 0.5 and 3.0 seconds
(in 0.5 seconds steps). The VOX delay is the amount of
time the transmitter stays ON after you stop speaking.
(Default: 0.5)
(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX Delay)

If “VOX” is intermittent, set the VOX delay long

enough to allow normal pauses in speech, but turn
OFF the VOX after you finish speaking.

• VOX time-out timer

Sets the VOX Time-Out Timer to between 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 10 and 15 minutes to prevent accidental prolonged
transmission.
To turn OFF the function, select “OFF.” (Default: 3)
(MENU > Function > VOX > VOX Time-out Timer)

 he VOX Time-Out Timer must be set shorter than

T
the transceiver Time-Out Timer, otherwise this timer
will not be activated.

■■SJ-1 silicone jacket

The SJ-1 silicone jacket can be used when the BP-
271 battery pack is attached to the transceiver.
When the BP-272 battery pack or BP-273 battery
case is attached, the jacket cannot be used.

Before attaching or removing the jacket, be sure to

disconnect the antenna from the transceiver.

To attach:
qqPlace the antenna connector and [DIAL] of the
transceiver into the holes on the top of the jacket, as
shown to the right.
wwPull the jacket around the sides and bottom of the
transceiver.
• When the belt clip is attached, push it out from the hole
on back of the jacket.

To remove:
qqRemove the jacket from bottom of the transceiver.
• If a belt clip is attached, pull the jacket around the bottom
of the clip.
wwPull the antenna connector and [DIAL] from the jack-
et, and remove it from the transceiver.

18-8
Previous view

Section 19 SPECIFICATIONS
■■ Transceiver......................................................... 19-2
DD General.......................................................... 19-2
DD Transmitter. .................................................... 19-2
DD Receiver......................................................... 19-3
■■ BC-202 desktop charger................................. 19-3

19-1
 Previous view

19 SPECIFICATIONS

■■Transceiver
DDGeneral DDTransmitter
• Frequency coverage : (unit: MHz) • Modulation system :
EUR, KOR
TX 144–146, 430–440 FM Variable reactance freq.
RX 144–146, 430–440 modulation
TX 144–146, 430–440 DV GMSK reactance freq.
UK
RX 108–174*1, 380–479*2
modulation
TX 144–146, 430–434, 435–438
ITR
• Output power (at 7.4 V DC) : High 5.0 W, Mid. 2.5 W,
108–136.995,*1 144–146,
RX Low2 1.0 W, Low1 0.5 W,
430–434, 435–438
TX 144–148, 430–450*3 S-Low 0.1 W (Typical)
U.S.A.
RX 108–174*4, 380–479*3 • Max. frequency deviation : ±5.0 kHz (FM wide: approx.)
EXP
TX 137–174*4, 400–479*2 ±2.5 kHz (FM narrow: approx.)
RX 108–174*4, 380–479*2 • Spurious emissions : Less than –60 dBc at High/Mid.
TX 144–148, 430–440
EXP-1 Less than –13 dBm at Low2/
RX 108–174*4, 380–479*2
Low1/S-Low
BC Radio (AM): 0.520–1.710 kHz
ALL RX • Ext. mic. impedance : 2.2 kW
BC Radio (FM): 76.0–108.0 MHz*5

*1Guaranteed 144–146 MHz only

*2Guaranteed 430–440 MHz only
*3Guaranteed 440–450 MHz only
*4Guaranteed 144–148 MHz only
*588.0–108.0 MHz for the USA version transciever.

The SUB band audio signal may be muted, depending on

the combination of operating band and mode.

• Mode : FM, AM (Rx only), DV

• Number of memory channels
: 554
(incl. 50 scan edges and 4 call channels)
• Number of BC radio memory channels
: 500
• Usable temp. range : –20°C to +60°C; –4°F to +140°F
• Tuning steps : 1, 5, 6.25, 8.33, 9, 10, 12.5, 15, 20,
25, 30, 50, 100, 125 and 200 kHz
*The selectable steps may differ, depending on the selected fre-
quency band or operating mode.
• Frequency stability : ±2.5 ppm
(–20°C to +60°C; –4°F to +140°F)
• Power supply : 10.0–16.0 V DC for external DC
power, or specified Icom’s battery
pack
• Digital transmission speed : 4.8 kbps
• Voice coding speed : 2.4 kbps
• Current drain (at 7.4 V DC) :
TX (at 5 W) Less than 2.5 A
RX Max. output FM Less than 350 mA (Internal speaker)
Less than 200 mA (External speaker)
DV Less than 450 mA (Internal speaker)
 Less than 300 mA (External speaker)
• Antenna connector : SMA (50 W)
• Dimensions : 58(W)×105.4(H)×26.4(D) mm;
(projections not included) 2.3(W)×4.1(H)×1.0(D) in
• Weight (approximately) : 255 g; 9 oz
(incl. battery pack and antenna)

All stated specifications are subject to change without notice

or obligation.
19-2
 Previous view

19 SPECIFICATIONS

■■ Transceiver (Continued)
■■BC-202 desktop charger
DDReceiver • Power supply requirement : 12 to 16 V DC or the specified
• Receive system : Double-conversion Icom AC adapter (BC-123S)
superheterodyne • Charging temperature range : 0˚C to +40˚C; +32˚F to +104˚F
• Intermediate frequencies • Weight : Approximately 104 g; 3.7 oz
A Band : 46.35 MHz (1st IF) (without AC adapter)
: 450 kHz (2nd IF) • Dimensions : 88(W)×72.6(D)×46.5(H) mm;
B Band : 61.65 MHz (1st IF) 3.5(W)×2.9(D)×1.8(H) in.
: 450 kHz (2nd IF) (projection is not included)
• Sensitivity (except spurious points)
AM (1 kHz 30% MOD; 10 dB S/N)
0.520 to 0.995 MHz : Less than +10 dBμ
1.000 to 1.710 MHz : Less than +5 dBμ
108.000 to 136.995 MHz : Less than +5 dBμ
FM (1 kHz/3.5 kHz Dev.; 12 dB SINAD)
137.0 to 174.0 MHz
Amateur band only : Less than −15 dBμ
Except for Amateur band : Less than −10 dBμ
380.0 to 479.0 MHz
Amateur band only : Less than −15 dBμ
Except for Amateur band : Less than −10 dBμ
WFM (1 kHz/52.5 kHz Dev.; 12 dB SINAD)
76.0 to 81.9 MHz : Less than +10 dBμ
82.0 to 108.0 MHz : Less than +5 dBμ
DV (PN9/GMSK 4.8 kbps; BER 1%)
137.0 to 174.0 MHz
Amateur band only : Less than −11 dBμ
380.0 to 479.0 MHz
Amateur band only : Less than −11 dBμ
• Audio output power (at 10% distortion)
Internal speaker : More than 0.4 W with a 16 Ω load
External speaker : More than 0.2 W with a 8 Ω load
• Selectivity
FM (Wide) : More than 55 dB
FM (Narrow), DV : More than 50 dB
• Ext. speaker connector : 3-conductor 3.5(d) mm; (1⁄8˝)/8 W
• Spurious and image rejection ratio
: More than 60 dB
• Squelch Sensitivity (except spurious points)
AM (1 kHz 30% MOD; 10 dB S/N) (threshold)
0.520 to 0.995 MHz : Less than +10 dBμ
1.000 to 1.710 MHz : Less than +5 dBμ
108.000 to 136.995 MHz : Less than +5 dBμ
FM (1 kHz/3.5 kHz Dev.; 12 dB SINAD) (threshold)
137.0 to 174.0 MHz
Amateur band only : Less than −15 dBμ
Except for Amateur band : Less than −10 dBμ
380.0 to 479.0 MHz
Amateur band only : Less than −15 dBμ
Except for Amateur band : Less than −10 dBμ
WFM (1 kHz/52.5 kHz Dev.; 12 dB SINAD) (threshold)
76.0 to 81.9 MHz : Less than +15 dBμ
82.0 to 108.0 MHz : Less than +10 dBμ

19-3
 Previous view

TROUBLESHOOTING

The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions.
If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your nearest Icom
Dealer or Service Center.

DD While operating D-STAR

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
After your call, the repeater • The repeater setting is wrong. • Select the correct repeater. p. 8-2
does not return a status re- • Y our transmission did not reach the re- • C orrect the repeater frequency, fre- pp. 9-28, 9-29
ply. peater. quency offset, or duplex setting.
• Wait until you are closer to the repeater —
and try again.
• Try to access another repeater. —
After your call, the repeater • The call was successfully sent, but no • Wait for a while, and try again. —
replies ‘UR?’ and its call station immediately replied.
sign.

After your call, the repeater • Your own call sign (MY) has not been • Set your own call sign (MY). p. 2 of the Ba-
replies ‘RX’ or ‘RPT?’ and set. sic Instruction
the access repeater’s call • Your own call sign (MY) has not been • Register your own call sign (MY) on a p. 4 of the Ba-
sign. registered on a gateway repeater, or the gateway repeater, or confirm the regis- sic Instruction
registered contents do not match your tration of the call sign.
transceiver’s setting.

After your call, the repeater • The repeater cannot connect to the • Check the repeater setting. p. 9-23
replies ‘RPT?’ and call sign destination repeater.
of the destination repeater. • The repeater is busy. • Wait for a while, and try it again. —
After your call, the access • The call sign of the destination repeater • Correctly set the destination repeater p. 9-26
repeater replies ‘RPT?’ and is wrong. call sign.
its call sign.
Even holding down , • There is no repeater list in your radio. •R  eload the repeater list using the CS- p. 17-20
the DR mode will not appear. 51 cloning software on the CD.
• Reload the repeater list using a mi- p. 2-13
croSD card.
• Enter the Repeater list data directly p. 9-23
into the transceiver.
Even holding down , the • The call sign has not been correctly re- • Try it again, after the transceiver has —
received call sign will not set ceived. correctly received the call sign.
to the destination call sign. • When a received signal is weak, or a
signal is received during scanning, the
call sign may not be received correctly.
In that case, “--------” appears and error
beeps sound, and a reply call cannot be
made.
A Local area call can be •M  Y call sign has not been registered on • Register your own call sign (MY) on a
p. 4 of the Ba-
made, but the Gateway call a D-STAR repeater. gateway repeater, or confirm the regis-
sic Instruction
or destination station call tration of the call sign.
cannot be made.
During transmission, “L” ap- • While receiving through the internet, • Wait a while, and try it again. —
pears on the LCD, and the some packets may be lost due to net- When the transceiver receives cor-
received audio is interrupted. work error (poor data throughput per- rupted data, and misidentifies it is as
formance). Packet Loss, “L” is displayed, even if it
is a Local area call.

“DV” and “FM” icons alter- • While in the DV mode, an FM signal is • Use a different operating frequency un- p. 9-10
nately blink. received. til there are no FM signals on the origi-
nal frequency.

20-1
 Previous view

TROUBLESHOOTING

DD While operating D-STAR (Continued)

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
The simplex operation can- • A call sign is programmed in “CALL • Delete the Call sign in “CALL SIGN” p. 9-26
not be made in the DR SIGN” of the Repeater list. setting of the Repeater list.
mode. • Duplex mode (DUP+, DUP–) is set. • Select “OFF” in “DUP” setting of the p. 9-29
repeater list.
• A repeater frequency is programmed. • Set a simplex frequency. p. 9-27
The digital code squelch • The wrong digital code is set. • Set the correct digital code. p. 9-20
(CSQL) is impossible.
You don’t know how to up- — • See “Updating the repeater list” to p. 2-13
date the repeater list. check.

DDWhile operating GPS Logger

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Position data cannot be re- • “External GPS” is selected in the GPS • Connect an external GPS receiver. p. 10-2
ceived. Set item on the Menu screen, but an ex-
ternal GPS receiver is not connected.
• “OFF” or “Manual” is selected in the • S  elect either “Internal GPS” or “Exter- p. 10-2
GPS Set item on the Menu screen. nal GPS” in the GPS Set item on the
Menu screen.
• A GPS signal was not received. • Move until the GPS signal is received. —

20-2
Previous view

TROUBLESHOOTING

DDOthers

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Transceiver does not turn • The battery is exhausted. • Charge the battery pack, or replace the pp. 4-3, 4-4
ON. batteries.
• The battery polarity is reversed. • Check the battery polarity in the case. p. 4-4
• Loose connection of a battery pack • Clean the battery terminals. pp. 4-3, 4-4
(case).
No sound comes from the • Volume level is too low. • Rotate [VOL] to adjust to a desired p. 5-2
speaker. level.
•A  n external speaker or a cloning cable • Check the external speaker connection —
is connected to the [SP] jack. or remove the cloning cable.
Sensitivity is too low, and • The coaxial cable is not connected, or • Check the coaxial cable connection or —
only strong signals are au- shorted. (External antenna is used) replace with the new.
dible.
Transmitting is impossible. • The transmit power level is set to S- • Set the transmit power level to HIGH. p. 5-10
LOW, LOW1 or LOW2
• The battery is exhausted. • Charge the battery pack, or replace the pp. 4-3, 4-4
batteries.
• The battery case is attached. • Use the battery pack or external DC p. 4-6
power, and set the transmit power level
to HIGH.
• The PTT Lock function is activated. • Set the PTT Lock function to OFF in p. 16-68
the Function Menu.
• The Busy Lockout function is activated. • Set the Busy Lockout function to OFF p. 16-68
in the Function Menu.
No reply is received after a • The duplex is set, and the receive and • Set the simplex operation. p. 15-5
call. transmit frequencies are different.
•N  o station is in range or on the same • Wait for a while, and try again.
frequency.
Transmitting using the VOX • The VOX Level is set to OFF or too low. • S  et the VOX Level to a suitable level. p. 16-69
function is impossible. • The MIC Gain is too low. • Set the MIC Gain to a suitable level. p. 16-69
Contacting another station is •A  different tone or code is used for the • Check the tone/DTCS by performing a p. 13-2
impossible. tone/DTCS squelch. tone scan.
Frequency cannot be set. • The Key Lock function is activated. • Hold down [LOCK] for 1 second to p. 5-11
cancel the Key Lock function.
• The memory mode, Call channel mode, • Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO p. 5-8
Weather channel mode* or DR mode is mode.
selected.
*USA version transceiver only
A Program Scan does not • The memory mode, Call channel mode, • Push [V/MHz] to select the VFO p. 5-8
start. Weather channel mode* or DR mode is mode.
selected.
*USA version transceiver only
• The same frequency has been pro- • Program different frequencies in the p. 12-4
grammed in the scan edge channels, scan edge channels.
“✱A” and “✱B.”
•O  nly one scan edge channel has been • Program one or more pair of the scan p. 12-4
programmed. edge channels.
A Memory Scan does not • The Memory mode is not selected. • Push [M/CALL] to select the Mem- p. 5-8
start. ory mode.
• Only one or no memory channel has • Program two or more memory chan- p. 12-4
been programmed. nels.

The displayed frequency is • The CPU has malfunctioned. • Reset the transceiver. p. 16-86
erroneous. • External factors have caused a fault. • Remove and reattach the battery pack/ p. 1-2
case.

20-3
 Previous view

TROUBLESHOOTING

DD Others (Continued)

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

The SUB band audio signal • The combination of operating band and • Change the settings. p. 5-13
is muted. mode is incorrect.
A distorted noise is heard • The earphone mode is OFF. • Turn ON the earphone mode. p. 16-78
when the earphone is used.
Charging is impossible at • “Charging (Power ON)” setting is OFF • Set the “Charging (Power ON)” setting p. 16-71
power ON. (default). to ON in the Function Menu.*
*This operation may generate certain spurious signals; the S-meter appears, or noise may be heard.

20-4
 Previous view

INDEX

1 Power Save, turning ON/OFF … ……………… 6-17

Skip, setting … ………………………………… 6-15
1750 Hz tone … …………………………………… 15-7 Squelch level, setting … ………………………… 6-7
Tuning step, setting (AM Only) … ……………… 6-8
A Volume Select … ……………………………… 6-19
BK mode, turning ON/OFF … ……………………… 9-7
AF Tone for the DV mode
RX Bass, setting … …………………………… 16-55
RX Bass Boost, setting ………………………… 16-55 C
RX Treble, setting … …………………………… 16-55
TX Bass, setting ………………………………… 16-55 Call channel, selecting … ………………………… 12-3
TX Treble, setting … …………………………… 16-55 Call sign
AM radio mode, selection …………………………… 6-5 Viewing … ……………………………………… 9-21
Antenna, installing …………………………………… 1-2 Your own Call Sign (MY), viewing … ………… 16-54
ATT (AIR) function, setting … …………………… 5-11 Your Call Sign (UR)
Attenuator function, setting … ……………………… 6-6 Memory … …………………………………… 16-52
Audio volume level, setting … ……………………… 5-2 Deleting … …………………………………… 9-42
Audio volume level (BC Radio), setting … ……… 6-20 Programming ………………………………… 9-40
Automatic Reply function, setting … …………… 9-11 Rearrange the display order … …………… 9-43
Auto Position Reply function, description … … 9-13 Compass Direction, changing … ………………… 10-4
Auto Reply voice, playing back/recording …… 9-12 CI-V
Auto repeater function, setting …………………… 15-6 Data format ……………………………………… 17-22
Command table ………………………………… 17-23
Connection example …………………………… 17-22
B Information ……………………………………… 17-22
Band Scope function, sweeping … ……………… 5-12 Cloning
Battery Cloning function ………………………………… 17-17
Replacement … …………………………………… 4-4 From a PC
Battery life … ……………………………………… 4-2 Using a microSD card………………………… 17-20
Information ………………………………………… 4-2 Using an optional data cable………………… 17-20
Optional battery pack … ……………………… 18-3 Transceiver-to-Transceiver
Optional battery case … ………………… 4-4, 18-3 Using a cable ………………………………… 17-21
Battery charging Using a microSD card … …………………… 17-17
BC-202 desktop charger … ……………………… 2-2
Cautions ……………………………………… 4-3, 4-5
Through the [DC IN] jack ………………………… 4-3 D
With the optional desktop charger … …………… 4-5 Data communication
External DC power, operation …………………… 4-6 Low-speed data communication ……………… 9-14
Optional battery chargers ……………………… 18-3 Digital call sign squelch, setting … ……………… 9-19
Broadcast (BC) Radio operation …………………… 6-2 Pocket beep function, description … ………… 9-19
Radio mode (AM/FM), selection ………………… 6-5 Digital code squelch, setting …………………… 9-20
Auto Mute, setting ……………………………… 6-18 Pocket beep function, description … ………… 9-20
Bank, selection … ………………………………… 6-4 Digital Code, selecting … ………………………… 16-17
BC Radio setting … …………………………… 6-17 Digital Monitor, setting … ………………………… 16-56
Broadcast signal, searching ……………………… 6-5 Digital Repeater Set, turning ON/OFF … ……… 16-57
Memory … ………………………………………… 6-9 Digital squelch functions, setting ………………… 9-19
Adding …………………………………………… 6-9 Display ………………………………………………… 3-5
Deleting … …………………………………… 6-12 Display size in the DR mode, setting … …………… 9-9
Editing ………………………………………… 6-13 D-PRS, description … …………………………… 10-18
Rearrange the display order … …………… 6-14 DTCS Squelch, operation ………………………… 17-15
FM Antenna, selecting ………………………… 6-17 Code, selecting … ……………………………… 16-17
Listening Polarity, selecting … …………………………… 16-17
BC Radio Mode ……………………………… 6-16
Mode selection … ……………………………… 6-3 ☞☞“D” continues on the next page.
While monitoring two ham bands … ………… 6-3
20-5
 Previous view

INDEX

D (Continued) F
DTMF Code FM
Memory … ……………………………………… 17-8 FM Antenna, selecting ………………………… 6-17
Monitoring … …………………………………… 17-9 FM radio mode, selection ………………………… 6-5
Programming …………………………………… 17-8 Repeater operation … ………………………… 15-2
Transmission … ………………………… 17-10, 17-11 Frequency setting (VFO mode) … ………………… 5-6
Transfer speed setting … ……………………… 17-12 Frequency offset, setting … ……………………… 15-4
Dualwatch operation ……………………………… 5-13 “FROM” (Access repeater) setting … ……………… 8-2
Duplex Using the DR mode scan ………………………… 8-4
Direction, setting … …………………………… 15-5 Using the preloaded repeater list … …………… 8-3
Frequency offset, setting … …………………… 15-4 Using the Repeater Search function … ………… 8-5
Off band indication … ………………………… 15-5 Using the TX History ……………………………… 8-7
Operation … …………………………………… 15-4 Front, top and side panels … ……………………… 3-2
D-STAR operation
Automatic Reply function, setting … … 9-11, 16-27
BK mode, setting … ……………………………… 9-7 G
Call Sign (☞ See ‘Call sign’)
Digital squelch functions … …………………… 9-19 GPS
Display type, setting … …………………………… 9-9 Alarm setting … ………………………………… 10-14
DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode …………………… 5-8 Auto transmission
Communication Form … ……………………… 7-3 Setting ………………………………… 10-24, 16-47
“FROM” (Access repeater) setting …………… 8-2 GPS Information (Sky view screen), viewing … 10-6
“TO” (Destination) setting ……………………… 8-8 GPS-A
DR mode scan, skip setting …………………… 9-36 Altitude, turning ON/OFF …………………… 16-43
Group … ……………………………………… 9-37 Comment, programming … ………………… 16-47
Individual … ………………………………… 9-36 Data Extension, setting … ………………… 16-43
DV automatic detection, turning ON/OFF …… 9-10 D-PRS, description … ……………………… 10-18
DV Auto Reply, recording ……………………… 16-27 Symbol, setting ……………………………… 16-44
DV Data TX, setting … ………………………… 16-56 Symbol channel, setting … ………………… 16-44
EMR communication, setting … ………………… 9-8 Symbol list …………………………………… 16-45
Low-speed data communication ……………… 9-14 Setting ………………………………………… 10-19
Message operation … …………………… 9-2, 16-54 SSID … ……………………………………… 16-46
Deleting … ……………………………………… 9-4 Time Stamp … ……………………………… 16-43
Transmission …………………………………… 9-3 Transmitting … ……………………………… 10-18
My Call Sign, viewing … ……………………… 16-54 Unproto Address … ………………………… 16-42
Received call sign announcement … ………… 9-15 Grid Locator
Repeater detail screen, viewing … …………… 9-39 Changing the Grid Locator … ……………… 10-4
Repeater list (☞ See ‘Repeater list’) Group name programming … ………………… 10-11
RX Call Sign Write, setting … ………………… 16-57 Indicator, turning ON/OFF … ………………… 16-33
RX History Information, viewing … ………………………… 16-34
Viewing … ……………………………… 9-5, 16-50 Logger function … ……………………………… 10-25
Adding the Repeater information … ……… 9-35 Turning ON/OFF … ………………… 10-26, 16-39
RX Repeater Write, setting … ………………… 16-57 Operating outline … ………………………… 10-25
RX>CS call sign announcement ……………… 9-16 Record Interval, setting … ………… 10-26, 16-39
TX Message, programming …………………… 16-54 <<GPS Logger Only>> mode ……… 10-29, 16-40

E
EMR
AF level, setting … ………………………………… 9-9
EMR setting … …………………………………… 9-8

☞☞“G” continues on the next page.

20-6
 Previous view

INDEX

G M
GPS (Continued) MAIN band selection ………………………… 5-3, 5-13
Manual Position, programming … …………… 16-32 Memory bank
Mapping software, displaying your position…… 10-23 Assigning a memory channel … ……………… 12-7
Memory … ……………………………… 10-7, 16-36 Programming …………………………………… 12-8
Adding… ……………………………………… 10-7 Selection ………………………………………… 12-9
Deleting … …………………………………… 10-12 Setting …………………………………………… 12-7
Editing… ……………………………………… 10-7 Memory channel
Rearrange the display order … …………… 10-13 Channel mode selecting … ……………………… 5-8
Message, programming … …………… 10-17, 16-42 Contents ………………………………………… 12-2
Operation … …………………………………… 10-2 Copying
Output. turing ON/OFF ………………………… 16-33 To another Memory or Call channel … …… 12-6
Position To VFO … …………………………………… 12-5
Viewing … …………………… 10-3, 16-34, 16-35 Clearing … ……………………………………… 12-13
Saving ………………………………………… 10-5 General description … ………………………… 12-2
Receiver, selecting … ………………………… 16-32 Name, programming …………………………… 12-10
Position Format, selecting … ………………… 16-33 Selecting display … ………………………… 12-12
Power Save (Internal GPS), setting … ……… 16-32 Programming …………………………………… 12-4
Sentence, setting … …………………… 10-16, 16-41 Selecting ………………………………………… 12-3
Speed Units, setting …………………………… 16-33 MIC Gain setting ………………………………… 11-19
Transmitting GPS data ………………………… 10-16 Monitor function ………………………………… 5-7, 6-7
TX Mode, setting … …………………………… 16-40 MENU screen ……………………………………… 16-2
Viewing the route on a PC Map … …………… 10-27 Broadcast (BC) Radio items … ……………… 16-30
Call sign items … ……………………………… 16-48
Display items … ………………………………… 16-72
H
DTMF/T-CALL items …………………………… 16-61
Hand strap … ………………………………………… 1-3 DUP/TONE items … …………………………… 16-16
HM-75LS remote control speaker microphone … 18-4 DV Memory items … …………………………… 16-52
Remote control function setting … …………… 18-4 DV Set items … ………………………………… 16-55
Home CH Beep function … ……………………… 17-5 Entering the Menu screen … ………………… 16-3
Operation … …………………………………… 17-5 Function items … ……………………………… 16-65
Setting …………………………………………… 17-5 GPS items … …………………………………… 16-32
Menu items and Default settings ……………… 16-4
My Station items … …………………………… 16-54
K QSO/RX Log items … ………………………… 16-62
RX History items … …………………………… 16-50
Key Lock function … ……………………………… 5-11
Scan items ……………………………………… 16-18
SD Card items … ……………………………… 16-84
L SPEECH items … ……………………………… 16-59
Sounds items …………………………………… 16-78
Low-speed data communication ………………… 9-14 Time set items … ……………………………… 16-82
Application setting ……………………………… 9-14 Voice Memo items ……………………………… 16-22
Connection ……………………………………… 9-14 Voice TX items … ……………………………… 16-28
Operation … …………………………………… 9-14 microSD card … ……………………………………… 2-2
Backup to your PC ……………………………… 2-12
Folder composition … ………………………… 2-11
Inserting … ………………………………………… 2-3
Loading the saved data … ……………………… 2-9
Removing … ……………………………………… 2-4
Saving data …………………………………… 2-2, 2-5
Saving ……………………………………………… 2-7
Viewing the free space and recordable time …11-22
MY Call Sign (☞ See ‘Call sign’)
20-7
 Previous view

INDEX

N Q
Name QSO recorder
Memory/bank/scan, programming … ………… 12-10 File
Repeater group, programming … …………… 9-38 Information, viewing ………………………… 11-14
Transceiver’s setting file … ……………………… 2-7 Split, setting … ……………………………… 16-24
Scan link, programming … …………………… 16-21 Folder
Deleting … …………………………………… 11-10
Information, viewing ………………………… 11-15
O Pausing … ……………………………………… 11-6
Playing back … ………………………… 11-4, 16-22
Off band indication ………………………………… 15-5
Fast-forward … ……………………………… 11-6
Option list ………………………………………… 18-2
Playing the next file … ……………………… 11-6
CHARGERS … ………………………………… 18-3
Playing the previously file … ……………… 11-6
CLONING SOFTWARE … …………………… 18-3
Pause … ……………………………………… 11-6
BATTERY PACK/CASE ………………………… 18-3
Rewind … …………………………………… 11-6
OTHER OPTIONS ……………………………… 18-3
Operation … ………………………………… 11-6
Operating band selection …………………………… 5-4
Recorded audio, deleting ……………………… 11-9
Operating mode selection …………………………… 5-7
Recording a QSO audio … …………………… 11-2
Continue to record (no signals are received)… … 11-11
P Recording mode, setting …………… 11-5, 16-23
Record TX/RX audio into the same file …… 11-12
Playing back (QSO) … …………………… 11-4, 16-22 <<REC Start>> ……………………………… 16-22
Playing back (Voice Recorder) …………… 11-17, 16-25 Start to record with [PTT]… ………………… 11-13
Position Format, setting ………………………… 16-33 RX REC Condition, setting … ………………… 16-23
Power Skip time, setting … …………………… 11-7, 16-24
Power ON … ……………………………………… 5-2 Voice Player screen’s description … ………… 11-8
Power Save (BC Radio) … …………………… 6-17
Power Save (Internal GPS) …………………… 16-32
Priority watch … …………………………………… 14-2
DR mode and a priority channel ……… 14-3, 14-13
DR mode scan and a priority channel … 14-3, 14-16
VFO frequency and a Memory/Bank scan…… 14-2, 14-6
VFO frequency and a priority channel…… 14-2, 14-4
VFO scan and a Memory/Bank scan… 14-2, 14-10
VFO scan and a priority channel ……… 14-2, 14-8
Program scan (☞ See ‘Scan’)
PTT Auto REC … ………………………………… 16-24

20-8
 Previous view

INDEX

R S
Receiving ……………………………………………… 5-9 Scan
Recording Bank Link setting … …………………………… 16-19
Auto Reply audio ………………………… 9-12, 16-27 Description ……………………………………… 13-2
QSO audio ………………………… 11-2, 11-3, 16-22 During Dualwatch operation, description … … 13-4
Voice Recorder…………………………… 11-16, 16-24 Link channel, deleting … ……………………… 16-21
Voice TX audio … ……………………… 17-2, 16-28 Memory bank scan
Record Interval (GPS Logger) …………………… 16-39 Description …………………………………… 13-2
Repeater Operation … ………………………………… 13-10
Checking the repeater input signal …………… 15-3 Memory scan
Repeater detail screen ………………………… 9-39 Description …………………………………… 13-2
Repeater group name programming … ……… 9-38 Operation … ………………………………… 13-9
Repeater List … …………………………… 9-22, 16-52 Pause Timer, setting …………………………… 16-18
Contents ………………………………………… 9-22 Program Link, adding … ……………………… 16-20
Default values …………………………………… 9-44 Program scan link name programming … …… 16-21
Deleting … ……………………………………… 9-33 Program Skip, turning ON/OFF … …………… 16-19
Editing …………………………………………… 9-32 Receive mode, description … ………………… 13-3
Programming …………………………………… 9-23 Resume Timer, setting ………………………… 16-18
Rearrange the display order … ……………… 9-34 Scan name, description … …………………… 13-4
Updating ………………………………………… 2-13 Scanning direction, description … …………… 13-3
RX Bass … ………………………………………… 16-55 Scan Stop Beep function, description … …… 13-4
RX Bass Boost … ………………………………… 16-55 Skip function, description ……………………… 13-3
RX Call Sign Write ………………………………… 16-57 Skip frequencies setting … ………………… 13-7
RX History … ……………………………………… 16-50 Clearing the skip setting … ………………… 13-8
Adding the Repeater information … ………… 9-35 Skip channel setting ………………………… 13-12
Received call sign viewing … …………………… 9-5 Squelch setting … ……………………………… 13-3
View in the RX History screen …………………… 9-5 VFO scan
RX REC Condition ………………………………… 16-23 Description …………………………………… 13-2
RX Repeater Write ………………………………… 16-57 Operation … ………………………………… 13-5
RX Treble …………………………………………… 16-55 When a signal is received … ………………… 13-4
Speech function ……………………………… 9-15, 17-6
[DIAL] speech function ………………………… 17-6
Mode speech function … ……………………… 17-7
Language selection … ………………………… 9-17
Level selection … ……………………………… 9-18
Phonetic Code setting … ……………………… 9-17
Received call sign announcement … ………… 9-15
RX>CS call sign announcement ……………… 9-16
Speed selection ………………………………… 9-18
Squelch
Level setting ………………………………………… 5-6
Level setting (BC Radio) … ……………………… 6-7
Level setting (Scan) … ………………………… 13-3
Volume setting for Dualwatch … ………………… 5-14
SJ-1 silicone jacket … …………………………… 18-8
Skip
Channel setting ………………………………… 13-12
Setting for the BC radio memory ……………… 6-15
Setting for the DR mode scan ………………… 9-36
Skip function … ………………………………… 13-3
Skip Time, setting … …………………………… 16-24
Speed Units, setting … …………………………… 16-33
SSID, selecting … ………………………………… 16-46
Sweep operation … ……………………………… 5-12
20-9
 Previous view

INDEX

T V
Transmit power levels … ………………………… 5-10 VFO mode … ………………………………………… 5-8
Temporary skip function … ……………………… 13-13 Voice TX function … ……………………………… 17-2
Temporary Skip timer … ……………………… 13-3 Play Files ………………………………………… 16-29
Time Stamp ………………………………………… 16-43 Recording … …………………………………… 17-2
“TO” (Destination) setting …………………………… 8-8 Repeat Time setting … ………………………… 17-4
Directly inputting (RPT) … …………………… 8-15 The recorded voice audio playing back ……… 17-2
Directly inputting (UR) … ……………………… 8-14 Transmit … ……………………………………… 17-3
Using the RX History … … ……………………… 8-12 Voice Recorder function … ……………………… 11-16
Using the TX History …………………………… 8-13 Changing the skip time ………………………… 11-20
Using the “Your Call Sign” … ………………… 8-11 Erasing the recorded contents (audio) … …… 11-18
Using the “Gateway CQ” (Gateway call) … … 8-10 Play Files ………………………………………… 16-25
Using the “Local CQ” (Local Area call) … ……… 8-9 Playing back … ………………………………… 11-17
Tone Burst … ……………………………………… 16-17 Playing back on a PC … ……………………… 11-23
Tone squelch Viewing the file information … ………………… 11-21
Frequency, setting ……………………………… 17-13 VOX function … …………………………………… 18-5
Operation … …………………………………… 17-13 Headset, selecting type … …………………… 18-5
Transmitting (VFO) ………………………………… 5-10 Turning ON or OFF … ………………………… 18-6
Transmitting GPS-A data … ……………………… 10-18 VOX gain, setting … …………………………… 18-7
Transmitting GPS data … ………………………… 10-16 VOX-related settings …………………………… 18-8
Troubleshooting … ………………………………… 20-1
Others …………………………………………… 20-3
While operating D-STAR … …………………… 20-1 W
While operating GPS Logger … ……………… 20-2
Weather alert function … ………………………… 5-15
Tuning step
Operation … …………………………………… 5-15
Tuning step for a VFO scan …………………… 13-3
Channel selection ……………………………… 5-15
Tuning step selection … ………………………… 5-5
Tuning step (AM Only) setting …………………… 6-8
TX Bass … ………………………………………… 16-55 Y
TX Message … …………………………………… 16-54
TX message deleting ………………………………… 9-4 Your Call Sign ……………………………………… 16-52
TX Monitor function … …………………………… 17-4 Your (destination) call sign programming … … 9-40
TX Treble …………………………………………… 16-55 Your setting is correct? …………………………… 9-45

U
Unproto Address … ……………………………… 16-42

20-10
A-7056-2EX-0b
© 2012–2014 Icom Inc. 1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan